You are on page 1of 374

Owner’s manual

California Proposition 65 WARNING:


Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose
you to chemicals including such as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and
lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to:
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle
Ghibli

Owner's Manual
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Maserati.
This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and
racing vehicles.
With this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and options of your Maserati in order to take advantage
of its full potential.
Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly
acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch
Control Plus guide directly from the dashboard touchscreen display of your vehicle.
The updated version of the onboard documentation can be consulted by accessing the section “SERVICES” on the website
www.maserati.com or by using the specific apps developed for the more common Tablet and Smartphone.
In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure
steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving.
Keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and
protect the environment.
For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other operation, contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer: you can trust our
trained technical staff, who is constantly updated and provided with the required equipment in order to ensure that all
service operations are performed properly and reliably.
The Quick guide and other documents contained in onboard documentation kit are integral part of the vehicle and
should always be kept on board.
You can purchase a printed copy of the documents visible on dashboard touchscreen display at your dealer of your
Authorized Maserati Dealer.

2
WARNING!
CALIFORNIA proposition 65.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including such
as, engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates and lead, that which are know to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle

3
4
Introduction 1

Before Starting 2

Understanding the Vehicle 3

Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4

Driving 5

In an Emergency 6

Maintenance and Care 7

Features and Specifications 8

Index 9

5
6
1 – Introduction
Consulting the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Warnings when Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Maserati Roadside Assistance Program
(available for USA and Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vehicle Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

7
Introduction

Consulting the Manual Abbreviations


1 For an easy identification of the topics, WARNING! Some descriptions and terms with
this Manual is divided into sections Failure to comply with the instructions particular meanings are found in this
and chapters: each chapter can have could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS manual in abbreviated form.
more paragraphs. involving personal and vehicle safety.
A/C Air-Conditioning system.
Within the text, important warnings
and notes are also easily identifiable ABA Advanced Brake Assist.
through icons. ENVIRONMENTAL! ABS Anti-Lock Braking System.
This note indicates the correct ABSA Active Blind Spot Assist.
behavior when using the vehicle to ACC Adaptive Cruise Control.
WARNING! protect the environment.
ADAS Advanced Driver Assistance
California Proposition 65 Systems.
Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle ALR Automatic Locking Retractor.
CAUTION!
can expose you to chemicals including Aimed at preventing any damage to AQS Air Quality Sensor.
such as, engine exhaust, carbon the vehicle and thus hazards involving ATC Automatic Temperature
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that the safety of persons. Control.
which are know to the State of
AWD All-Wheel Drive.
California to cause cancer and birth NOTE:
defects or other reproductive harm. To BAS Brake Assist System.
minimize exposure, avoid breathing Additional information regarding the BSA Blind Spot Assist.
exhaust, do not idle the engine except subject and/or the operation
described. BTO Brake Throttle Override.
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
CAN Controller Area Network.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
• “Left” and “right” in this manual, CC Cruise Control.
or wash your hands frequently when
always refer to the driving direction.
servicing your vehicle. For more CRS Child Restraint System.
information go to: • All indications and images in this
Manual refer to a vehicle with DRL Daytime Running Lights.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle left-hand drive. On right-hand drive EBD Electronic Brake-force
vehicles, some controls are ordered Distribution.
differently than shown in the ECU Electronic Control Unit.
illustrations.

8
Introduction

EDR Event Data Recorder. SABIC Supplemental Side Air Bag Updating
EPB Electric Parking Brake. Inflatable Curtains. Constant improvements are being 1
ESC Electronic Stability Control. SBR Seat Belt Reminder. performed to maintain this vehicle's
SRS Supplemental Restraint high level of quality. Therefore, there
ETC Electronic Throttle Control.
System. may be differences between this
FCW Forward Collision Warning. manual and your vehicle.
TCS Traction Control System.
HAS Highway Assist. Maserati reserves the right to carry
TFT Thin Film Transistor. out design and functional changes
HSA Hill Start Assist.
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring and to provide updates or
HBA Hydraulic Brake Assistance.
System. improvements.
I.C.E. Increased Control and This Owner's Manual illustrates and
TSA Traffic Sign Assist.
Efficiency. describes all versions of the current
VIN Vehicle Identification
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether vehicle model. Therefore, some of the
Number.
for Children. equipment and accessories in this
LDW Lane Departure Warning publication may not appear on your
(LaneSense). vehicle; please only consider the
information related to your vehicle.
LKA Lane Keeping Assist. All specifications and illustrations
MIL Malfunction Indicator Light. contained in this manual are as of the
MTC+ Maserati Touch Control Plus. Manual publishing date.
OBD On Board Diagnostics. NOTE:
ORC Occupant Restraint The updated version of the on-board
Controller. documentation can be consulted by
PDC Park Distance Control. accessing the section “SERVICES” on
the website www.maserati.com or by
RAB Ready Alert Braking.
using the specific apps developed for
RCP Rear Cross Path. the more common Tablet and
RKE Remote Keyless Entry. Smartphone.
SAB Side Air Bag.

9
Introduction

Service and Warranty that do not comply with Maserati’s Suggestions for Obtaining
specifications.
1 The information provided in this An Authorized Maserati Dealer is at Service for Your Vehicle
manual is limited to instructions and your complete disposal for any
indications that are strictly required information and questions you may
Prepare for the Appointment
for vehicle use and proper have. If warranty work is required, be sure to
maintenance. have the right papers with you and
By following these instructions take your warranty folder. Not all work
carefully, the vehicle will meet the being performed may be covered by
owner's satisfaction and best results. the warranty: therefore discuss
We advise to have all service and additional charges with the service
inspections completed only by an manager. It is advisable to keep a
Authorized Maserati Dealer, where maintenance log of your vehicle’s
you will find a specially trained staff service history, as this can often
and the proper equipment to repair provide a clue to the current problem.
your vehicle.
Please visit the www.maserati.com to Prepare a List
find the nearest Authorized Maserati Make a written list of your vehicle’s
Dealer. problems or the specific work you wish
All features and accessories installed to be performed. If the vehicle has had
on the vehicle have been designed by an accident or work done that is not
Maserati engineers and have indicated on the maintenance log,
successfully passed rigorous tests, please communicate this to the service
submitted in all conditions of use. advisor.
Installing aftermarket components or
accessories not approved by Maserati Optimize the Requests
may interfere with the vehicle If there are a number of items needing
electronics and compromise driving attention, it is advisable to discuss this
safety and possibly voiding the with your service advisor to agree on
warranty coverage. the order of priorities.
Nor do the warranties cover the costs At many Authorized Dealers/Service
of repairing damage or conditions Centers, it is possible to obtain a
caused by any changes to your vehicle loaner vehicle or a rental vehicle at a

10
Introduction
minimal daily charge. If you need a If You Need Assistance Contact:
rental vehicle, it is advisable to make MASERATI North America, Inc.
these arrangements prior to the visit, The manufacturer/Maserati and its 250 Sylvan Avenue
1
for example when you call to set the Authorized Dealers/Service Network Englewood Cliffs
appointment. set highest priority to the client’s NJ 07632
satisfaction with the products and Phone:
services. Maserati Customer Care
Warranty service must be performed 1-877-MY-MASERATI (877-696-2737) or
by an Authorized Maserati 1-201-510-2369
Dealer/Service Center.
Should there be any issues, please
keep in mind that most matters can be
resolved with the following process.
• If for some reason you are still not
satisfied, please contact the general
manager or owner of the Service
Center, it is their responsibility to
assist you.
• If a Service Center is unable to
resolve the issue, you may contact
Maserati Customer Center.
Any communication to the Maserati
Consumer Affairs should include the
following information:
• Owner’s name and address.
• Owner’s telephone number (home
and office).
• Maserati Service Center name.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage.

11
Introduction

Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects in addition to notifying Maserati North


America, Inc.
1 Please refer to the Warranty booklet, NHTSA’s Toll-free Auto Safety Transport Canada can be contacted at:
included in the Owner’s Hotline 1-800-333-0510
documentation kit, for the terms and Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
provisions of Maserati warranties If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash, Fax: 1-819-994-3372
applicable to this vehicle and market. Mailing Address: Transport Canada -
injury or death, immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau,
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to (Quebec) J8Z 0A1.
notifying Maserati North America, Inc. In Canada
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it If you believe that your vehicle has a
finds that a safety defect exists in a safety defect, contact the Customer
group of vehicles, it may order a recall Service Department immediately.
and remedy campaign. However, Canadian customers who wish to
NHTSA cannot become involved in report a safety defect to the Canadian
individual problems between you, your government should contact Transport
dealer, or Maserati North America, Inc. Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Investigations and Recalls at
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect
that could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada

12
Introduction

Parts Service Aftermarket Parts & distributed by Maserati North


America, Inc.
Genuine parts keep the reliability, Accessories Statement 1
comfort and performance of your new Modification of the vehicle or
car unchanged throughout its life. installation of any accessory or
For service and scheduled components attached to the vehicle
maintenance Maserati suggests you to which alters the original engineering
ask for genuine parts since they are and/or vehicle operating
the result of constant research and specifications, or which result in
development, reliability test and new damage to the other original
technologies, as well as they are components, electrical interference,
specifically designed for this vehicle. electrical short(s), radio static, water
leaks and wind noise may result in
damage to genuine components,
compromise the safety of the vehicle
and affect the validity of the new car
warranty on the vehicle.

Non-genuine Maserati Parts


Non-genuine Maserati Parts (while
you may elect to use non-genuine
Maserati parts for maintenance or
repair services), Maserati North
America, Inc. is not obligated to pay
for repairs that include non-genuine
Maserati parts or for any damage
resulting from the use of non-genuine
parts.
Maserati will not accept any liability
for any parts and accessories not
approved by Maserati, including
Dealer-installed accessories not

13
Introduction

Symbols Coolant expansion Battery - jack


1 There are specific colored plates on or reservoir Refer to the owner manual.
near some of the components on your Do not open cap with
Maserati designed to attract user’s engine warm.
attention. Important warnings Coil - headlights
concerning all specific devices that the High voltage.
WARNING!
user must consider, are reported on
California Proposition 65
the internal hood cover central label Belts and pulleys
Operating, servicing and maintaining
(see “Vehicle Identification Data” in Moving parts, keep body
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
this section). and clothing clear.
can expose you to chemicals including
All symbols reported on the plate and Air-conditioning lines such as, engine exhaust, carbon
inside the vehicle, as well as the High pressure gas, do not monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
component for which the symbols open. which are know to the State of
stand, are summarized in the
California to cause cancer and birth
following list. These symbols are
divided into categories according to
Symbols of Prohibitions and defects or other reproductive harm. To
Compulsory Measures minimize exposure, avoid breathing
their meaning.
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
Battery as necessary, service your vehicle in a
Danger Symbols
Keep away from flames. well-ventilated area and wear gloves
Battery or wash your hands frequently when
Corrosive liquid. Battery servicing your vehicle. For more
Keep out of children’s information go to:
Battery reach. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
Explosion. Heat guards - belts - vehicle
pulleys - fans
Blower Do not touch.
May start automatically
Battery
even with engine off.
Wear eye protection.

14
Introduction

Warning Symbols Windshield washer fluid Warnings when Driving


Engine - Engine Oil Filler reservoir Always comply with local traffic 1
Cap Windshield washer. We regulations wherever you drive.
Engine oil. We recommend recommend using a liquid Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
using an oil with the with the characteristics may result in loss of control or a
characteristics indicated in indicated in chapter collision.
chapter “Refillings” in “Refillings” in section Operating this vehicle at excessive
section “Features and “Features and speed or in an altered state or while
Specifications”. Specifications”. intoxicated may result in loss of
Brake fluid reservoir control, going off the road, or
Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do overturning. In all these situations a
not exceed max. level. We collision with other vehicles or objects
WARNING! is more likely to happen with the risk
recommend using a fluid
with the characteristics California Proposition 65 to cause an accident that may lead to
indicated in chapter Operating, servicing and maintaining serious injury.
“Refillings” in section a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle In case of an accident, failure to use
“Features and can expose you to chemicals including seat belts causes the driver and
Specifications”. such as, engine exhaust, carbon passengers a greater risk of injury or
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that death. Use your seat belt at all times.
Radiator coolant expansion which are know to the State of
reservoir This Owner's Manual contains
California to cause cancer and birth warnings against operating
Use antifreeze liquid for defects or other reproductive harm. To
radiators. We recommend procedures that could result in a
minimize exposure, avoid breathing collision or injury or damage to the
using a liquid with the exhaust, do not idle the engine except
characteristics indicated in environment. It also contains cautions
as necessary, service your vehicle in a against procedures that could damage
chapter “Refillings” in well-ventilated area and wear gloves
section “Features and the vehicle.
or wash your hands frequently when If you do not read this manual in its
Specifications”. servicing your vehicle. For more entirety, you may miss important
information go to: information. Consider carefully all
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- warnings and cautions.
vehicle

15
Introduction
is necessary to recharge the battery in Maserati Roadside
order to allow all vehicle’s components
1 WARNING! and systems to function correctly. Assistance Program
• It is the driver’s responsibility to (available for USA and
operate the vehicle in a safe way: if
you are distracted while driving you
Canada only)
can lose control and cause serious Welcome to Maserati and the benefits
accidents. and security of the Maserati Roadside
• Maserati strongly recommends you Assistance Program. Please take a
use particular care when operating moment to review the benefits listed
the features and tools that may below and available to you through
distract you. the Maserati Roadside Assistance
• Mobile phones, PC, portable audio Program.
device or other features operated Emergency Roadside Services
while the vehicle is moving can be
very dangerous and can cause In the event you require Roadside
serious accidents, and in some states Assistance, please call 1-888-371-1802,
is against the law. 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You
will be connected with a Roadside
• It is very dangerous to send text Assistance representative who will
messages while driving; do so only dispatch a local towing vendor.
when the vehicle is not moving.
• In some Countries/States the use of Information needed for when
mobile phones when driving is you call
forbidden: it is the driver’s sole When you call, please be prepared to
responsibility to respect local provide the following information:
regulations.
• Your Name.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
CAUTION! • Location of your vehicle.
If battery charge is too low, proper • Nature of your call (for example; you
function of some electric/electronic require a tow, vehicle will not start,
components may not be guaranteed. It out of gas, tire service, etc.).

16
Introduction

Summary of Program Benefits days of the rental car transaction to NOTE:


and Services the address listed below; the original Membership is intended to cover
pre-printed rental car receipt, which
1
• Towing of a disabled registered emergencies and is not intended to be
must include your name, address, a substitute for proper vehicle
Maserati vehicle. In the event a
telephone number, VIN, rental dates maintenance or repair. Repeated calls
registered vehicle becomes disabled
and the corresponding warranty which are considered by Maserati
in connection to a warranty related
repair order. North America, Inc. Signature Motor
concern it will be transported to the
nearest Authorized Maserati Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of
Dealership. You may request that Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. California, Inc. to be excessive may, at
the vehicle be taken to a different P.O. Box 8140 Ft. our discretion, result in cancellation of
Authorized Maserati Dealer, as long Washington, PA 19034 the membership.
as it is no more than 50 miles further NOTE: Emergency road service providers are
away from the nearest authorized independent contractors and are not
dealer (one tow per disablement). An authorized licensed driver must be
driving at the time of the disablement. employees, agents or representatives
• Battery jump start. of Maserati North America, Inc.
• Flat tire change providing the Items excluded from coverage: Signature Motor Club, Inc. or
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. • Parts, labor, tire repair, rental of Signature Motor Club of California,
• Fuel delivery (up to 2 gallons). towing equipment, storage fees, or Inc.
• Lockout Services. any labor performed at the service Under this Agreement
• Service Loaner Vehicle: For warranty facility.
• You will not be required to pay any
repairs, your dealer may provide you • Any form of impound towing, or sum for services up to the mileage
with a Maserati Service Loaner towing by someone other than a limit on towing.
Vehicle (if available) or provide you licensed service station or garage.
• Your registered Maserati vehicle is
with Rental Car allowance: in the • Assistance from a private citizen. the vehicle covered. The Vehicle
event your vehicle is disabled due to Identification Number (VIN) that
a warranty related concern, we will appears on the vehicle represents
reimburse you up to $50 per day. A your identification number with
five (5) day or $250 maximum Signature Motor Club, Inc. or
applies. In order to receive Signature Motor Club of California,
reimbursement, you must supply the Inc.
following information within 20

17
Introduction
• NEW VEHICLES: Your membership Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept. Vehicle Identification Data
begins on the date the Registered P.O. Box 8140
1 Vehicle was originally sold (in service Ft. Washington, PA 19034 Vehicle Identification Number
date) and continues until the
expiration date of the New Car The vehicle's identification number
Limited Warranty or unless (VIN) is punched on the foot platform,
terminated by Maserati North in front of the right-hand front seat.
America, Inc. for cause.
• PRE OWNED VEHICLES: Your
membership begins on the date the
registered vehicle was sold (in service
date) and continues until the
expiration date of the Maserati
Certified Pre-Owned Limited
Warranty or unless terminated by
Maserati North America, Inc for
cause.
Address Inquiries to To read the number, lift the mat and
rotate the guard.
General Inquiries:
Maserati Roadside Assistance
P.O. Box 968008
Schaumburg, IL 60173
Rental Car Reimbursements:
Within 20 days of your rental car
transaction, the original pre-printed
rental car receipt, which must include
your name, address, telephone
number, VIN, rental dates and the
corresponding warranty repair order
should be submitted to: The VIN Number is also visible from
Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN: the outside through the windshield on
the front left corner of the dashboard.

18
Introduction

NOTE: Passenger Air bag Labels Another label is applied on the


When ordering spare parts or making The labels are applied on the external dashboard to indicate that air bag
inquiries, always quote the vehicle side of sun visors and behind it, on the system is installed.
identification number. dome.

Warning and Identification


Labels
Overview label with cautions and
warning notes
The centrally attached label placed
inside the engine hood cover displays
cautions, warnings, and symbols.
For further information refer to
“Symbols” in this section.

19
Introduction
Danger Restart Engine with Hood
Open Label
1
The label is applied on the lower right
side of the hood.

NOTE: NOTE:
For further informations see “Tire To ensure optimum performance and
Safety Information” in section fuel economy, please ensure to refill
"Driving". your vehicle using Premium Unleaded
Loading Information Label Fuel ONLY, with a minimum of 91 AKI.
Paint Identification Label
This label applied on the driver's side
rear door pillar attests the compliance The label is applied on the lower left
with safety standards. side of the hood.

Tire Information Label Fuel Warning Label


This paper label is applied on the The label is applied inside the fuel
driver's side rear door pillar. filler door.

20
2 – Before Starting
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Unlock the Vehicle with Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Trunk Lid Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Trunk Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Hood Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Occupants Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear Parking Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Surround View Camera System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Park Assist (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

21
Before Starting

Keys Keyless Ignition Device


The vehicle is equipped with a Remote This device allows the driver to
Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless operate the ignition switch with the
Ignition Node, to enter, start and push of a button, as long as the
protect the vehicle. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
2 is inside the vehicle.

In case the ignition switch does not


change by pushing a button, the RKE
transmitter (key fob) may have a low
or discharged battery. If this occurs it is
necessary to replace the battery in
order to operate the ignition switch
(see “Requiring and Setting Additional
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has Key fobs” in this section).
three operating setups indicated on It is still possible to operate the
the outer ring. Pressing and releasing ignition device using the key fob RKE
the middle button, you can switch transmitter with discharged battery by
from one setup to the next without pressing the nose side (side opposite of
starting the engine, the switched on the emergency key) of the key fob on
indication will turn amber. the START/STOP button.
The engine will start by pushing the
center button START/STOP with the
brake pedal pressed and the device set
in any of the three operating setups.

22
Before Starting
NOTE:
You can insert either side of the
emergency key into the lock cylinder.

Shift Ignition Device to OFF


Alert 2
Opening the driver's door to exit the
vehicle when the ignition device is set
in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a
beep will remind you to cycle the
Key fob You can keep the emergency key with
you when using valet parking. ignition to OFF.
This vehicle is provided with two In addition to the acoustic signal a
To remove the emergency key:
programmed key fobs. dedicated message is displayed on the
The key fob contains a Remote Keyless • hold the mechanical latch on the instrument cluster.
Entry (RKE) transmitter and an back of the key fob sideways; If the ignition device is left in the ACC
emergency key that is inserted in to • simultaneously remove the or RUN position, when vehicle is
the remote. emergency key by sliding laterally locked the system will turn off the
The emergency key allows you to towards the end of the key fob. instrument cluster and automatically
open the vehicle by inserting into the set ignition device to OFF.
lock of the opening handle on the With the MTC+ System, the power
driver's door, in case the battery of the window switches, radio, power
vehicle or the key fob go dead. sunroof (optional), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is cycled to
the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature, it is
possible to set the timing of this
feature.

23
Before Starting
NOTE: switch to OFF and lock all doors Sentry Key® Immobilizer
Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in Section when leaving the vehicle
unattended. System
“Dashboard Instruments and Controls”
for further information. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System
prevents unauthorized vehicle
2 operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or
WARNING! activated. Operation is automatic,
• When leaving the vehicle, always regardless of whether the vehicle is
remove the key fob and lock your locked or unlocked.
vehicle. The system uses a key fob with Remote
• Do not allow children to be in a Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an
vehicle unattended or with access to ignition switch and a RF (Radio
an unlocked vehicle. A child or Frequency) receiver to prevent
others could be seriously or fatally unauthorized vehicle operation.
injured. Children should be warned Therefore, only key fobs expressly
not to touch the parking brake programmed can be used to start and
trigger, brake pedal or the shift operate the vehicle.
lever. After placing the ignition in the RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light (see
• Do not leave the key fob in or near
picture) will light up for a three
the vehicle, and do not leave the
seconds bulb check.
ignition switch in the ACC or RUN
mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals
inside parked vehicles in hot
weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• An unlocked car is an invitation to
thieves. Always remove the key fob
from vehicle, cycle the ignition
24
Before Starting
If the light remains on after the bulb Operation is subject to the following NOTE:
check, it indicates that there is a conditions: • When having the Sentry Key®
problem with the electronics: this • This device may not cause harmful Immobilizer System serviced, bring
condition will result in the engine interference. all key fobs provided with the
being shut off after two seconds. vehicle with you to the Authorized
• This device must accept any
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on
interference that may be received, Maserati Dealer. 2
during normal vehicle operation
including interference that may • When selling the vehicle, it is
(engine running for longer than 10
cause undesired operation. necessary to provide the new owner
seconds), an electronic fault is
with all key fobs.
detected. Should this occur, contact Replacement Key fobs
the Authorized Maserati Dealer as
soon as possible for assistance. NOTE:
Only key fobs that are updated with
the vehicle electronics can be used to
CAUTION! start and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is
not compatible with some remote
starting systems that can be installed
in after-market. WARNING!
Use of these systems may result in • Always remove the key fobs from
vehicle starting problems and loss of the vehicle and lock all doors when
security protection. leaving the vehicle unattended.
All key fobs provided with the new • Always remember to cycle the
vehicle have been updated with the ignition switch to OFF.
vehicle electronics and are therefore
Duplication of key fobs may be
able to guarantee correct functioning
performed by an Authorized Maserati
and protection.
Dealer only.
General Information This procedure consists of
programming a key fob that has never
This device complies with Part 15 of
been programmed to the vehicle’s
the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry
electronics.
Canada.

25
Before Starting

Vehicle Security Alarm and will then flash slowly until the located on the driver door trim
vehicle is disarmed. panel with the driver and/or
The vehicle security alarm monitors the passenger door open.
vehicle doors and trunk for
unauthorized entry and the
2 START/STOP button for unauthorized
operations.
The system includes a dual function
anti-intrusion sensor and vehicle
anti-lift sensor. The anti-intrusion
sensor monitors the vehicle interior for
motion.
The vehicle anti-lift sensor monitors
the vehicle for any lifting or tilting Rearming the System
actions (tow away, tire removal, ferry If something triggers the security
transport, etc). A siren with battery alarm, and no quick action is taken to
backup which senses interruptions of disarm it, the vehicle security alarm
power and communications is also will turn off the beeper after 29
included. seconds, and turn off all of the visual
While the vehicle security alarm is signals after 31 more seconds; the
enabled, interior door locks switches, vehicle security alarm will then rearm
trunk lid and fuel filler door release itself.
are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will Arming the System
provide the following audible and Follow these steps to arm the vehicle
visible signals: intermittent buzzer, • Press the button on the exterior
security alarm.
position lights and/or turn signals and “Passive Entry” door handle having
the vehicle security light on the • Make sure the vehicle ignition switch a valid key fob RKE transmitter in
dashboard will flash. is OFF. the same exterior zone (see
This light will fast flash for • Perform one of the following “Passive Entry System” in this
approximately 15 seconds, when the methods to lock the vehicle: section for further information).
vehicle security alarm is being armed, • Press the lock button on the
interior power door lock switch

26
Before Starting
will remain open if it was left open. In possible to disable these sensors by
this condition, it will be necessary to pressing the button on the key fob
first close the trunk lid as described three times within 5 seconds from the
under "Trunk Lid Operation" in this moment the system has been armed
section, and repeat the arming (meanwhile the security alarm light
operation, to be able to arm the alarm flashes rapidly). 2
system.
Vehicles equipped with Power Trunk To disarm the System
Lid/Hands Free option a button - Use any of the following steps to
located at the bottom of the trunk lid disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• Press the lock button on the key and indicated in the figure - that can • Press the button on key fob RKE
fob RKE transmitter. be used to completely close and lock transmitter.
the trunk lid, lock all the doors and
• Grasp the “Passive Entry” unlock
arm the alarm system if all the
door handle (see “Passive Entry
passengers and driver doors and trunk
System” in this section for further
lid are closed.
information).
See chapter “ Trunk Lid Operation” in
this section for further information. • Press the START/STOP button so as
to release the OFF position.
NOTE:
• When the vehicle security alarm is
armed, the interior power door lock
switch will not allow unlocking of
• If any door is open, close it. the doors.
In any of these situations, if one or
• The use of the emergency key into
more windows are open, they will
the driver door lock and the use of
remain open. To close the windows
the button on the key fob
press again the lock button and
cannot arm or disarm the security
hold it until their closure.
Each time the vehicle security alarm is alarm of the vehicle.
If vehicle is equipped with Power
Trunk Lid/Hands Free, when arming armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift • The vehicle security alarm remains
the alarm system in any of the sensors actively monitor the vehicle. engaged while accessing the power
described ways, the power trunk lid When arming the security alarm, it is (Continued)

27
Before Starting
(Continued)
trunk lid. Pressing the button
disarm the vehicle security alarm. Illuminated Entry/Exit
Check the vehicle for tampering.
between the license plate lights will Lights will turn on and off when you
not disarm the vehicle security alarm. enter/exit the vehicle and operate the
If anyone enters the vehicle through buttons on the key fob RKE
2 the trunk lid and opens a door, the transmitter and/or on the “Passive
alarm will trigger. Entry” system as follows:
The vehicle security alarm is designed • If the unlock command is enabled by
to protect your vehicle; however, you pressing the specific button on the
can create conditions where the key fob RKE transmitter or by the
system will give you a false alarm. If “Passive Entry” system, the
one of the previously described arming “illuminated entry” mode will
sequences has occurred, the vehicle activate. Courtesy & dimmable
security alarm will arm regardless of internal lighting, night front seats
whether you are in the vehicle or not. lighting, and approach lighting will
If you remain in the vehicle and open a stay on for 27 seconds.
door, the alarm will activate. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed
and the battery becomes disconnected,
the vehicle security alarm will remain
armed when the battery is
reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, the buzzer will activate. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security
alarm.

Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle
security alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you

28
Before Starting
• If the lock command of the car is
enabled by pressing the specific
button on the key fob RKE
transmitter or by the “Passive Entry”
system, when the key fob RKE
transmitter is moved out of range, 2
all the lights will turn off within 3
seconds, if they were previously on.

• After activating the trunk lid


opening command in the possible
modes (see “Trunk Lid Operation” in
this section), the inner trunk light
will turn on and will stay on for 10
minutes before turning off. The light
will immediately turn off if you lock
the trunk lid before 10 minutes.

29
Before Starting

Vehicle Lighting with Use of Light Switch for Vehicle


Open/Closed Doors Lighting
• If one or more doors are open, the Vehicle lighting can be operated from
central light, front/rear domelights the key fob RKE transmitter, the
(main and spot light), the instrument “Passive Entry” system and from the
2 cluster, the MTC+ display, the night light switch on the left side of the
front seats lighting and the ignition dashboard (refer to “Lights” in section
switch backlight will turn on and will “Understanding the Vehicle” for
light up for 27 seconds. further information).
• If the doors are closed, all lights will
turn off (within 3 seconds) with the
exception of the console display and
the ignition switch backlight, which
will turn off after 27 seconds.

30
Before Starting
• If the light switch is in the “0” (OFF) “DAY” or “NIGHT” mode according Unlock the Vehicle with
mode all switch backlights and the to the twilight sensor. In “DAY”
front seats lighting will turn off. mode the switches backlighting will Key fob
• If the light switch is in the be at 100% intensity, in “NIGHT” The RKE system allows you to unlock
position and the ignition switch mode they will be as set by the left the doors and the fuel filler door,
is in OFF position, the front low dimmer control switch. open the trunk and turn the approach 2
intensity LEDs of the external light NOTE: and courtesy lights on from a distance
and rear position light guide LED up to approximately 33 ft (10 m). The
will turn on and will turn off In “DAY” mode, the switches are not
key fob RKE transmitter does not need
automatically after 8 minutes to backlit, except the windows and
to be pointed at the vehicle to
preserve the battery charge. steering switches.
activate the system. See “Illuminated
• If the light switch is in position Entry/Exit” in this section for further
and the ignition switch is in RUN Light Dimmer Controls information.
position, no lighting feature will be The light dimmer controls are part of
available. the headlight switch and are
• If the light switch is in position positioned beside the switcher itself
(Low beam mode) the front (see “Lights” in section
domelight LED (if enabled), the "Understanding the Vehicle" for
switches backlighting, the further information).
instrument cluster’s display, the night
front seats lighting will turn on. The
front domelight LED and the night
lighting of the front seats will light
up with the intensity set by the NOTE:
right-hand regulator. If the regulator
is in "0" (OFF) position, the night Driving at speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h)
lighting will turn off. and above disables the system from
responding to all key fobs RKE
• If the light switch is turned in
transmitter buttons.
“AUTO” position (on/off AUTO
mode) and the ignition is switched in
RUN position, as in “low beam
mode” all lights turn on either in

31
Before Starting

Unlock the Doors, Fuel Filler section “Dashboard Instruments and See chapters “Passive Entry System”
Door and Trunk Controls”. and “Trunk Lid Operation” in this
Turn Headlights On with Remote key section for further information.
Press and release the unlock button
on the key fob RKE transmitter once This feature activates the headlights
to unlock the driver's door or twice for up to 90 seconds when the doors
2 within five seconds to unlock all doors, are unlocked with the key fob RKE
the fuel filler door and the trunk lid. transmitter. The duration can be set as
The turn signal lights will flash for the desired. To change the current setting,
unlock signal recognition. The see “MTC+ Settings” in section
illuminated entry/exit system will also “Dashboard Instruments and
turn on. See “Passive Entry System” in Controls”.
this section for further information.
Locking Doors Sound Alarm
Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with
Remote Key 1st Press This feature will cause the alarm to
activate when the doors are locked
This feature allows you to program the
with the key fob RKE transmitter. This
system to unlock either the driver's
feature can be enabled or disabled. To
door or all doors, the fuel filler door
change the current setting, see “MTC+
and the trunk lid, by the first press of
Settings” in section “Dashboard
the unlock button on the key fob
Instruments and Controls”.
RKE transmitter. To change the current
setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in section Unlatch the Trunk Lid
“Dashboard Instruments and
Press the button on the key fob
Controls”.
RKE transmitter two times within five
Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights seconds to unlatch the manual trunk
This feature will cause the flash of the lid.
turn signal lights when the doors are If the vehicle is equipped with Power
locked or unlocked with the key fob Trunk Lid/Hands Free, besides
RKE transmitter. This feature can be unlocking the trunk lid, the control
turned on or turned off. To change the will fully open it.
current setting, see “MTC+ Settings” in

32
Before Starting

Requiring and Setting Key fob Battery Replacement


Additional Key fobs NOTE:
Provide your Authorized Maserati A low charge level of the key fob
Dealer the following when ordering battery will be indicated on the
additional key fob RKE transmitters: instrument cluster display. 2
• all key fobs RKE transmitters in your The recommended replacement
possession; battery type is: CR2032.
• a personal ID; To replace the battery proceed as
• the identification and registration follows:
documents proving ownership of the • Remove the emergency key as
vehicle. indicated in “Keys” chapter of the
Setting new key fobs or re-setting the current section.
original ones can only be performed
• Loosen the lateral screw that
at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
connects the two side covers with a
NOTE: torx T6 screwdriver.
Codes of any key fob RKE transmitters
that are not present when the new
setting procedure is done will be
deleted from the memory to prevent
lost or stolen key fobs transmitters
being used to disarm the electronic WARNING!
alarm system. California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
• Separate the two lateral covers from such as, engine exhaust, carbon
the key fob case. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
which are know to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
(Continued)

33
Before Starting
(Continued)
defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing WARNING!
exhaust, do not idle the engine except California Proposition 65
as necessary, service your vehicle in a Operating, servicing and maintaining
2 well-ventilated area and wear gloves a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
or wash your hands frequently when can expose you to chemicals including
servicing your vehicle. For more such as, engine exhaust, carbon
information go to: monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- which are know to the State of
vehicle California to cause cancer and birth
• Remove the battery from its seat and
defects or other reproductive harm. To
• Separate both parts of the key fob replace with a new recommended
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
case. type of battery.
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to:
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle

NOTE:
Avoid touching the new battery with
• Remove the card with PCB (Printed your fingers. Skin oils may cause
Circuit Board). battery deterioration. If you touch a
ENVIRONMENTAL! battery, clean with alcohol.
Batteries contain dangerous materials
that could harm the environment. • Match the + sign on the battery to
Please dispose of them according to the + sign on the inside of the
local regulations or at an Authorized battery clip, located on the back
Maserati Dealer. cover.

34
Before Starting
• Replace the printed circuit board by • Closeness to a radio transmitter such Remote Start System
using the indicated pin for the as a radio station tower, airport
sealing of the two covers. transmitter, and some mobile or CB This system enables the key fob RKE
• Assemble the key fob case and radios. transmitter to start the engine
reassemble the two lateral covers: a conveniently from outside the vehicle
click will indicate successful sealing. while still maintaining security. The 2
system has a range of approximately
• Combine the disassembled parts
300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between
with clamping screw and reassemble
the vehicle and the key fob may
the emergency key.
reduce this range.
Radio Frequency RKE General Information
Transmitter - General This device complies with Part 15 of
Information the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry
This device complies with Part 15 of Canada. Operation is subject to the
the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry following conditions:
Canada. • This device may not cause harmful
The current device feature is subject to interference.
following conditions: • This device must accept any
• This device may not cause harmful interference received, including
interference. interference that may cause
• This device must accept any undesired operation.
interference received, including NOTE:
interference that may cause
Changes or modifications not
undesired operation.
expressly approved by the party
If your key fob RKE transmitter fails to
responsible for compliance could void
operate from a normal distance, check
the user's authority to operate the
for these two conditions:
equipment.
• A weak battery in the key fob RKE
transmitter. The expected life of the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate
battery in normal use is a minimum from a normal distance, check for
of three years. these conditions:

35
Before Starting
• A weak battery in the RKE To enter Remote Start Mode
transmitter. The expected life of the
WARNING! Press and release the button on the
battery is a minimum of three years.
• Do not start or run an engine in a key fob RKE transmitter twice within
• Closeness to a radio transmitter such five seconds. The vehicle doors will
as a radio station tower, airport closed garage or confined area.
Exhaust gas contains Carbon lock, position lights will flash and the
2 transmitter, and some mobile or CB horn will ring twice (if this function is
radio. Monoxide (CO) which is odourless
and colourless set using the MTC+ System, refer to
• Obstructions between the vehicle “MTC+ Settings” in section
and the Key Fob. • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away “Dashboard Instruments and
from children. Operation of the Controls”). Then, the engine will start
How to use Remote Start Remote Start System, windows, door and the vehicle will remain in the
All of the following conditions must be locks or other controls could cause “Remote Start” mode for a 15-minute
met before the engine will remote serious injury or death. cycle.
start:
• System not disabled from previous
Engine Remote Start Abort
remote start event. Message on Instrument Cluster WARNING!
• Vehicle theft alarm not active. The following messages will display on California Proposition 65
• Doors closed. the instrument cluster if the vehicle Operating, servicing and maintaining
fails to remote start or exits remote a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
• Hood closed.
start prematurely: can expose you to chemicals including
• Power trunk lid closed. such as, engine exhaust, carbon
• “Remote Start Canceled Door Open”.
• Hazard lights switched off. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
• “Remote Start Canceled Trunk
• Brake pedal not pressed by any which are know to the State of
Open”.
passenger remained in the vehicle. California to cause cancer and birth
• “Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low”. defects or other reproductive harm. To
• Battery at an acceptable charge level.
• “Remote Start Canceled Time minimize exposure, avoid breathing
• The shift lever is in P (Park) position.
Expired”. exhaust, do not idle the engine except
• The vehicle transmission is in
• “Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle as necessary, service your vehicle in a
automatic mode.
to Reset”. well-ventilated area and wear gloves
• The remote start has not been The message on the instrument cluster or wash your hands frequently when
activated yet two consecutive times. stays active as long as the ignition servicing your vehicle. For more
switch is in RUN position. information go to:

36
Before Starting
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- To exit Remote Start Mode Auto-On Comfort with Remote
vehicle without Driving the Vehicle Start
Press and release the button one The driver's heated and ventilated
time or allow the engine to run for seat and the heated steering wheel (if
the entire 15-minute cycle. provided) can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer 2
NOTE:
to “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the function in chapter “MTC+ Settings”,
system will disable the one time press section “Dashboard Instruments and
of the button for two seconds after Controls”, for further information.
receiving a valid “Remote Start”
request.

NOTE: To exit Remote Start Mode and


• In case of an engine fault or low fuel Drive the Vehicle
level, the vehicle will start and then Before the end of the 15-minute cycle,
shut down in 10 seconds. press and release the button on the
• The position lights will turn on and key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the
remain lighted up during “Remote doors and disarm the vehicle security
Start” mode. alarm. Then, prior to the end of the
• For security reasons, power window 15-minute cycle, press and release the
and power sunroof operation are START/STOP button.
disabled when the vehicle is in the
NOTE:
“Remote Start” mode.
The message “Remote Start Active
• The engine can be started two
Push Start Button” will display in the
consecutive times (two 15-minute
instrument cluster until you push the
cycles) with the key fob RKE
START/STOP button.
transmitter. However, the ignition
must be cycled to the RUN position
before you can repeat the start
sequence for a third cycle.

37
Before Starting

Doors Locking Doors Manual Lock Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE
transmitter is not inside the vehicle
To lock each door, push the door lock
before closing the door.
knob on each door trim panel
WARNING! downward. Power Doors Locking/
2 • For personal security and safety in Unlocking
the event of an accident or robbery, A power door lock switch and a
lock the vehicle doors before you power door unlock switch are
drive as well as when parking and positioned on the front door trim
leaving the vehicle unattended. panel. Use this switches to lock or
• When leaving the vehicle, always unlock the doors.
remove the key fob RKE transmitter
and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a
vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent.
• Do not allow children to be in a
vehicle unattended. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children must not touch the parking
brake trigger, brake pedal or the
shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, and do not leave
ignition switch in the ACC or RUN
mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or start the
engine and the vehicle. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door
lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when
you shut the door, the door will lock.

38
Before Starting
If the vehicle has been locked from the door locks will lock automatically Child-Protection Door Lock
inside with the above-figured when the vehicle's speed exceeds System — Rear Doors
switches, the fuel filler flap remains 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock
unlocked. feature can be enabled or disabled by To provide a safer environment for
If Power Trunk Lid/ Hands Free (if an Authorized Maserati Dealer only small children sitting in the rear seats,
the rear doors are equipped with a
equipped) has been left open, it will which can also service the vehicle.
child-protection door lock system.
2
stay open when you press lock button Automatic Door Unlock on Exit
, and the locking feature will only Engage or Disengage the
occur after the closing of the power The doors will unlock automatically on Child-Protection Door Lock
trunk lid. vehicles with power door locks if:
• Open the rear door.
The doors can also be locked and • The automatic unlock doors on exit • Insert the tip of the emergency key
unlocked with the “Passive Entry” feature is enabled. into the lock and rotate to the lock
system. For further information, see • The transmission is in gear and the or unlock position.
“Passive Entry System” in this section. vehicle speed is 0 (mph - km/h). • Repeat the first two steps on the
If you press the power door lock • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or opposite rear door.
switch while the ignition switch is in P (Park).
the ACC or RUN position, and any
• The driver door is open.
front door is open, the power locks
will not operate. This prevents you • The doors were not previously
from accidentally locking the key fob unlocked.
RKE transmitter in the vehicle. • The vehicle speed is 0 (mph - km/h).
Cycling the ignition to the OFF Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit
position or closing the door will allow
To change the current setting, see
the locks of the doors and fuel filler
“MTC+ Settings” in section
door to operate. If a door is open with
“Dashboard Instruments and
the key fob RKE transmitter inside the
Controls”.
cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or
RUN position, a beep will draw the NOTE:
driver’s attention. Use the automatic door unlock on exit WARNING!
Automatic Locking Doors feature in accordance with local Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in
The auto door lock feature default regulations. a collision. Remember that the rear
condition is disabled. When enabled, (Continued)

39
Before Starting
(Continued)
doors can only be opened from the
During the soft closing phase operated Passive Entry System
by the system, it is possible to
outside when the child-protection intervene manually by opening or The “Passive Entry” system is an
locks are engaged (locked). closing the door. enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote
If you are pushing the door hard Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This
2 NOTE: enough to close just like a regular one, feature allows you to lock and unlock
For emergency exit from the rear seats the system still works, but only to the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
when the child-protection door lock check whether the door is properly press the key fob RKE transmitter lock
system is engaged, manually raise the closed. or unlock buttons.
door lock knob to the unlocked NOTE:
position, roll down the window, and
• “Passive Entry” may be programmed
open the door using the outside door WARNING!
to on/off; see “MTC+ Settings” in
handle. The system works properly if the ajar section “Dashboard Instruments and
door has a gap , between exterior Controls” for further information.
Soft Door Close System door panel surface and exterior
• If wearing gloves, or if it has been
(optional) bodyshell surface in the latch area , of
raining on the “Passive Entry” door
max 0.23 in (6 mm). In the presence of
This system makes doors easier to shut handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
higher gap, the system is not able to
without having to slam if you do not affected, resulting in a slower
close the door with the risk of
get it closed the first time. It increases response time.
travelling with the door not
the vehicle's safety and comfort, in • Access to the vehicle using “Passive
completely closed or even open.
particular for children in the back seat, Entry” system may not work properly
it is not necessary to slam the door and in case of interference caused by
it also prevents the risk of traveling external sources such as metal
with the door ajar. objects, mobile phones, overhead
The system uses a sensor to detect the power lines, antennas, etc. In these
door ajar and an electric actuator to cases, use the buttons of the key fob
close it. The sensor detects your RKE transmitter to open and close
attempt to close the door and once the vehicle or the emergency key,
the latch catches the handle the inserting it into the driver side door
electric actuator pulls the door firmly lock.
bringing the door back in the fully
closed position.

40
Before Starting
• The “Passive Entry” system does not
lock and unlock the doors directly
and immediately but with a slight
delay (about 2 seconds).

Unlock Door from the Driver 2


Side
With a valid key fob RKE transmitter
within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the driver's door
handle, grip the driver’s door outside
handle to unlock the door NOTE:
automatically. The interior door panel If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
lock knob will rise when the door is programmed on all doors will unlock
unlocked. when you grip the front driver’s door
handle. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”, see “MTC+ Settings”
in section “Dashboard Instruments
and Controls”.

Unlock Door from the NOTE:


Passenger Side
All doors will unlock when you grip
With a valid key fob RKE transmitter the front passenger door handle
within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the passenger regardless of the driver’s door unlock
door handle, grip the front passenger preference setting (“Unlock Driver
outside door handle to unlock all four Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors
doors automatically. 1st Press”).
The interior door panel lock knob will
rise when the door is unlocked.

41
Before Starting

Preventing Inadvertent Locking NOTE:


of the Key fob RKE Transmitter The vehicle unlocks the doors under
inside the Vehicle any of the following conditions:
To minimize the possibility of • the doors are manually locked using
unintentionally locking a key fob RKE the door lock knob positioned on the
2 transmitter inside your vehicle, the door panel;
“Passive Entry” system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and • there is a valid key fob RKE
the door panel switch is used to lock transmitter outside the vehicle and
the vehicle, once all open doors have within 3.3 ft (1 m) of either “Passive
been closed, the system checks the Entry” door handle;
inside and outside of the vehicle for • fifteen attempts are made to lock
any valid key fobs RKE transmitter. the doors using the door panel
If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE switch and/or the RH button (on
• there is a valid key fob RKE the vehicles equipped with Power
transmitters is detected inside the
transmitter inside the vehicle; Trunk Lid/Hands Free) and then close
vehicle, and no other valid key fobs
RKE transmitters are detected outside • there is not a valid key fob RKE the doors.
the vehicle, the “Passive Entry” system transmitter outside the vehicle.
If the key fob RKE transmitter is inside
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors the passenger compartment and one
and chirps the horn fourteen times (on NOTE:
of the doors locked only to the first
the fifteenth attempt ALL doors will The vehicle will not unlock the doors detent of lock pawl (hence it is not
lock and the key fob RKE transmitter under any of the following conditions: fully closed), when the vehicle lock
will be locked in the vehicle). This will • the doors are locked using the key function with alarm system for trunk
happen even on vehicles equipped fob RKE transmitter; lid and doors is being activated by
with Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free means of RH button at the bottom
• the doors are locked using the
pressing RH button on its right lower of the trunk lid, said function will be
button on the “Passive Entry” door
part to close and lock the trunk lid. activated all the same.
handles;
In this condition, any attempt to duly
close the door that is partially open

42
Before Starting
will cancel vehicle lock and alarm lights to open the trunk lid manually
system arming thus leaving vehicle or automatically.
unlocked.
Since when the doors are locked, the Manual Door Lock from
"Passive Entry" system waits for about Outside
16 seconds before verifying if a key With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE 2
fob RKE transmitter is present inside transmitters within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the
the vehicle. driver or passenger front door
handles, press the external door
Release the Lid and Enter the handle button to lock all four doors.
Trunk
NOTE: The vehicle doors can also be locked
For vehicles equipped with manual by using the key fob RKE transmitter
trunk lid, with the key fob within 3.3 • After pressing the outside door lock button or the lock button
ft (1 m) of the lid, press the button handle button, you must wait two located on the vehicle’s inner door
located between the licence plate seconds before you can lock or panel.
lights and lift it manually. unlock the doors using this door
For vehicles equipped with Power handle. By pulling the external door
Trunk Lid/Hands Free, with the key fob handle, you can check if the car
within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the lid, press the remains locked, without “Passive
button located between the license Entry” system reacting and
plate lights, the power trunk lid will unlocking the doors.
automatically open until it has • The “Passive Entry” system will not
reached its maximum height; if the operate if the key fob RKE
same button is not pressed again to transmitter battery is dead.
stop it (for more information, see • If Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free (if
chapter “Trunk Lid Operation” in this equipped) has been left open, it will
section). stay open when you press the button
If the vehicle had already been on door external handle, and the
unlocked through key fob or “Passive locking feature will only occur after
Entry”, the presence of the key fob is the closing of the power trunk lid.
not required; simply use the button
located between the license plate

43
Before Starting
• This device must accept any The device is covered by:
interference received, including Continental FCC ID: M3N-40821703.
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The device is covered by:
2 Continental FCC ID: M3N-7393490.
Ignition device (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The device is covered by:
Continental FCC ID: OHT-40821803.
Control Unit (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
General Information This device complies with Part 15 of
Key Fob (Keyless Enter-N-Go) the FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of Operation is subject to the following
the FCC Rules. two conditions:
Operation is subject to the following • This device may not cause harmful
two conditions: interference.
• This device may not cause harmful • This device must accept any
interference. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.

44
Before Starting

Power Windows NOTE: prevent the windows being


• The power window switches will accidentally activated, posing a risk to
The window controls on the driver's remain active for up to 10 minutes passengers remaining onboard.
door panel govern all the door after the ignition switch is turned to
windows. the OFF position. Opening either Auto-Down Feature
front door will cancel this feature. The driver door power window switch
2
The time lapse can be set. See and some model passenger door
“MTC+ Settings” in section power window switches have an
“Dashboard Instruments and auto-down feature.
Controls” for further information. Press the window switch to the second
• Frequent activations of the power detent, release, and the window will
windows could result in a temporary go completely down automatically.
lock out of the motors. In this case, To open the window part way, press
wait a moment before a new the window switch to the first detent
activation. and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the
way down during the auto-down
WARNING! operation, pull up on the switch
Improper use of the power windows briefly.
and the sunroof (if equipped) can
however be dangerous, even with the Auto-Up Feature with
anti-pinch prevention system. Before Anti-Pinch Protection
and during activation of the power
Lift the window switch to the second
window, always check that the
detent, release, and the window will
passengers are not exposed to the risk
go all the way up automatically.
There are single window controls on of injury both by the moving window
To stop the window from going all the
each passenger door trim panel, which and by personal objects that could be
way up during the auto-up operation,
operate the corresponding window. dragged or hit by it. Do not leave
push down on the switch briefly.
The window controls will operate only unattended children in a vehicle with
To close the window part way, lift the
when the ignition switch is in the ACC a key fob RKE transmitter inside.
window switch to the first detent and
or RUN position. When getting out the vehicle, always
remove the key fob RKE transmitter to
45
Before Starting
release it when you want the window Reset Auto-Up/Down
to stop.
Should the auto-up/down feature stop
NOTE: working, the window probably needs
• If the window runs into any obstacle to be reset.
during auto-closure, it will reverse To reset auto-up/down, pull the
2 window switch up to close the window
direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the completely and push the window
window switch again to close the switch down to open the window
window. completely.
• Any impact due to rough road Open the Windows and To enable the controls previously
conditions may trigger the auto Sunroof with RKE Transmitter described, press the window lockout
reverse function unexpectedly during and Ignition Off button again (setting it in the up
auto-closure. If this happens, pull the position).
switch lightly to the first detent and When the ignition switch is in OFF
hold to close the window manually. position, windows can be opened by Wind Buffeting
• Frequent activations of the pressing the button on the RKE
Wind buffeting can be described as
anti-pinch function could disable the transmitter.
the perception of pressure or a
auto-down and auto-up function of • Press the button and release it; helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle
the windows. In order to re-activate • Press a second time the button may exhibit wind buffeting with the
this function proceed with a reset and keep it pressed until complete windows down, or the sunroof in open
cycle as described in the next opening of the windows, if they or partially open positions. This is a
paragraph. were closed. normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Rear Window and Sunshade the rear windows open, open the front
Lockout Button and rear windows together to
WARNING! minimize the buffeting. If the
The window lockout button on the
There is no anti-pinch protection when buffeting occurs with the sunroof
driver's door trim panel allows to
the window is almost closed. Be sure open, then adjust the sunroof opening
disable the window and sunshade
to clear all objects from the area to minimize the buffeting.
control on the rear doors by pressing
before closing the window.
the window lockout button (setting it
in the down position).

46
Before Starting

Rear Window On versions equipped with heated


rear seats is available the trigger
Rear Window Defroster button of the rear sunshade,
positioned at the rear of the central
The rear window defroster button is console, which can be operated from
located on the climate control panel.
See “Air Conditioning Controls” in
the rear passengers. 2
section “Dashboard Instruments and • Press the button to raise the
Controls”. sunshade.
• Press the button a second time to
Power Sunshade (optional) lower the sunshade.
Without ADAS
Your vehicle can be equipped on
request with a power sunshade that
will reduce the amount of sunlight
that will enter through the rear
window.
The sunshade is rolled in and stored
inside the cover behind the rear seats;
when activated, it rolls out upwards.
The power sunshade can be operated
using the MTC+ System.
• Touch the “Controls” soft-key. NOTE:
• Within 15 seconds, touch the “Rear With ADAS The rear sunshade control and rear
Sunshade” soft-key to raise the If the sunshade is in the raised power windows switches, can be
power sunshade. position and the gear lever is locked by pressing the window
• Within 15 seconds, touch the “Rear positioned in R (Reverse), the lockout button on the driver side door
Sunshade” soft-key a second time to sunshade will automatically fully panel.
lower the sunshade. lower.
When the gear lever is shifted out of R
(Reverse) the sunshade will
automatically return to the fully raised
position after approximately five
seconds.

47
Before Starting

Trunk Lid Operation the license plate lights, when the


vehicle has been unlocked using the
The manual trunk lid can be unlocked key fob or the “Passive Entry” system.
from inside the vehicle by pressing the
button on the front dome console.
2 This command will fully open the
Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free (if
equipped). Pressing this button in
sequence, if the power trunk lid stops
in intermediate position, it resumes his
opening movement.
.
NOTE:
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before the button can operate.

When the button on the key fob is


pressed twice within five seconds, the
The manual trunk lid can be released direction indicators flash twice to
from outside the vehicle by pressing indicate the opening or closing of the
the button on the key fob with trunk lid, if the light flashing function
RKE transmitter twice within five at closing is activated on MTC+ (for
seconds or by using the external more information, see the chapter
release button located on the lower "MTC+ Settings" in section
side of the trunk lid ledge, between
48
Before Starting
“Dashboard Instruments and With the ignition device in the OFF kick sensor option, as specified in the
Controls”). position, the trunk open symbol and paragraph “Hands Free Power Trunk
To manually close the trunk lid use the message will display until closure. Release and Closing”. In this latter
handle as indicated beside the closing See “Passive Entry System” in this case, the lid will be opened and closed
device. section for more information on trunk only if the “Passive Entry” system
lid operation with the “Passive Entry” acknowledges the presence of the key 2
feature. fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m)
of the trunk lid.
Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free uses the
(optional) button in between the license plate
Automatic opening and closing lights, indicated in figure, to activate
movement of the trunk lid is driven by the opening once the car has been
electric actuators and a motorized unlocked by the key fob or by the
latch ensuring lid locking upon “Passive Entry” function.
closing. By pressing this button when the
Power Trunk lid can be opened using Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free is closed
With the ignition switch in RUN you can open it completely or by
button on the key fob RKE
position, the red symbol will pressing the button again stop the
transmitter and the button on driver
display on the instrument cluster with opening process, or by pressing the
side door trim panel used also for
the message indicating that the trunk button again invert the movement
non-power version.
lid is open. Once the trunk is closed and close it completely.
The button on key fob and button
both symbol and message will
on dome console not only allows user
disappear from the display.
to completely open the Power Trunk
Lid/Hands Free, but also to stop it at
any intermediate position by pressing
the button again at anytime you wish
to stop and resume the opening
process.
In addition to these commands, it is
possible open and close the Power
Trunk Lid/Hands Free by simply moving
your foot under the rear bumper, if
the vehicle is so equipped with the

49
Before Starting
When the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free In any case, when you press the LH NOTE:
is open, to move it there are two button , the doors will not be • The order of the functions shown
buttons positioned on its right lower locked and the alarm system will not does not represent the sequence in
part as indicated in figure. be armed. which they can be performed.
When the power trunk lid is
• The buttons of the Power Trunk
2 completely open if you press and
Lid/Hands Free do not work if a gear
release the RH button , the power
is engaged or if the vehicle speed is
trunk lid will be completely closed
higher than 0 (km/h - mph).
unless it is stopped;
• The Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free does
• if instead the power trunk lid is in an not work with temperatures lower
intermediate position and you press than −22 °F (−30 °C) or higher than
and release the RH button during 150 °F (65 °C).
the closing or opening stroke, it will
• If the opening buttons or the
be stopped;
handles are operated while the
When the power trunk lid is • if instead the power trunk lid is Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free is
completely open if you press and stopped in an intermediate position closing, the stroke of lid stops.
release the LH button , the power and you press and release the RH Pressing another time the same
trunk lid will be completely closed button , it will reverse its previous command it reverses movement and
unless it is stopped; movement and it will be completely fully open.
opened or closed unless it is stopped
• if instead the power trunk lid is in an • If the opening buttons or the handle
again.
intermediate position and you press are operated while the Power Trunk
In any case, when you press the RH
and release the LH button during Lid/Hands Free is opening, the motor
button , the doors will not be
the closing or opening stroke, it will of the lid is disabled to allow manual
locked and the alarm system will not
be stopped; operation.
be armed immediately, but only when
• if instead the power trunk lid is the power trunk lid will have reached • If the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free
stopped in an intermediate position the totally closed position as effect of finds several obstacles during the
and you press and release the LH every movement commands received same operating cycle, it will stop
button , it will reverse its previous from every other available inputs. automatically and must be opened or
movement and it will be completely closed manually.
opened or closed unless it is stopped • If the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free is
again. closing and a gear is engaged, the lid

50
Before Starting
will continue closing. In this Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free
condition, it is possible that, during Automatic Safe Movement
the closing stroke, it may find an WARNING!
Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free safe
obstacle and stop. opening and closing is ensured by a • Activate Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free
protection system able to stop its only when vehicle is at a standstill.
Set the Position of Maximum Power movement when an obstacle is • Always pay utmost attention when 2
Trunk Lid Opening detected along the path: when opening and closing Power Trunk
The maximum opening position of the opening or closing, it stops Lid/Hand Free.
trunk lid can be modified using the automatically and then slightly moves • After the closing command, always
previously described buttons on its back. make sure that Power Trunk
right lower side. After the closing command, when Lid/Hand Free is completely closed.
1. Activate the trunk lid and stop it in Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free starts
the new maximum opening closing, all the indicators will blink to
position to be set, by pressing the warn anyone within range. Apart
CAUTION!
LH button. from activating indicators blinking
when power trunk lid is operated, it is • Under extreme weather conditions,
2. Press the LH and RH buttons
also possible to activate a sound trunk lid seal could freeze and
at the same time and keep them
warning by selecting the relevant compromise Power Trunk Lid/Hand
pressed for 3 seconds.
function within MTC+ user settings Free automatic opening and closing.
3. Release both buttons. Upon the (see “MTC+ Settings” in section • Before opening Power Trunk
following opening controls, the “Dashboard Instruments and Lid/Hand Free, make sure that no
trunk lid will stop in the stored Controls”). When Power Trunk objects or snow are set on trunk lid
position. Lid/Hands Free edge reaches the car or might jam or prevent its opening.
If you want to reset the maximum body, the motor locking the latch is
possible opening position of the activated automatically. Hands Free Power Trunk Release and
power trunk lid, proceed as described If necessary, the Power Trunk Closing
below starting from the previously set Lid/Hands Free can also be opened or This mode is controlled by the “Passive
opening position. closed manually. This operation could Entry” system (see paragraph “Passive
1. Manually push the trunk lid to the be required when the trunk lid Entry System” in this section), which
maximum possible opening remains open for a long period of automatically releases and closes the
position. time. Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free when you
2. Repeat the previously performed place your foot in the area under the
steps 2 and 3. rear bumper.
51
Before Starting
The system will only operate if the • if the movement was stopped
system acknowledges the presence of another kick operation will invert a
the key fob RKE transmitter within 3.3 complete opening.
ft (1 m) of the Power Trunk Lid/Hands
NOTE:
Free.
2 The range of the sensors that detect • If your foot movement fails to
your foot movement extends along activate the Power Trunk Lid/Hands
and underneath the central portion of Free movement, wiggling your foot
the rear bumper. under the bumper will not help.
To activate the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Repeat the whole kick movement.
Free, stand behind the vehicle, near In order for the sensors to detect your • In particular situations, external
the trunk lid, and move your foot foot movement, move your foot factors affecting the sensor area may
under the bumper as if to kick towards the vehicle rather than trigger the Hands free power trunk
something. Do not place your foot too sideways and immediately pull it back: lid release feature. For example,
close to the bumper or touch the from this moment, the Power Trunk when washing the vehicle, a water
underbody. Lid/Hands Free will activate within two jet aimed at the sensor area may
seconds. trigger the “Hands free” power
If closed, with the foot movement the trunk release feature. Keep the key
WARNING! Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free will: fob RKE transmitter away from the
• Pay careful attention to the exhaust sensing range of the sensors (10 ft/3
• unlock and completely open; m) or disable the Hands free feature
tailpipes as they can reach high
• after another kick, will stop; from the MTC+ menu (see “MTC+
temperatures and, in case of contact,
they can cause severe burns. • after another kick, will reverse its Settings” in section “Dashboard
movement and completely close Instruments and Controls”). A key
• When it is not necessary to open the fob RKE transmitter located in the
unless stopped again.
Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free with the front seat passenger area is
If open, with the foot movement the
Hands Free mode, make sure the key considered out of range of the
Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free will:
fob results outside the range of use “Hand free” trunk release sensor.
(3.3 ft/1 m). Otherwise, the Power • completely close but not lock;
• If somebody or something knocks
Trunk Lid/Hand Free can be opened • another kick before the completed
against the Power Trunk Lid/Hands
accidentally by an unintentional closing can stop the movement;
Free while it is moving, the safety
movement of the foot.

52
Before Starting
system might stop lid opening or Trunk Safety
closing movement.

Trunk Lid Emergency Release


WARNING!
If accessing the trunk compartment Do not allow children to have access
from the rear seats, operate the
2
to the trunk. Always close the trunk
emergency release lever (see the lid when your vehicle is unattended.
chapter “Trunk Safety” in this section) Once in the trunk, young children may
in order to lower the rear seat not be able to escape. If trapped in
backrest (see “Cargo Area” in section the trunk, children can die from
“Understanding the Vehicle”). If the suffocation or heat stroke.
power release control operated by
pressing the button on the dome
Trunk Lid Emergency Release
console fails, it may be that the
battery is critical. In this case, it is
from inside the Trunk
possible to temporarily power the As a security measure, an internal
system by using the battery remote trunk emergency release lever is built
poles located inside the engine into the trunk latching mechanism. In
compartment (see “Auxiliary the event of a person trapped inside
Jump-Start Procedure” in section “In the trunk, the trunk lid can be simply
an Emergency”). Then it is possible to opened by pulling on the
With Power Trunk Lid/Hand Free Option
normally open the trunk lid by using phosphorescent handle shown in
the key fob RKE transmitter. Have the figures.
vehicle subsequently serviced by an
Authorized Maserati Dealer center in
order to solve the failure.

53
Before Starting

Hood Operation • Slightly lift the hood and push the


safety catch as indicated by the
arrow. The safety catch is located in CAUTION!
Opening
the center of the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not
Two latches must be released to open slam the hood to close it.
the hood.
2
• From inside the vehicle, pull the
hood release lever located under the
left lower side of the dashboard. WARNING!
• Be sure the hood is fully latched
before driving your vehicle. If the lid
is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
• Lift the hood completely: this injury or death.
operation is facilitated by two gas • Gear shifting is always active and
struts keeping the hood in the fully may be performed even when one
open position. or more doors, the hood or the trunk
With the ignition switch in RUN lid are open. Therefore, in these
• Move to the outside and stand in position, the red symbol will conditions, take great care to avoid
front of the vehicle front grille. display on the instrument cluster with moving the transmission shift lever
the message indicating that the hood and so accidentally engage gears.
is open.

Closing
Lower the hood, and then drop it. This
should secure the inclusion of both
latches.

54
Before Starting

Occupants Restraint desired length to restrain a child seat cause neck wounds or other injuries in
or secure a large item in a seat. an accident. Additionally, in an
Systems Please pay close attention to the accident, the lower section of the belt
The listed occupants restraint systems information in this section. It tells you could press against the upper part of
are some of the most important safety how to use your restraint system your stomach rather than the pelvic
features in your vehicle: properly, to keep you and your area, causing serious internal injuries. 2
passengers as safe as possible.
• Three-point seat belts (also called lap If you are carrying children too small NOTE:
and shoulder belts) for the driver for adult-sized seat belts, the seat
and all passengers. The advanced air bags have a multi
belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether stage inflator. This allows the air bag
• Advanced front air bags for driver for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can to have different stages of inflation
and passenger. be used to hold infant and child based on the severity and type of
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable restraint systems. For more collision.
Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and information on LATCH, refer to
passengers seated next to a window. “Lower Anchors and Tether for Here are some simple steps you can
• Supplemental driver side knee air CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. take to minimize the risk of harm
bag. from a deploying air bag:
• Supplemental seat-mounted side air • Children 12 years old and under
bags. WARNING! should always ride buckled up in a
• An energy-absorbing steering To help provide maximum protection, rear seat.
column and steering wheel. you are advised to keep the seatback
• Front seat belts incorporate dual in the most upright position possible
pretensioners that may enhance and the seat belt close to your chest WARNING!
occupant protection by managing and pelvis. If the seat belt is loose, in Infants in rear facing child restraints
the energy created during an the event of an accident you could should never ride in the front seat of
impact. move too far forward and could be a vehicle with a passenger Advanced
injured. Travelling with the seatback Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment
• All seat belt systems (except the
too far reclined could also be can cause severe or fatal injury to
driver’s) include Automatic Locking
dangerous: even if the seat belts are infants in that position.
Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat
fastened, they may not work Do not use child seats or child booster
belt webbing into position by
correctly. In fact, the belt itself may cushions/backrests in the front
extending the belt all the way out
not be close enough to your body
and then adjusting the belt to the (Continued)
and, if it is in front of you, it could
55
Before Starting
(Continued) system to make sure that you are using Buckle up even though you are an
passenger seat. Occupants in the front it properly. excellent driver, even on short trips.
passenger seat must never sit on the Someone on the road may be a poor
• All occupants should always wear
edge of the seat, leaning toward the driver and cause an accident that
their lap and shoulder belts properly.
dashboard or otherwise sit out of includes you. This can happen far
position. The occupants’ back must be • The driver and front passenger seats
2 should be moved back as far as
away from home or on your own
as upright as comfort allows, and street.
must rest against the seatback with possible to allow the Advanced
the seat belt properly fastened. Feet Front Air Bags room to inflate. Statistics report that seat belts save
must be on the floor (i.e. not on the • Do not lean against the door or lives and help reduce the seriousness
dashboard, seat or out of the window. Your vehicle has of injuries in an accident. Some of the
window). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable worst injuries happen when people are
Curtains (SABIC) and Supplemental thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
Children that are not big enough to Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), reduce the possibility of ejection and
wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see and if deployment occurs, the SABIC the risk of injury caused by striking the
“Child Restraints System” in this and SAB air bags will inflate inside of the vehicle.
section) should be secured in the rear forcefully into the space between Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
seat in child restraints seats or you and the door. belted at all times.
belt-positioning booster seats. Older
• If the air bag system in this vehicle Three-Point Seat Belts
children who do not use child
needs to be modified to
restraints seats or belt-positioning All seating positions in your vehicle are
accommodate a disabled person,
booster seats should ride properly equipped with combination lap and
contact an Authorized Maserati
buckled up in the rear seat. Never shoulder belts.
Dealer.
allow children to slide the shoulder The belt retractor is designed to lock
belt behind them or under their arm. during very sudden stops or impacts.
The safest place for a child that has This feature allows the shoulder part
outgrown the child safety seat is in the WARNING!
of the belt to move freely with you
rear seat using the standard seat belt In an accident, all occupants can suffer under normal conditions, conforming
in combination with a suitable booster much greater injuries if not properly to the body of the occupants.
seat if needed so the seat belt is buckled up. You can strike the interior However, in an accident, the belt will
properly located on the child. of your vehicle or other occupants or lock and reduce your risk of striking
You should read the instructions you can be thrown out of the vehicle. the inside of the vehicle or being
provided with your child restraint Always be sure you and others in your thrown out.
vehicle are buckled up properly.
56
Before Starting
The driver is responsible for equipped with seats and seat belts. • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt
respecting, and ensuring that all the • Be sure all passengers are in a seat across you, make the belt go around
other occupants of the car also and using a seat belt properly. your body and when the belt is long
observe the local regulations enough to fit, insert the latch plate
• Wearing your belt improperly could
concerning the use of seat belts. into the buckle until you hear a
make your injuries in an accident
Always fasten the seat belts before
much worse. You might suffer
“click.” 2
starting the vehicle.
internal injuries, or you could even
Seat belts are designed to be used by
slide out of part of the belt. Follow
persons whose physical characteristics
these instructions to wear your seat
(age, height, weight) are provided for
belt properly and to keep your
by established legislation in each
passengers safe, too.
country. Anyone who does comply
with these provisions may not travel in • Two people should never be belted
the front passenger seat. This also into a single seat belt. People belted
applies to children. Their heads are together can crash into one another
proportionally heavier and larger than in an accident, hurting one another
those of adults, while their bones and severely. Never use a lap/shoulder
muscles are relatively undeveloped. To belt for more than one person.
help protect them in case of a • Remember that, in the event of an
collision, they must use special accident, the rear seat passengers WARNING!
restraint or safety systems, even in the not wearing the seat belts are not • The seat belts height must be
rear seat area. only subject to personal injuries but adjusted only with the vehicle
also represent a serious danger for stationary.
the front seat occupants. • Do not bring sharp edges in contact
WARNING! with a seat belt. This could reduce
• It is forbidden and dangerous to ride Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions their initial strength and cause them
in a cargo area. In an accident, • Enter the vehicle and close the door. to tear in the event of a crash.
people riding in these areas are Sit back and adjust the seat. • If a seat belt has been brought in
more likely to be seriously injured or • The seat belt latch plate is on the contact with a sharp edge, or has
killed. rear door pillar, above the seat on been used to pin something to it,
• Do not allow any person to ride in the external side. have it immediately replaced by our
any area of your vehicle that is not (Continued)

57
Before Starting
(Continued) rewinding, to prevent it from
Authorized Maserati Dealer. twisting.
• A belt that is latched into the wrong WARNING!
buckle will not protect you properly. • A lap belt worn too high can
The lap portion of the belt could ride increase the risk of internal injury in
WARNING!
2 too high on your body, possibly an accident. The belt forces won't
A frayed or torn belt could break in an
causing internal injuries. Always impact on the strong hip and pelvic
accident and leave you with no
latch your belt into the bones, but across your abdomen.
protection. Inspect the belt system
corresponding buckle. Always wear the lap belt as low as
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
possible and keep it comfortable.
• A belt that is too loose will not loose parts. Damaged parts must be
protect you properly. In a sudden • A twisted belt will not protect you replaced immediately.
stop, you could move too far properly. In a collision, it could even Do not disassemble or modify the
forward, increasing the possibility of cut into you. Be sure the belt is system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies
injury. Wear your seat belt straight. If you can't straighten a must be replaced by an Authorized
comfortably. belt in your vehicle, take it to a Maserati Dealer after an accident if
Service Center immediately. they have been damaged (bent
• A belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike • Do not use devices (clips, fastenings retractor, torn belt, etc.).
the inside surfaces of the vehicle in etc.) that prevent the seat belts from
an accident, increasing head and laying close to the occupants bodies. Three-Point Seat Belt Height
Adjustment
neck injury. A belt worn under the • Never carry children on a passenger’s
arm can also cause internal injuries. lap.

• The lower part must adhere to the • Position the shoulder belt on your WARNING!
pelvis rather than the abdomen of chest so that it is comfortable and The seat belts height must only be
the occupant. To fasten the lap belt not resting on your neck. The adjusted when the vehicle is
pull slightly up the diagonal portion retractor will withdraw any slack in stationary.
of the shoulder belt. To loosen the the belt.
lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch • To release the belt, push the red The vehicle has a shoulder belt height
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug button on the buckle. The belt will adjuster for the driver and front
belt reduces the risk of sliding under automatically retract to its stowed passenger seating positions.
the belt in an accident. position. If necessary, guide the seat Adjust the guide so that the shoulder
belt with your hand while it is portion of the belt is on the shoulder

58
Before Starting
and not falling off of it. The belt When you release the anchorage try “Child Restraint Systems” in this
should be close to, but not contacting, to move the belt slider up and down section.
the neck. to make sure that it is locked in If the passenger seat position should
Push the indicated button above the position. not be used to accommodate a child
shoulder belt guide to release the restraint system, only pull the belt out
Three-Point Seat Belt
anchorage, then move the belt slider far enough to comfortably wrap 2
up or down to the fixed position that Untwisting Procedure around the occupant so as to not
fits you best. Use the following procedure to activate the ALR. If the ALR is
untwist a twisted three point belt. activated, you will hear a ratcheting
sound as the belt retracts. In this case,
• Position the latch plate as close as
WARNING! allow the belt to retract completely
possible to the anchor point.
After the adjustment, always check and then carefully pull out only the
• At about 0.5 to 1 ft (15 to 30 cm) amount of belt necessary to
that the slider to which the oscillating above the latch plate, grasp and
ring is fixed, is locked into one of the comfortably wrap around the seat
twist the belt 180 degrees to create occupant.
positions provided. With the handgrip a fold that begins immediately
released, push again downward to Slide the latch plate into the buckle
above the latch plate. until you hear a "click".
allow the anchoring device to click
• Slide the latch plate upward over the
into place, in the event that it has not
folded belt. The folded belt must
been released in one of the positions
enter the slot at the top of the latch WARNING!
provided.
plate.
• Remember that, in the event of a
• Continue to slide the latch plate up violent impact, the passengers in the
until it clears the folded belt. rear seats who are not wearing the
Passengers Seat Belts seat belts are not only subject to
personal injury but also represent a
All passengers seat belts are equipped danger for passengers sitting in the
with Automatic Locking Retractors front seats.
(ALR) and can be used to secure a
• Always fasten the seat belts.
child restraint system. For additional
information, see “Installing Child • Traveling without the seat belts
Restraint Systems using the Vehicle fastened significantly increases the
Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under (Continued)

59
Before Starting
(Continued) retractor in a normal manner, Children under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
risk of serious injury in the event of without twisting it. should be properly buckled up in a
a collision, even with the air bags. • Insert the first latch plate located at child restraint system.
• In the event of a collision, the seat the end of the shoulder portion of Automatic Locking Mode Setting
belts help reduce the possibility of the belt inside the left buckle (this is
• Buckle the lap and shoulder belt.
2 the vehicle’s occupants being thrown the one without the red unlatch
against the structures of the button on the top of the slot). • Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
passenger compartment or out of downward until the entire belt is
the vehicle. extracted.
• The air bags are designed to work • Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
together with the seat belts, not to retracts, you will hear a clicking
substitute them. The front air bags sound. This indicates the safety belt
only deploy in the event of certain is now in the automatic locking
head-on collisions of sufficient mode.
intensity. They may not be activated Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting
if the vehicle rolls over, or in the Unbuckle the three point seat belt and
event of rear bumps or minor frontal allow it to retract completely to
collisions, or non-frontal collisions. disengage the automatic locking mode
• Insert the latch plate located at the
end of the lap portion of the belt and activate the vehicle emergency
Seat Belt for Rear Central Seat locking mode.
inside the right buckle.
The rear central seat belt has two To unlatch the seat belt, release the
buckles and two metal latch plates; in right plate of the lap portion by
this way it is possible to release it from clicking on the red button. WARNING!
the seat and fold down the long part
• The belt and retractor assembly must
(60) of the seatback (refer to “Cargo Using Seat Belt in Automatic be checked by an Authorized
Area” in section “Understanding the Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) Maserati Dealer and must be
Vehicle” for further information). To
Use the seat belt automatic locking replaced if the Automatic Locking
buckle the seat belt proceed as
mode anytime a child safety seat is Retractor (ALR) feature or any other
follows:
installed in a seating position that has seat belt function is not working
• Take place in the central seat and a belt with this feature. properly.
pull out the belt from the upper • Failure to replace the belt and

60
Before Starting
retractor assembly could increase NOTE: vibrations or localized heating (over
the risk of injury in collisions. To obtain the highest degree of 212°F/100°C for a maximum of 6 hours
protection from the action of the max.) in the area around the
Seat Belt Pretensioners pretensioning device, wear the seat pretensioners may damage or deploy
belt tight to the chest and pelvis. them erroneously. These devices are
The car is equipped with front seat
belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in
not affected by vibrations caused by 2
Pretensioners are triggered by the uneven road surfaces or low obstacles.
the belts in the event of a severe Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A Contact the Authorized Maserati
frontal impact. This guarantees the pretensioner may be used only once Dealer for any intervention that may
perfect adherence of the seat belts to because it is a pyrotechnic device. be required.
the occupants bodies before the Pretensioners do not require any
restraining action begins. maintenance or lubrication: any
This car is also equipped with a second
Enhanced Seat Belt Use
changes to its original conditions will
pretensioner in the kick plate area. Its Reminder System (BeltAlert®)
invalidate its efficiency. If, due to
activation is signalled by the unusual natural events (floods, sea BeltAlert® is a feature intended to
shortening of the metal cable and storms, etc.), the device has been remind the driver and front passenger
curling of its protective sheath. affected by water and mud, it must be to fasten their seat belts.
replaced. The feature activates with engine
running. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the seat belt
WARNING! reminder light and the related
message will turn on in the instrument
It is strictly forbidden to remove or
cluster. Message remains on for 5
tamper with the pretensioner
seconds.
components. Any service intervention
must be carried out only by qualified
and authorized personnel. Always
contact an Authorized Maserati
Pretensioners work for all size Dealer.
occupant restraint systems, including
the child restraint systems.
CAUTION!
Operations which lead to impacts,

61
Before Starting
If a front seat belt is unbuckled while
traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both
audio and visual notification on the
instrument cluster.
2 The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is
not active when the front passenger
seat is not occupied. BeltAlert® may be
triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat. It
The BeltAlert® warning sequence is recommended to restrain pets in the When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet more likely that the baby will not be hurt
mph (8 km/h) for more than 19 carriers that are secured by seat belts, in a crash. For pregnant women, as for
seconds, by blinking the seat belt and properly stow cargo. anyone, the key to making safety belts
reminder light and message and by Seat Belts and Pregnant effective is wearing them properly.
sounding an intermittent chime. Women
Once the sequence starts, it will
continue for the entire duration. After Seat belts should be worn by pregnant
WARNING!
the sequence completes, the seat belt women: the risk of injury in the event
Pregnant women should observe the
reminder light remains illuminated of an accident is greatly reduced for
above indications, as well as local
until the respective seat belts are them and the unborn child if they are
regulation concerning the use of seat
fastened and the message remains on wearing a seat belt. The best way to
belts.
for 5 seconds. protect the fetus is to protect the
If the opened front door on the driver mother.
or passenger side is closed and the Pregnant women must position the
occupant presence sensor detects a lower part of the belt below the belly
status change from occupant not so that it passes over the pelvis and
present to occupant present the under the abdomen (see figure).
system will repeat the warning
sequence.
The driver should instruct all other
occupants to fasten their seat belts.

62
Before Starting

Supplemental Restraint side windows and their covers are also


labeled “AIR bag”.
System (SRS) — Air Bags This vehicle is also equipped with
This vehicle has advanced front air Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
bags for both the driver and front Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger
passenger as a supplement to the seat pelvis-chest-shoulder protection 2
belt restraint systems. during a side impact. The
The driver's advanced front air bag is Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
mounted in the center of the steering Bags are mounted on front seats and
wheel in the area shown in the are located in the outboard side of the
picture. On this area is embossed the The advanced front air bags have a front seats.
word “SRS AIRBAG” for easier multistage inflator design. This allows NOTE:
recognition. the air bag to have different rates of
After any accident, the vehicle should
The passenger's advanced front air inflation based on the severity and
be taken to the Authorized Maserati
bag is mounted in the dashboard, type of collision.
Dealer immediately.
above the glove compartment in the This vehicle is equipped with driver
area shown in the picture. On this and front passenger seat track
area is embossed the word “AIRBAG” position sensors that may adjust the Air Bag System Components
for easier recognition. inflation level of the advanced front Your vehicle may be equipped with
In addition, the vehicle is equipped air bags based upon seat position. the following air bag system
with a supplemental driver side knee This vehicle is also equipped with a components:
air bag mounted in the dashboard front passenger seat belt buckle
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC);
below the steering column. sensor that detects whether the front
passenger seat belt is fastened. The • Air bag warning light on the
NOTE: instrument cluster;
seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the
These air bags are designed to the inflation rate of the advanced front • Steering wheel and column;
advanced air bag regulatory air bag. • Instrument cluster;
requirements. This vehicle is equipped with • Driver advanced front air bag;
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
• Passenger advanced front air bag;
Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads
of front and rear outer occupants. The • Supplemental driver side knee air
SABIC air bags are located above the bag.

63
Before Starting
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air information from the front impact on the passenger side of the
Bags (SAB); sensors. dashboard since they could interfere
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable The first stage inflator is triggered with correct inflation of the
Curtains (SABIC); immediately during an impact that passenger air bag and also cause
• Front and side impact sensors; requires air bag deployment. This serious injury to the occupants.
2 • Front seat belt pretensioners;
inflation rate is used in less severe • Do not place anything on or around
collisions. A higher energy output, the air bag covers or attempt to
• Seat belt buckle switch and seat track inflation rate, is used for more severe open them manually. You may
position sensors; collisions. damage the air bags and you could
• Pyrotechnical charge to cut power be injured because the air bags may
from the battery; it is located on the no longer be functional. The
positive battery terminal. CAUTION!
protective covers for the air bag are
• The electronic control unit provides designed to open only when the air
for the activation of the bags are inflating.
WARNING! pretensioners, front air bags or side • Always drive with your hands on the
The air bag is not a substitute for the air bags (front and rear) based on steering wheel rim, so that the air
seat belts. Correct use of the seat different criteria, according to the bag can inflate freely if required.
belts, in combination with the air bag, type of impact. Failure of one or During the drive your back must be
will offer protection for the driver and more systems to activate is not as upright as comfort allows and be
passenger in the front seat in the indicative of a system malfunction. against the seat back with the seat
event of a head-on collision. • The front and/or lateral air bags may belt properly fastened.
inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent
• Do not apply stickers or other
Advanced Front Air Bags impact involving the underbody
objects on the steering wheel, on
Properties area, for example in case of violent
the dashboard in the passenger’s
impacts against steps, sidewalks,
The advanced front air bag system has side air bag area, on roof side trims
speed bumps, or when the vehicle
multistage driver and front passenger or on the seats.
falls into potholes, or similar.
air bags. This system provides air bag • Do not travel with objects in your lap,
inflation rates which are appropriate in front of your chest or especially with
to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! a pipe, pencil or other objects in your
determined by the Occupant Restraint mouth. In the event of a collision, the
• Never place objects (e.g. mobile
Controller (ORC), which may receive intervention of the air bag could result
phones, toys, folders, tablets, ecc..)
in serious injury.

64
Before Starting
• EXTREME HAZARD! Do not place a When the air bag deploys, it opens the
rearward-facing infant seat onto the seam between the front and side of
front seat in front of a not the seat's trim cover. Each air bag
deactivated air bag (see warning deploys independently; a left side
plate on the dashboard and above impact deploys the left air bag only
and behind the sun visors). and a right side impact deploys the 2
Deployment of the air bag in an right air bag only.
accident could cause fatal injuries to Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
the baby regardless of the severity Curtain (SABIC)
of the collision.
SABIC air bags are designed to protect
Supplemental Air bags the head of front and rear occupants
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air in the event of a side impact, thanks
Bags (SAB) to the wide cushion inflation surface.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Each air bag features inflated
Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest chambers placed adjacent to the head
and shoulder area of the occupants in of each outboard occupant that
the event of a side impact of reduce the potential for side-impact
medium/high severity. The SAB is head injuries. The SABICS deploy
marked with “AIRBAG” label sewn downward, covering both windows on
into the outboard side of the front the impact side.
seats.

WARNING!
• Side air bags also need room to
inflate. Do not rest your head, arms
or elbows on the door, windows or
the area in which the window bag is
located to avoid possible injury
during air bag inflation. Sit upright
in the centre of the seating area.
• Do not cover the front seatbacks
(Continued)
65
Before Starting
(Continued) front seat belt pretensioners, as type and location of impact, advanced
with clothes or covers. Do not use required, depending on the severity front air bags may deploy in crashes
accessory seat covers or place and type of impact. with little vehicle front-end damage
objects between you and the side air On top of what previously described, but that produce a severe initial
bags; the performance could be the characteristics of the collision deceleration.
2 adversely affected and/or objects registered by the sensors and sent to The side air bags will not deploy in all
could cause serious injury. the control unit of the ORC can also side collisions. Side air bag deployment
• Do not add roof racks that require cause a sudden cut of the power from will depend on the severity and type
permanent attachments (bolts or the battery, “blowing” the of collision. Because air bag sensors
screws) for installation on the pyrotechnical charge located on the measure vehicle deceleration over
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the positive battery terminal. time, vehicle speed and damage
roof of the vehicle for any reason. merely are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air CAUTION! deployed.
bag After a collision that has caused the Seat belts are necessary for your
ignition of the pyrotechnical charge, protection in all accidents, and also are
The supplemental driver side knee air
this must be replaced at an Authorized needed to help keep you in position,
bag provides enhanced protection and
Maserati Dealer. away from an inflating air bag. The
works together with the driver
advanced front air bag during a Advanced front air bags are designed ORC monitors the readiness of the
frontal impact. to provide additional protection by electronic parts of the air bag system
supplementing the seat belts in certain whenever the ignition switch is in the
Air Bag Deployment Sensors frontal collisions depending on the RUN position. If the ignition switch is
and Controls severity and type of collision. in the OFF position, in the ACC
Advanced front air bags are not position, or not active, the air bag
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
expected to reduce the risk of injury in system is not activated and the air
The Occupant Restraint Controller bags will not inflate.
rear, side, or rollover collisions.
(ORC) determines if deployment of the The ORC contains a backup power
The advanced front air bags will not
front air bags and/or side air bags in a supply system that may deploy the air
deploy in all frontal collisions,
frontal or side collision or rollover bags even if the battery has low power
including those that may produce
event is required. Based on the impact or it becomes disconnected prior to
substantial vehicle damage, for
sensor's signals, a central electronic deployment. When starting the
example, some pole collisions, truck
ORC deploys the advanced front air vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag
under rides, and corner impacts. On
bags, SABIC and SAB air bags, and warning light on the instrument
the other hand, depending on the
66
Before Starting
cluster for approximately 4 to 8 vehicle is in complete stop, the air quantity of nontoxic gas is generated
seconds for a test. bags can be deployed in case of to inflate the advanced front air bags.
After the test, the air bag warning collision. For this reason, children The steering wheel hub trim cover and
light will turn off. If the ORC, during must never occupy the front seat in the upper right side of the dashboard
the diagnosis phase detects a a rearward facing seat even if the separate and fold out of the way as
malfunction that could affect the air car is not moving. Deployment of the air bags inflate to their full size. 2
bag system, it turns on the air bag the air bag following an impact The air bags then quickly deflate while
warning light and the “Service Airbag could cause fatal injuries to the helping to restrain the driver and
System” message either momentarily child. Please note that when the front passenger. The advanced front
or continuously. The diagnostics also ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC air bag gas is vented through the vent
record the nature of the malfunction. position or is turned off, the air bag holes in the sides of the air bag. In this
A beep will sound if the light will not deploy in case of collision. way, the air bags do not interfere with
illuminates again after initial startup. Therefore, in these cases, lack of air your control of the vehicle.
bag deployment is not an indication Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
of a system malfunction. Bag Inflator Unit
• Ignoring the air bag warning light The supplemental driver side knee air
and message in your instrument bag unit is located in the dashboard
cluster could mean you won't have trim beneath the steering column.
the air bags to protect you in the When the ORC detects a collision
event of a collision. If the light does requiring the air bag, it signals the
not come on as a bulb check when inflator units. A large quantity of
the ignition is first turned on, stays non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
on after you start the engine, or if it the supplemental driver side knee air
The air bag warning light monitors comes on as you drive, have an bag. The trim cover separates and
the internal circuits and Authorized Maserati Dealer service folds out of the way allowing the air
interconnecting wiring associated with the air bag system immediately. bag to inflate to the full size.
air bag system electrical components. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Front Air Bag Inflator Units
Bag (SAB) Inflator Units
When the ORC detects a collision
requiring the advanced front air bags, The ORC unit determines if a side
WARNING! collision requires the side air bags to
it signals the inflator units. A large
• If the ignition switch is in RUN inflate, based on the severity and type
position, the engine is off and the of collision. Based on the severity and

67
Before Starting
type of collision, the side air bag injure you if you are not belted and • disconnect the battery with a
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle seated properly, or if items are pyrotechnic charge.
may be triggered, releasing a quantity positioned in the area where the side Air Bag Deployment Result
of nontoxic gas. curtain air bag inflates. This especially
The inflating SAB exits through the applies to children. The advanced front air bags are
designed to deflate immediately after
2 seat seam into the space between the The SABICs may also help reduce the
deployment.
occupant and the door. The side air risk of partial or complete ejection of
bag moves at a very high speed and vehicle occupants through side If you do have a collision which
with such a high force that it could windows in certain rollover events deploys the air bags, any or all of the
injure you if you are not seated (because equipped with rollover following may occur:
properly, or if items are positioned in sensing). • The nylon air bag material may
the area where the side air bag Front and Side Impact Sensors sometimes cause abrasions and/or
inflates. This especially applies to skin reddening to the driver and
children. In front and side impacts, impact
front passenger as the air bags
sensors can aid the ORC in determining
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable deploy and unfold.
appropriate response to impact events.
Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units • As the air bags deflate, you may see
Enhanced Accident Response System some smoke-like particles. The
During collisions where the impact is
confined to a particular area of the In the event of an impact causing air particles are a normal by-product of
side of the vehicle, the ORC may bag deployment, if the communication the process that generates the
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending network and the power remains intact, non-toxic gas used for air bag
on the severity and type of collision. In depending on the nature of the inflation. These airborne particles
these events, the ORC will deploy the accident, the ORC will determine may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or
SABIC only on the impact side of the whether the enhanced accident throat. If these particles settle on
vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is response system will have to perform your clothing, follow the garment
generated to inflate the side curtain the following functions: manufacturer's instructions for
air bag. • cut off fuel to the engine; cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle
The inflating side curtain air bag after the air bags have deployed. If
• turn hazard lights and interior lights
pushes the head/s of the occupant/s you are involved in another collision,
on as long as the battery has power
seating in the outside seats from the the air bags will not be in place to
or until the ignition switch is turned
edge of the headliner out of the way protect you.
off;
and covers the window. The air bag • unlock the doors automatically;
inflates with enough force to possibly

68
Before Starting
pretensioners cannot protect you in are made. Take your vehicle to an
another collision. Have the air bags, Authorized Maserati Dealer for any
ENVIRONMENTAL! seat belt pretensioners, and the air bag system service. If your seat
Air bag inflation releases a small front seat belt retractor assemblies including your trim cover and
amount of powder. This powder is not replaced by a Maserati Service cushion needs to be serviced in any
harmful to the environment. Center. Also, have the Occupant way (including removal or 2
Restraint Controller (ORC) system loosening/tightening of seat
serviced as well. attachment bolts), take the vehicle
• Have the air bag checked, serviced to an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
WARNING!
and replaced only by an Authorized • Only Maserati manufacturer
California Proposition 65
Maserati Dealer. approved seat accessories may be
Operating, servicing and maintaining
used. If it is necessary to modify the
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
Air Bag System Maintenance air bag system for persons with
can expose you to chemicals including
disabilities, contact an Authorized
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
Maserati Dealer.
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
which are know to the State of WARNING! • If the speedometer, Rev Counter, or
California to cause cancer and birth • Modifications to any part of the air any engine related gauges are not
defects or other reproductive harm. To bag system could cause it to fail; working, the Occupant Restraint
minimize exposure, avoid breathing thus you could be injured if the air Controller (ORC) may also be
exhaust, do not idle the engine except bag system is not there to protect disabled. The air bags may not be
as necessary, service your vehicle in a you. Do not modify the components ready to inflate for your protection.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wiring. Do not modify the front Promptly check the fuse block for
or wash your hands frequently when bumper, vehicle body structure, or blown fuses. To identify the air bag
servicing your vehicle. For more add aftermarket side steps or fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in
information go to: running boards. section "Maintenance and Care". See
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- • It is dangerous to try to repair any an Authorized Maserati Dealer if the
vehicle part of the air bag system without fuse is efficient.
the necessary know-how.
• Do not attempt to modify any part
of your air bag system. The air bag
WARNING!
may inflate accidentally or may not
• Deployed air bags and seat belt
function properly if modifications

69
Before Starting

Transport of persons with Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE:


disability This vehicle is equipped with an event EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
If it is necessary to modify the data recorder (EDR). The main purpose only if a non-trivial crash situation
advanced air bag system of your of an EDR is to record, in certain crash occurs; no data are recorded by the
vehicle to accommodate a person with or near crash-like situations, such as an EDR under normal driving conditions
2 disabilities, contact an Authorized air bag deployment or hitting a road and no personal data (e.g., name,
Maserati Dealer. obstacle, data that will assist in gender, age, and crash location) are
understanding how a vehicle’s systems recorded. However, other parties, such
have performed. as law enforcement, could combine
The EDR is designed to record data the EDR data with the type of
WARNING! personally identifying data routinely
related to vehicle dynamics and safety
• The advanced air bag system of your acquired during a crash investigation.
systems for a short period of time,
vehicle is not designed to protect
typically 30 seconds or less. To read data recorded by an EDR,
adults with disabilities that require
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to special equipment is required, and
deactivation of the passenger or
record such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR is
driver air bag.
• how various systems in your vehicle needed.
• If you or another occupant is an
were operating; In addition to the vehicle
adult with a medical condition that
• whether or not the driver and manufacturer, other parties, such as
requires air bag deactivation, please
passenger safety belts were law enforcement, that have the special
contact an Authorized Maserati
buckled/fastened; equipment, can read the information
Dealer. For further information on
if they have access to vehicle or the
disabled driver or passengers see • how far (if at all) the driver was
EDR.
http://www.safercar.gov. depressing the accelerator and/or
• As long as the air bag is activated, brake pedal; and
persons with disabilities are advised • how fast the vehicle was traveling.
not to travel in the front seat in These data can help provide a better
order to avoid the risk of serious understanding of the circumstances in
injuries or death, even in minor which crashes and injuries occur.
crashes.

70
Before Starting

Child Restraint Systems not hold the child, no matter how Convertible child seats can be used
strong you are. The child and others either rearward-facing or
NOTE: could be badly injured. Any child forward-facing in the vehicle.
A child restraint system can help riding in your vehicle should always Convertible child seats often have a
protect a child in a vehicle so ensure be in a proper restraint system higher weight limit in the
that the child restraint selected has a suitable for the child’s size. rearward-facing direction than infant 2
certification label applicable to FMVSS carriers do, so they can be used
There are different sizes and types of
213 in the U.S., or CMVSS 213 in rearward-facing by children who have
restraint systems for children from
Canada. outgrown their infant carrier but are
newborn size to the child almost large
still younger than at least two years
enough for an adult safety belt.
Everyone in your vehicle must be old.
Always refer to the manual provided
buckled up all the time, including Children should remain rearward-
with child seat to ensure it is the
babies and children. Every state in the facing until they reach the highest
proper type according the travelling
United States and all Canadian weight or height allowed by their
child. Use the restraint system that is
provinces require that small children child seat. Both types of child restraint
correct for your child.
ride in proper restraint systems. Please systems are fixed to the car by the
be reminded that you can be Infants and Child Restraints lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
prosecuted for ignoring this law. restraint anchor system. Refer to
Safety experts recommend that “Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children 12 years or younger should children ride rearwardfacing in the
ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, CHildren (LATCH)” in this section.
vehicle until they are two years old or
if available. According to crash until they reach either the height or
statistics, children are safer when weight limit of their rear facing child
properly restrained in the rear seats seat. WARNING!
rather than in the front. Two types of child restraint systems • Never place a rear facing infant seat
can be used rearward-facing: infant in front of an air bag. A deploying
carriers and convertible child seats. Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
WARNING! The infant carrier is only used can cause death or serious injury to
In a collision, an unrestrained child, rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is a child 12 years or younger,
even a baby, can become a projectile recommended for children from birth including a child in a rearward
inside the vehicle. The force required until they reach the weight or height facing infant seat.
to hold even an infant on your lap limit of the infant carrier. (Continued)
could become so great that you could

71
Before Starting
(Continued) cushion while the back is against the NOTE:
• Only use a rearward-facing child seatback, they should use a For additional information, refer to
restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. belt-positioning booster seat. www.seatcheck.org or call
The child and belt-positioning booster 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents
Older Children and Child seat are fixed to the car by the should refer to Transport Canada’s
2 Restraints lap/shoulder belt. website for additional information:
Children who are two years old or who Children Too Large for Booster http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
have outgrown their rear-facing child safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Seats
seat can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and Children who are large enough to
convertible child seats used in the wear the shoulder belt comfortably
and whose legs are long enough to WARNING!
forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or bend over the front of the seat when • Improper installation can lead to
who have outgrown the rear-facing their back is against the seatback failure of an infant or child restraint.
weight or height limit of their should use the lap/shoulder belt in a It could come loose in a collision. The
rear-facing child seat. rear seat. child could be badly injured or killed.
Children should remain in a • Make sure that the child is upright in Follow the restraint manufacturer’s
forward-facing child seat with a the seat. directions exactly when installing an
harness for as long as possible, up to infant or child restraint.
• The lap portion should be low on the
the highest weight or height allowed hips and as snug as possible. • A rearward-facing child restraint
by the child seat. These child seats are should only be used in a rear seat. A
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s
also fixed to the car by the rearward-facing child restraint in the
squirming or slouching can move the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child front seat may be struck by a
belt out of position.
restraint anchorage system. Refer to deploying passenger air bag, which
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face may cause severe or fatal injury to
“Lower Anchors and Tether for
or neck, move the child closer to the the infant.
CHildren (LATCH)” in this section.
center of the vehicle. Never allow a
All children whose weight or height is
child to put the shoulder belt under
above the forward-facing limit for the
an arm or behind their back.
Here are some tips on getting
child seat should use a belt-positioning the most out of your child
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat restraint
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat • Before buying any restraint system,
make sure that it has a label
72
Before Starting
certifying that it meets all applicable Installing Child Restraint tighten it around the child restraint
Safety Standards. Maserati also Systems using the Vehicle Seat seat. All seat belts will loosen over
recommends that you make sure Belt equipped with ALR time, it is therefore necessary to check
that you can install the child them periodically and set them
restraint in the vehicle where you All the passenger seat belts are properly.
equipped with an Automatic Locking
will use it before you buy it.
Retractor (ALR) to secure child Lower Anchors and Tether for 2
• The restraint system must be
appropriate for your child’s weight
protection through a Child Restraint Children (LATCH)
System (CRS). These types of seat belts
and height. Your vehicle's rear outboard seats are
are designed to keep the lap portion
• Check the label on the restraint all equipped with the child restraint
of the seat belt tight around the child
system for weight and height limits. anchorage system called LATCH.
restraint seat avoiding to use a locking
• Carefully follow the instructions that The LATCH system allows the child
clip.
come with the restraint system. restraint systems to be fixed without
The ALR will make a ratcheting noise
using the vehicle's seat belts, instead
• If installed improperly, it may not if the entire belt is pulled out of the
fixing the child restraint system to the
work when needed. retractor in order to enable the belt to
vehicle structure, using lower
• Fit the child into the seat according retract subsequently. For additional
anchorages A and upper tether strap
to the child restraint manufacturer’s information on ALR, see “Using Seat
B.
directions. Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Mode” in “Occupants Restraint
Systems” in this section.
To install a Child Restraint System with
WARNING!
ALR, pull enough of the belt out of
When your child restraint system is
the retractor leading it through the
not in use, secure it in the vehicle with
belt path of the protection device.
the seat belt or remove it from the
Slide the latch into the buckle until it
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
clicks, then remove the entire safety
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
belt from the retractor in order to
it could strike the occupants or
rewound. While rewinding a click will
seatbacks and cause serious personal
indicate the safety belt is now in LATCH-Compatible child restraint
injury.
Automatic Locking mode. systems are now available. You should
Exert then a traction on the exceeded never install LATCH child seats so that
lap section of the belt in order to

73
Before Starting
two seats share a common lower NOTE:
anchorage. The top tether strap anchorage behind
If your child restraints are not the central rear seat should be used to
LATCH-Compatible, install the secure a child restraint system with the
restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. vehicle's seat belts.
2 Installing a LATCH- Compatible Child
Restraint System
The lower LATCH anchorages are
“U-shaped” metal rings located on the
rear seat where the cushion meets the
seatback just below the symbol shown • Route the top tether strap to provide
in the picture, but are not visible. You the most direct path between the
will find them if you run your finger anchorage and the child restraint
along the intersection of the seatback system passing it over the headrest.
and seat cushion surfaces. • Attach the hook of the top tether
strap (provided with the child
To install a LATCH-Compatible child restraint system) to the anchor.
restraint seat proceed as follows.
• Secure the child seat to the
“U-shaped” lower metal rings
positioned on the rear seat.
• Fix the top tether strap (provided
with the child seat), to the anchor
located in the panel between the
rear seat back and the rear window.
In addition, there are tether strap
• Lift the plastic cover located behind
anchorages behind each rear seat.
the seat where you want to install
• Tighten the upper strap until you
the child restraint system.
reach the tension level
recommended by the restraint
system manufacturer.

74
Before Starting
To install a child restraint system in the the manufacturer must supply with • Child restraint anchorages are
center seating position route the hook the child restraint system. designed to withstand only those
end of the tether strap between the • An incorrectly anchored tether strap loads imposed by correctly fitted
seatback and adjustable headrest could lead to increased head motion child restraints. Under no
(with the headrest in the full up and possible injury to the child. Use circumstances are they to be used
position) then attach the hook to the only the anchor position directly for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for 2
anchor located in the panel between behind the child seat to secure a attaching other items or equipment
the rear seatback and the rear child restraint top tether strap. to the vehicle.
window.
NOTE: Important Safety Notice for
• Ensure that the tether strap does not Transporting Children
slip into the opening between the • Install the child seat on the rear seat
seatbacks as you remove slack in the as this is the safest position in case of
strap. collisions.
• When using a LATCH-Compatible • Keep the instructions in the vehicle
child restraint system, please ensure together with the documents and
that all seat belts not being used for this owner’s manual. Do not use a
occupant restraints are stowed and child restraint system which does not
out of reach of children. contain instructions for use.
NOTE: • Every child has to use one child
For any further details on installation restraint system; never carry two
and/or use of child restraint system, children using only one child seat.
refer to the instructions provided with WARNING!
• If using the vehicle seat belt, always
the child seat. • Improper installation of a child
check that the belt does not restrain
restraint system to the LATCH
the child's throat.
anchorages can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. The child • Firmly pull the seat belt to check
WARNING! could be badly injured or killed. that it is correctly buckled.
• A child seat should be fitted only Follow the child restraint • Never allow a child to seat
when the car is stationary. Follow manufacturer's directions exactly improperly or to unbuckle the seat
the instructions for assembly, when installing an infant or child belt while driving.
disassembly and positioning that restraint system.

75
Before Starting
• Never allow a child to wear the Transporting Pets Rear Parking Camera
shoulder portion of the belt under
the arms or behind the back. Air bags deploying in the front seat Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
• Never carry children on your lap, not could harm your pet. An unrestrained parking camera that allows you to see
even newborns. No one can restrain pet will be thrown about and possibly an image on the MTC+ screen of the
2 a child in the event of an accident. injured, or injure a passenger during rear surroundings of your vehicle
panic braking or in an accident. whenever the shift lever is put into R
• In case of accident, replace the child
Pets should be restrained in the rear (Reverse).
seat with a new one.
seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers When “Parkview Backup Camera
that are secured by vehicle seat belts. Delay” mode is enabled, the rear view
image shall be displayed for up to 10
seconds after shifting out of R
(Reverse).
When “Rearwiew Camera Delay”
mode is enabled, the rear view image
shall be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of R (Reverse).
To assist the driver during maneuvers
on dead-ends/roads and on
intersections, the vehicle may be
equipped with an optional surround
view camera system. For more details
on this option, see chapter "Surround
View Camera System (optional)" in this
section.
The image will be displayed along with
a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear.
The rear parking camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.

76
Before Starting
The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone
and color:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle


Red 11 - 12 in (28 - 30 cm) 2
Yellow 12 - 78 in (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 78-157 in (2–4 m) or greater

When the shift lever is shifted out of R


(Reverse), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When displayed, dynamic grid lines (if
the function is set to “MTC+ Settings”)
will illustrate the width of the vehicle
while a dashed center-line will
indicate the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. The dynamic grid lines
will show separate zones in different
color that will help indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.

77
Before Starting
NOTE: Surround View Camera
If snow, ice, mud, or any other System (optional)
WARNING!
substance builds up on the camera
Drivers must be careful when
lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, System components
reversing even when using the rear
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover
2 view camera. Always check carefully The system uses four cameras to
the lens.
behind your vehicle, and be sure to monitor the area around the vehicle,
check for pedestrians, animals, other placed on the front grid, under the
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots side rearview mirrors and on the trunk
before reversing. You are responsible lid, between the number plate lights.
for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to be careful while
reversing. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, the rear
camera should only be used as a
parking aid, as the rear camera is
unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using
the rear camera to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver looks
frequently over his/her shoulder
when using the rear camera.

78
Before Starting
which images to display according to 4 present under the images. The button
possible settings. will highlight and the type of setting
Rear view and top view will appear on each image.

Rear cross path view 2

Front cross path view

When the shift lever is shifted to R


(Reverse) position, camera images will Front view and top view
be automatically displayed on MTC+
display. In the top view, the vehicle is
Instead, when the shift lever is shifted represented as it is during the
In any shift lever condition, when
to P (Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) maneuver, therefore any open doors
“Surround View” screen is displayed, a
position, it is possible to activate/ will be visible in the image (see
pop-up message will appear in the
deactivate the system by pressing example in the figure).
upper part for 5 seconds.
“Surround Camera” softkey in To display also the dynamic lines of
With gear in P (Park), N (Neutral) or D
“Controls” screen of MTC+ display. the trajectory you are setting, it is
(Drive), the upper right corner of the
screen will show the “X” key: touch it necessary to set this function by
to go back to the previous screen of accessing the “Settings” menu on
MTC+ display, before entering in MTC+, at “Safety & Driving Assistant”
“Controls”. item. Once this menu is displayed, it is
The deactivation of the rear also possible to set the function that
visualization via “X” soft-key is not delays the exit from this screen in
possible when the transmission is in R special situations when the gear lever
(Reverse) position. is in D (Drive), N (Neutral) and P (Park)
Choose the most suitable setting for position. For further information, see
the situation and the maneuver you “MTC+ Settings” in section
Once the “Surround Camera” screen is are performing or going to perform, “Dashboard Instruments and
displayed, it is possible to choose by touching the relevant button Controls”.

79
Before Starting
day or under good lighting NOTE:
conditions. Do not use and rely on If snow, ice, mud, or any other
the system under poor lighting substance builds up on the camera
conditions. lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
• Distance lines and trajectory lines and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover
2 must be used only as a reference and the lens.
only when vehicle is on a flat
ground. The distance shown on
MTC+ display must be interpreted as
a reference and might be different WARNING!
from the distance actually present California Proposition 65
between the vehicle and any Operating, servicing and maintaining
WARNING! displayed objects. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
Failure to follow the precautions • Any obstacles present above the can expose you to chemicals including
below might result in serious injury or cameras cannot be detected. such as, engine exhaust, carbon
even death. monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
• Drivers must be careful during which are know to the State of
maneuvers also when using the California to cause cancer and birth
CAUTION! defects or other reproductive harm. To
camera system with surround view.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the camera minimize exposure, avoid breathing
• Always check carefully the areas exhaust, do not idle the engine except
system with surround view should
around your vehicle, before as necessary, service your vehicle in a
only be used as a parking aid, as the
proceeding forward or backward. well-ventilated area and wear gloves
cameras are unable to view every
• Be sure to always check for any obstacle or object in your drive path. or wash your hands frequently when
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle servicing your vehicle. For more
obstructions, or blind spots. must be driven slowly when using information go to:
• The driver must use the utmost the camera system with surround www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
caution while using the system to view, to be able to stop in time when vehicle
avoid damage to property or an obstacle is seen. It is
personal injury. recommended that the driver looks
• The camera system with surround frequently over his/her shoulder
view is designed for use during the when using this system.

80
Before Starting

Safety Tips • Do not run the engine in a closed


garage or in confined areas any
longer than needed to move your WARNING!
Transporting Passengers
vehicle in or out of the area. California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle 2
WARNING! vehicle with the engine running,
can expose you to chemicals including
• Do not leave children or animals adjust your heating or cooling
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
inside parked vehicles in hot controls to force outside air into the
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
weather. Interior heat build-up may vehicle. Set the blower at high
which are know to the State of
cause serious injury. speed.
California to cause cancer and birth
• Never ride in a cargo area, inside of • If you are required to drive with the defects or other reproductive harm. To
a vehicle. trunk open, make sure that all minimize exposure, avoid breathing
windows are closed and the climate exhaust, do not idle the engine except
• Do not allow people to ride in any
control blowers switch is set at high as necessary, service your vehicle in a
area of your vehicle that is not
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation well-ventilated area and wear gloves
equipped with seats and seat belts.
mode. or wash your hands frequently when
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
servicing your vehicle. For more
in a seat and using a seat belt The best protection against carbon information go to:
properly. monoxide entry into the passenger www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
compartment is a properly maintained vehicle
Exhaust Gas engine exhaust system.
Whenever detecting a change in the
sound of the exhaust system or
Vehicle Safety Checks
eventual exhaust fumes inside the Seat Belts
WARNING!
vehicle have the Authorized Maserati • Inspect the belt system periodically,
Exhaust gases can injure. They contain
Dealer inspect the complete exhaust checking for cuts, frays, and loose
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
system and adjacent body areas for parts. Damaged parts must be
colorless and odorless. Breathing it
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or replaced immediately.
can make you unconscious and can
mispositioned parts. • Do not disassemble or modify the
eventually poison you. To avoid
Open seams or loose connections system.
breathing (CO), follow these safety
could permit exhaust fumes to seep
tips: • If the belt has been sharply pulled,
into the passenger compartment.
for example as the result of an

81
Before Starting
accident, the safety belt, together vehicle end of life disposal. See NOTE:
with the anchoring devices, the www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
anchoring device mounting screws perchlorate. provide you with any information
and the pretensioner must be about the available Maserati floor
completely replaced. Even if the belt Defroster mats included in the “Genuine
2 does not present any exterior signs Check operation by selecting the Accessories” range.
of wear or damage, it may have lost defrost mode and place the fan system
its restraining properties. on high speed (see “Air Conditioning
Air Bag Warning Light Controls” chapter in section
“Dashboard Instruments and WARNING!
The light should illuminate and
Controls”). Pedals that cannot move freely can
remain lit for a few seconds bulb
You should be able to feel the air cause loss of vehicle control and
checking when the ignition switch is
directed against the windshield and increase the risk of serious personal
pushed in RUN position (see
front side windows. Contact injury.
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Authorized Maserati Dealer for service • Always make sure that floor mats
— Air Bags” chapter in this section).
if your defroster is inoperable. are properly attached to the proper
• If the light does not illuminate fasteners.
Floor Mat
while starting, contact the
Authorized Maserati Dealer. Always use floor mats designed to fit • Never place or install floor mats or
the footwell of your vehicle. Use only other floor coverings in the vehicle
• If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
floor mats that leave the pedal area that cannot be properly secured to
on while driving, have the system
unobstructed and that are firmly prevent them from moving and
checked by the Authorized Maserati
secured so that they cannot slip out of interfering with the pedals.
Dealer.
position and interfere with the pedals • Never put floor mats or other floor
or impair safe operation of your coverings on top of already installed
vehicle. floor mats. Additional floor mats and
WARNING!
other coverings will reduce the size
Certain components of this vehicle of the pedal area and interfere with
such as air bag modules, seat belt the pedals.
pretensioners, adaptive steering
columns, and button cell batteries may • Check mounting of mats on a regular
contain Perchlorate material. Special basis. Always properly reinstall and
handling may apply for service or secure floor mats that have been

82
Before Starting
removed for cleaning. Lights and Indicator Lights monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
• Always make sure that objects • Have someone observe the which are know to the State of
cannot fall into the driver footwell operation of exterior lights while California to cause cancer and birth
while the vehicle is moving. Objects you operate the controls (see defects or other reproductive harm. To
can become trapped under the “Lights” chapter in section minimize exposure, avoid breathing
brake pedal and accelerator pedal “Understanding the Vehicle”). exhaust, do not idle the engine except 2
causing a loss of vehicle control. as necessary, service your vehicle in a
• Check turn signal and high beam
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
• Mounting posts must be properly indicator lights on the instrument
or wash your hands frequently when
installed, if not equipped from the cluster (see “Instrument Cluster”
servicing your vehicle. For more
factory. Failure to properly follow chapter in section “Dashboard
information go to:
floor mat installation or mounting Instruments and Controls”).
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
can cause interference with the Door Latches vehicle
brake pedal and accelerator pedal
• Check for positive closing, latching,
operation causing loss of control of
and locking of doors and trunk lid
the vehicle.
(see “Unlock the Vehicle with Key
Tires fob” chapter in this section).

• Examine tires for excessive tread Fluid Leaks


wear and uneven wear patterns. • Check area under vehicle after
• Check for stones, nails, glass, or overnight parking for recent fluid
other objects lodged in the tread or leaks (oil, fuel, etc.).
sidewall. • If gasoline fumes are detected or
• Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. fluid leaks are suspected, contact the
• Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and Authorized Maserati Dealer.
bulges.
• Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
WARNING!
• Check the tires (see “Tire Inflation
Pressure” chapter in section California Proposition 65
“Features and Specifications”) for Operating, servicing and maintaining
proper cold inflation pressure. a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
83
Before Starting

Park Assist (if equipped) increased to approximately 7.5 mph cm) from the front bumper in the
(12 km/h) or above. The system will horizontal direction, depending on the
The Park Assist (also called become active again if the vehicle location, type and orientation of the
“ParkSense”) system provides visual speed is decreased to speeds less than obstacle.
and audible indications of the distance approximately 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
2 between the rear and/or front bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing Park Assist Sensors
up or moving forward, e.g. during a The four Park Assist sensors, located in
parking maneuver. the rear bumper, monitor the area
Besides the use of the sensors available behind the vehicle that is within the
on the bumpers and of the rear sensors' field of view. The sensors can
parking camera, the vehicle may be detect obstacles up to approximately
equipped with surround view cameras 78 in (200 cm) from the rear bumper in
(optional) to assist the driver during the horizontal direction, depending on
maneuvers on dead-ends/roads and on the location, type and orientation of
intersections. For more details on this the obstacle. Park Assist Warning Messages
option, see chapter "Surround View Display
Camera System (optional)" in this The Park Assist Warning screen will
section. only be displayed if “Sound + Display”
Refer to “Park Assist System Usage is selected from the MTC+ System.
Precautions” for limitations of this Refer to “MTC+ Settings” in section
system and recommendations. “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”
Park Assist system will retain the last for further information.
system state (enabled or disabled) The Park Assist Warning screen is
from the last ignition cycle when the located on the instrument cluster
ignition is changed to the RUN display.
position. It provides visual warnings to indicate
Park Assist system can be active only The six Park Assist sensors, located in
the distance between the rear bumper
when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or the front bumper, monitor the area in
and/or front bumper and the detected
D (Drive). front of the vehicle that is within the
obstacle.
If Park Assist is enabled at one of these sensors' field of view.
The warning display will turn on
shift lever positions, the system will The sensors can detect obstacles up to
indicating the system status (ready or
remain active until the vehicle speed is a distance of approximately 50 in (120
off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
84
Before Starting
or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has one flashing red arc only, combined
been detected. with a continuous sound.
The detection area in front of the The following charts show the
vehicle is divided into two parts with warning alert visualization when the
four arcs while the two detection system is detecting an obstacle.
areas behind the car into five arcs. 2
The system will indicate a detected
obstacle by displaying arcs with fixed
or flashing light and a characteristic
sound according to the obstacle
distance. The color indicates the
distance and the arc indicates the
position of the detected obstacle. The
green color of the outer arc indicates
the maximum distance, the amber
color of the middle arcs indicates the
medium distance, while the red color
of the nearest arc indicates the
minimum distance.

As the vehicle moves closer to the


object, the instrument cluster will
display the arc moving towards the
vehicle and the sound tone will
change from single to slow, to fast
and to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle
when the instrument cluster displays

85
Before Starting

Front Sensors - Warning Alerts


More than 50 in 50-40 in 40-24 in 23.6-12.2 in Less than 12 in
Front distance
(120 cm) (120-101 cm) (100-61 cm) (60-31 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert None None Slow Fast Continuous
2 Arc in left and
None 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most)
right areas
Light type None Solid Solid Flash Flash
Arc color - Green Amber Amber Red
Radio sound Active Active Mute Mute Mute

Rear Sensors - Warning Alerts


Rear More than 78 in 78-59.4 in 60-40 in 40-24 in 23.6-12.2 in Less than 12 in
distance (200 cm) (200-151 cm) (150-101 cm) (100-61 cm) (60-31 cm) (30 cm)
Audible
None Single Slow Slow Fast Continuous
Alert
Arc in left
and right None 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st (inner most)
areas
Light type None Solid Solid Solid Flash Flash
Arc color – Green Amber Amber Amber Red
Radio sound Active Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute

NOTE:
• Maserati reserves the right to change specifications without prior notification.
• Park Assist will turn off the front park assist audible alert (chime) after approximately 4 seconds when an obstacle has
been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

86
Before Starting

Enabling and Disabling Park the system requires service, the LED (11 km/h). Under this condition Park
Assist will blink momentarily, and then the Assist will not operate. See
LED will be on. “Instrument Cluster” in section
By accessing the submenu “Safety & When the shift lever is moved to R “Dashboard Instruments and
Driving Assistant” from MTC+ System, (Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of Controls” for further information.
the “Park Assist” can be disabled
(option “Off”). The available options
7 mph (11 km/h) or below and the If the instrument cluster displays a 2
system is disabled, the instrument message prompting you to clean the
regarding the warning alerts are: cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST sensors, make sure the outer surface
“Sound” or “Sound + Display”. Refer Off” message for 5 seconds until the and the underside of the rear bumper
to “MTC+ Settings” in section shift lever remains in R (Reverse) or and/or front bumper is clean and clear
“Dashboard Instruments and when the shift lever is moved in D of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
Controls” for further information. (Drive). obstruction and then cycle the ignition
The front sensors can be enabled or switch. If the message continues to
disabled at any time by pressing the Service the Park Assist System appear contact the Authorized
button on the front dome console. In case of malfunction of the Park Maserati Dealer.
Assist system, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single sound, once per
ignition cycle. The instrument cluster
will display a message when any of
the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked
by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
The instrument cluster will display a
message when any of the rear or front
sensors are damaged and require
After pressing the button the service.
When the shift lever is moved to R If a failure message is displayed on the
instrument cluster will display the instrument cluster, contact the
state of front parking sensors for (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
approximately five seconds. The
button LED will be on when the front instrument cluster will display the
sensors are disabled. The button LED corresponding message for the time
will be off when the front sensors are lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D
enabled. If the button is pressed and (Drive) at speeds less than 7 mph

87
Before Starting

Cleaning the Park Assist surroundings. Failure to do so can


Sensors result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
When cleaning the sensors, take
special care not to scratch or damage • Park Assist is only a parking aid and Park Assist Volume
them; therefore, do not use dry, rough it is unable to recognize every The volume of the acoustic signal
2 or hard cloths. obstacle, including small obstacles. emitted by the front and rear parking
The sensors must be washed with clean Parking curbs might only be sensors is set to the medium level.
water, possibly adding car shampoo. temporarily detected or not detected Three different levels of volume can be
Should you need to repaint the at all. Obstacles located above or selected via the submenu “Safety &
bumper or in case of paint touch-ups below the sensors will not be Driving Assistant” from the MTC+
in the sensor area, please contact detected when they are in close System.
exclusively the Authorized Maserati proximity. Low level is useful in certain conditions
Dealer. Incorrect paint application • The vehicle must be driven slowly when the parking sensor acoustic
could affect the parking sensors when using Park Assist in order to be signal keeps coming on although there
operation. able to stop in time when an is no actual collision hazard. This may
obstacle is detected. When backing typically occur when driving in a queue
Park Assist System Usage up, it is recommended that the driver or when the vehicle is overtaken by
Precautions looks over his/her shoulder when motorcycles or other vehicles on one
using Park Assist. or both sides in a queue of traffic.
NOTE:
When you set the volume, only the
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
parking sensor acoustic signal will be
vibrations could affect the
affected. The radio or any other
performance of Park Assist. WARNING! devices connected to the vehicle sound
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer Drivers must be careful when backing system will not be affected.
hitches, etc., must not be placed up even when using the Park Assist Refer to chapter “MTC+ Settings” in
within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear system. Always check carefully behind section “Dashboard Instruments and
bumper while driving the vehicle. your vehicle, look behind you, and be Controls” for further information.
Failure to do so can result in the sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
system misinterpreting a close object other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
as a sensor problem, causing the spots before backing up. You are
service Park Assist message to be responsible for safety and must
displayed in the instrument cluster. continue to pay attention to your

88
3 – Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Front Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Power Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Adjustable Pedals (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Windshield Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Power Sunroof with Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
HomeLink (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Air Conditioning Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

89
Understanding the Vehicle

Interior Components
Dashboard Components

90
Understanding the Vehicle

1 Adjustable side air outlets. 21 Internal rear view mirror. 8 Cover for cupholder and power
2 Engine START/STOP button. 22 Auto-dimming on/off button. socket compartment (some
versions can have the
3 Light switch. 23 Front dome console.
compartment with cupholder
4 Light dimmer controls. (*) If equipped and power socket visible,
5 Steering wheel controls. without access cover).
6 Instrument cluster. Central Console Components 9 Central console covers with
7* Right shift paddle +. armrest function.
10 Air outlets (adjustable). 3
8* Left shift paddle –.
9 Hood release. 11 Rear power sunshade and rear
seats comfort controls panel (if
10 Adjustable central air outlets. equipped).
11 Analog clock.
12 MTC+ display. Front Dome Console
13 Multifuction lever (windshield Components
wipers, headlight washer and
headlight selection, turn
signals).
14 Climate controls. 1 Automatic transmission shift
15 Dashboard glove box handle. lever.
16 Dashboard glove box. 2 Hazard lights switch.
17 Cover for compartment with 3 Drive mode switches.
AUX, USB, SD memory card 4 Electric Parking Brake lever.
port and slide phone drawer. 5 Glove compartment.
18 Storage compartment handle. 6 Unlock button for central
19 Storage compartment. console with cupholder and
power outlet. 1 Reading lights control button.
20 Vehicle security light and solar
sensor. 7 Rotary selectors and buttons 2 Central light control button.
for the multimedia navigation. 3 Reading lights.

91
Understanding the Vehicle

4 Central light.
Components between the Rear
Seats
5 Sunroof controls.
6 HomeLink controls (optional).
7 Button to release the manual
trunk lid or to open
fully/partially the power trunk
lid (optional).
3 8 Button to enable/disable front
sensors of the Park Assist system
(if equipped). 1 Internal door handle.
2 Driver’s seat and rear mirrors
Front Doors Components memory switch.
3 Rear view mirrors switches. 1 Armrest cupholder covers
4 Power window switch. unlock button (some versions
can have the cupholder visible,
5 Power door unlocks/locks.
without access cover).
6 Rear windows and sunshade
2 Armrest compartment unlock
lockout button.
button with power outlet and
7 Loudspeakers. USB port (optional).
8 Storage compartment.
9 Internal door lock/unlock knob.
10 Passenger door panel grip.
11 Reflex reflector.
12 External door handle.
13 Door lock button with “Passive
Entry” function.
14 Door outboard opening lock.

92
Understanding the Vehicle

Rear Dome Console 1 Internal rear door handle. Front Power Seats
Components
2 Grip. Seats and seat belts are part of the
3 Loudspeaker. Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
4 Door storage pockets.
For further information, see chapter
5 Power window switch. “Occupant Restraint System” in
6 Power doors lock/unlock Section “Before Starting”.
buttons. Depending on the different markets
7 “Child protection” door lock and versions, the front seats may have 3
system. different controls for adjustment and
optional features. The configurations
8 Inside door lock/unlock knob.
shown below may differ from the ones
9 Reflex reflector. in your vehicle.
1 Reading lights control button. 10 External door handle.

2 Central light control button.


WARNING!
3 Reading light LED. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
4 Central light LEDs. a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Rear Doors Components Front Power Seat Controls


The power seats switches are located
on the outboard side of the seat
cushion.
Use the front switch 1 to move the
seat up or down, forward or rearward
or to recline the seat cushion.
Use the switch 2 to recline the
seatback.
Use the rear switch 3 to adjust the
lumbar support.

93
Understanding the Vehicle
Grip switch 1 from the back side and
push it down or up.
Release the switch 1 when the desired WARNING!
position is reached. Remember that the headrests must be
positioned so that their upper edge is
aligned with the top of the occupant’s
CAUTION! head.
If the seat's movement does not work,
make sure that the corresponding fuse Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down)
3 is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse The angle of the seat cushion can be
Replacement” in section “Maintenance adjusted in four directions.
and Care”). Pull upward or push the front of the
switch 1, to move the front cushion
Head Restraints Adjustment (for seat in the direction of the switch.
Comfort Seat only) Release the switch 1 when the desired
To manually lift or lower the head position is reached.
restraints on the Comfort Seat press
Seat Back Tilt Control
the indicated lateral button.
The angle of the seatback can be
NOTE: adjusted forward or rearward.
The optional Sport Seat does not Push the seatback switch 2 forward or
include the head restraint adjustment. rearward, the upper seatback will
Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment move in the direction of the switch.
The seat can be adjusted both forward Release the switch 2 when the desired
and rearward. position is reached.
Push the seat switch 1 forward or Power Lumbar
rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Push the switch 3 forward or rearward
Release the switch 1 when the desired to increase or decrease the lumbar
position is reached. support.
Push the switch 3 upward or
Seat Up/Down Adjustment downward to raise or lower the
The height of the seat can be adjusted lumbar support.
up- or downward.
94
Understanding the Vehicle
The seats comfort commands are in • Starting from the state “OFF”,
the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. indicated below the respective icon,
WARNING! They are present in the "Climate" within 15 seconds touch the driver or
• Never adjust the seat while driving. screen even when the A/C is off. See passenger seat soft-key once to
You could lose control of the vehicle. “Air Conditioning Controls” in section select HI-level heating.
Moving the seat could distract you “Dashboard Instruments and
or make you press a pedal Controls” for further details.
unintentionally.
• Seats should be adjusted before
fastening the seat belts and while WARNING! 3
the vehicle is parked. • Persons with low skin sensitivity
• Do not travel with the seatback because of advanced age, chronic
reclined so that the shoulder belt is illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
no longer resting against your chest. medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
In a collision you could slide under or other physical conditions must be
the seat belt, which could result in careful when using the seat heater. • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver
serious injury or death. It may cause irritation even at low or passenger seat soft-key a second
temperatures, especially if used for time to select LO-level heating.
long periods of time.
CAUTION! • Do not place anything on the seat
Do not place any object under a that insulates against heat, such as a
power seat or obstruct its movement blanket or cushion. This may cause
as it may cause damage to the seat the seat heater to overheat.
controls. Seat movement may become
limited if there is an obstruction in the Front Seats Heat Function
way. NOTE:
The engine must be running for the
Front Heated Seats heated seats to operate.
The front seats are equipped with • Within 15 seconds, touch the same
heaters in both seat cushions and • Touch the “Climate” softkey on the soft-key a third time to shut off the
seatbacks. lower part of the MTC+ display. seat heating.

95
Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: The seats comfort commands are in • Within 15 seconds, touch the driver
Once a heat setting is selected, heat the “Climate” screen of the MTC+. or passenger seat soft-key a second
will be felt within 2 to 5 minutes. They are present in the “Climate” time to select LO-level ventilation.
screen even when the A/C is off. See
When the HI-level setting is selected, “Air Conditioning Controls” in section
the heater will provide a boosted heat “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”
level during the first 4 minutes of for further details.
operation.
Front Ventilated Seats Function
Then, the heat output will drop to the
3 normal HI-level. NOTE:
If the HI-level setting is selected, the The engine must be running for the
system will automatically switch to ventilated seats to operate.
LO-level after a maximum of 60
minutes of continuous operation. • Touch the “Climate” softkey on the
At that time, the display will indicate lower part of the MTC+ display. • Within 15 seconds, touch the same
the change from HI to LO. soft-key a third time to shut off the
• Starting from the state “OFF”,
The LO-level setting will turn OFF seat ventilation.
indicated below the respective icon,
automatically after a maximum of within 15 seconds touch the driver or
approximately 45 minutes. passenger seat soft-key once to select
Front Ventilated Seats HI-level ventilation.
(optional)
To enhance occupants comfort by high
external temperatures, both the driver
and passenger seats, on request, can
be ventilated.
Small fans are located in the seat
cushion and seatback, they draw air
from the seat surface through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger
cooler when the temperature is high.

96
Understanding the Vehicle

Driver Memory Seat • The “1” and “2” buttons which are • Check on the instrument cluster for
used to recall either of two the positive response of the actions
This feature allows the driver to store programmed memory profiles. “Memory 1 (or 2) profile set”.
up to two different memory profiles After these steps, the profile set will
for easy recall through a memory be memorized in the selected position.
switch. Each memory profile contains
desired position settings for the driver NOTE:
seat, external side mirrors, adjustable Memory profiles can be set without
pedals (optional), and power tilt and the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle
telescopic steering column and a set of must be in P (Park) to recall a memory 3
programmed radio stations. profile.
Your key fob RKE transmitter can also
be set to recall the same positions by Pairing Remote Keyless Entry
pressing the button. Transmitter to Seats Memory
Memory Profiles Setting
NOTE: Your key fob with RKE transmitters
NOTE: can be programmed to recall one of
• Only one key fob RKE transmitter
can be linked to each of the memory Saving a new memory profile will two programmed memory profiles by
positions. erase an existing profile from memory. pressing the button on the RKE
transmitter.
• “Passive Entry” door handles cannot
To create a new memory profile,
be linked to the memory function. NOTE:
perform the following:
Use either the memory recall switch This feature can be enabled or
or the key fob RKE transmitter (if • Cycle the ignition device to the ACC
disabled using the MTC+ System, refer
linked to the memory feature) to or RUN position.
to “MTC+ Settings” in section
recall memory positions 1 or 2. • Adjust all memory profile settings to “Dashboard Instruments and
desired preferences (i.e., seat, side Controls” for further information.
The memory seat switch is located on
mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional),
the driver's door trim panel. The To program your key fobs RKE
power tilt and telescopic steering
switch consists of three buttons: transmitter, perform the following
column, and radio station presets).
• The “S” (SET) button, which is used • Press and release the “S” button on actions:
to activate the memory save the memory switch. • Cycle the ignition device to the RUN
function. position.
• Within 5 seconds, press and release
the memory button “1” or “2”.
97
Understanding the Vehicle
• Move the seat and/or the other Memory Position Recall Easy Entry/Exit Driver Seat
adjustable devices in the position
NOTE: This feature provides automatic driver
that you wish to memorize, or recall
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall seat positioning to enhance driver
a previously memorized profile,
memory positions. If a recall is mobility when entering and exiting
pressing the corresponding memory
attempted when the vehicle is not in P the vehicle.
button “1” or “2”.
(Park), a message will display in the The distance the driver seat moves
• Cycle the ignition device to the OFF depends on where you have the driver
position. instrument cluster.
seat positioned when you place the
• Press and release the “S” button. ignition device to the OFF position.
3 To recall the memory settings for
• Within 5 seconds, press and release driver, press memory button number • When you cycle the ignition device
the memory button “1” or “2”. “1” or “2” on the driver's door trim to the OFF position the driver seat:
• Press and release the button on panel or the button on the RKE
• will move about 2.36 in (60 mm)
key fob RKE transmitter. transmitter linked to memory position
rearward if the driver seat position
• Within 3 seconds, press and release “1” or “2” with ignition device in the
is greater than or equal to ca. 5.51
the button on the key fob RKE RUN position.
in (140 mm) forward of the rear
transmitter. A recall can be canceled by pressing
stop;
To check if the system has memorized any of the buttons (“S”, “1”, or “2”)
• will move to a position of ca. 3.15
the correct profile, you can move the during a recall. When a recall is
in (80 mm) rearward of the rear
seat and press the button: the seat canceled, the driver seat, external side
stop if the driver seat position is
will move to the memorized position. mirrors, adjustable pedals (optional),
between 5.51 in (140 mm) and 3.15
and power tilt and telescopic steering
NOTE: in (80 mm) forward of the rear
column stop moving.
stop.
Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be A delay of at least one second will
unlinked to your memory settings by occur before selecting a new recall. • The seat will return to its previously
pressing the “S” button followed by set position when you place the
the button on the key fob RKE ignition device into the ACC or RUN
transmitter. position.
• The Easy Entry/Exit feature is
disabled when the driver seat
position is less than 3.15 in (80 mm)
forward of the rear stop. In this
position, there would be no benefit

98
Understanding the Vehicle
to the driver by moving the seat for Rear Seats
Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have Rear seats can fit three passengers.
an associated easy entry/exit position. Seats and seat belts are parts of the
occupant restraint system of the
NOTE: vehicle.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled using the MTC+
System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in WARNING!
section “Dashboard Instruments and
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in 3
Controls” for further information.
a seat and using a seat belt properly. • To lower the head restraint, press
the push button, located at the foot
NOTE: of the head restraint on the left side,
See chapter “Occupants Restraint and push downward on the head
Systems” in section “Before Starting” restraint.
for seat belt positioning.

Rear Head Restraints


Side seats are endowed with fixed
head restraints.
The center seat head restraint has two
positions, up or down.
When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be
in the raised position.
When there are no occupants in the NOTE:
center seat the head restraint can be To remove the head restraint of
lowered in order to provide the driver central seat see “Cargo Area” in this
for maximum visibility. section.
• To raise the head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint.

99
Understanding the Vehicle

Rear Armrest Rear Side Heated Seats


The rear armrest is mobile and can be (optional)
folded up into the seat back. The side rear seats can be equipped
• To lower it, pull the stripe as with heaters both in seat cushion and
indicated. seatback.
Rear seats heating can be adjusted by
operating control devices on the panel
located on the rear side of the central
3 console. The panel also includes
command for the rear window
sunshade (see “Rear Windows” in
section “Before Starting”).

WARNING!
• Persons with low skin sensitivity
• To close it, pull it upwards then push because of advanced age, chronic
it back into its seat. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
On the front part of the armrest there medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
are two cupholders (see “Interior or other physical conditions must be
Features” in this section). careful when using the seat heater. It
Inside the armrest there is a glove or • To close the compartment, lower the
cover. may cause irritation even at low
document compartment. Pressing the temperatures, especially if used for
opening button and lifting the cover long periods of time.
of the armrest box you access to an CAUTION!
illuminated compartment where you • Do not place anything on the seat
The armrest is not designed to support that insulates against heat, such as a
can find on request a 12 V power
the weight of an adult or a child: blanket or cushion. This may cause
outlet and an USB charging port.
please use it only to store beverages, the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
small objects or documents. in a seat that has been overheated
could cause irritation due to the

100
Understanding the Vehicle
increased surface temperature of the • The engine must be running for the Power Steering Wheel
seat. heated seats to operate.
Adjustment
The buttons on the panel with the By selecting the HI-level setting, the
resistance icon activate the heating on heater will provide a boosted heat This feature allows you to tilt the
one or both seats. level during the first four minutes of steering column upward or downward
operation. Then, the heat output will or to lengthen or shorten it in order to
• Push the button once to select the adjust the steering wheel to an
highest heating level. The upper LED drop to the normal HI-level.
By setting the HI-level, the system will optimized position.
located on the side of the icon will
illuminate. automatically switch to LO-level after The power tilt/telescoping steering 3
a maximum of 60 minutes of column/wheel switch is located on the
• Push the same button a second time
continuous operation. The LO-level lower left side of the steering column.
to select the lowest level. The lower
setting will turn off automatically To adjust the tilt of the steering
LED will illuminate.
after a maximum of approximately 45 column/wheel, move the switch up or
• Push the same button a third time to minutes. down as desired.
shut the heating elements OFF. The
LED will turn off.

To lengthen or shorten the steering


column/wheel, pull the switch toward
NOTE:
you or push the switch away from you
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat as desired.
will be felt within two to five
minutes.

101
Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: The heated steering wheel can shut off
You can use your key fob with RKE early or may not turn on when the
transmitter or the memory buttons on steering wheel is already warm.
the driver's door trim panel to return The heating steering wheel command
the tilt/telescopic steering is in the “Climate” screen of MTC+. See
column/wheel to programmed “Air Conditioning Controls” in section
positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” in “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”
this section. for further details.

3 NOTE:
The engine must be running for the
• Within 15 seconds, touch the heated
WARNING! heated steering wheel to operate.
steering wheel soft-key a second
Do not adjust the steering time to turn it off.
• Touch the “Climate” softkey located
column/wheel while driving.
on the lower part of the MTC+
Adjusting the steering column/wheel
display.
while driving could cause the driver to
• When the heating function is in the WARNING!
lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
off state, soft-key is not highlighted. • Persons with low skin sensitivity
steering column/wheel is adjusted
because of advanced age, chronic
before driving your vehicle. Failure to
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
follow this warning may result in
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
serious injury or death.
or other physical conditions must be
careful when using the seat heater. It
Heated Steering Wheel may cause irritation even at low
(optional) temperatures, especially if used for
The steering wheel contains a heating long periods of time.
element inside the rim that helps • Do not place anything on the
warm driver’s hands by cold weather. steering wheel that insulates against
The heated steering wheel has only heat, such as a blanket or steering
one temperature setting. Once turned • Within 15 seconds, touch the heated wheel covers of any type and
on, this function will operate for steering wheel soft-key to turn on material. This may cause the steering
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before the function. wheel heater to overheat.
automatically shutting off.

102
Understanding the Vehicle

Adjustable Pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could Rearview Mirrors
lose control and have an accident.
(if equipped) Always adjust the pedals position External Mirrors
The adjustable pedals system is while the vehicle is parked.
External mirrors can be adjusted
designed to allow greater range of The following messages will be electrically and are equipped with
pedals positions enabling driver displayed if the driver is attempting to anti-mist resistors operated by the air
comfort with regard to the steering adjust the pedals when the system is conditioning system (see “Air
wheel tilt and the seat position. locked out: Conditioning Controls” in section
This feature allows the brake and “Dashboard Instruments and
accelerator pedals to move toward or • “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable 3
While Reversing”; Controls”).
away from the driver’s feet. The mirrors can be closed electrically
The switch is located on the front side • or “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable
and will yield in both directions in case
of the driver's seat cushion side shield. While Cruise Engaged”.
of a collision.
NOTE: The external mirrors are
For vehicles equipped with driver electrochromic, which means, they
memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) automatically operate an anti-glare
transmitter or the memory buttons on function by gradually shading as the
the driver's door trim panel to return light hitting the mirrors increases.
the adjustable pedals to programmed The external rear-view electrochromic
positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” mirrors work in conjunction with the
in section “Understanding the internal rear-view electrochromic mirror.
Vehicle” for further information. NOTE:
• The mirrors can be adjusted
Press the switch downward to move
CAUTION! electrically only with the ignition
the pedals forward (toward the front
Do not place any object under the device in ACC and RUN position.
of the vehicle).
Lift the switch upward to move the adjustable pedals or obstruct their • When the vehicle is started, the
pedals rearward (toward the driver). movements as it may cause damage to indicator light shown in the picture
the pedal controls. Pedal movement may will momentarily illuminate in both
become limited if there is an obstruction outside rear-view mirrors to let the
in the adjustable pedal's path. driver know that the BSA system is
WARNING!
operational. For more details see
Do not adjust the pedals position
(Continued)
103
Understanding the Vehicle
(Continued) the adjacent lane and get a partial
chapter “Blind Spot Assist” in section overlap with the visible image on the
“Driving”. inside rearview mirror.
Power mirror preselected positions can
be reset by operating the Memory
Driver Seat device. Check “Driver
Memory Seat” in this section for
further information.

3
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
external side convex mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they
The external of the rear-view mirror really are. Relying too much on your
support is equipped with LEDs, passenger side convex mirror could
lighting up when the turn signals and cause you to collide with another
vehicle entry/exit lights are activated. vehicle or object. Use the inside mirror
When the surround view camera to judge the size or distance of a
system is installed, at the external vehicle seen in the external side
bottom side of the rear-view mirror is convex mirror.
the side view camera (refer to To adjust a rearview mirror, press
“Surround View Camera System either the L (left) or R (right) button to Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
(optional)” in section “Before select the mirror that you want to This feature provides automatic
Starting”). adjust. The spin button will illuminate external rearview mirrors positioning,
indicating the rearview mirror is allowing the driver to view the ground
Mirrors Positioning
activated and can be adjusted. area behind the front doors. The
The power mirror controls are located Press the mirror control switch external mirrors will move slightly
on the driver's door trim panel. corresponding to the arrow indicating downward from the current position
The power mirror controls consist of the direction of the desired when the shift lever is shifted into
mirror select buttons and a four-way movement. reverse. The external mirrors will then
mirror control switch. For optimal vision orientate the return to the original position when
outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame
104
Understanding the Vehicle
the lever is shifted out of the reverse
position. Each memory set of the
driver's seat (see "Driver Memory CAUTION!
Seat" chapter in section Never retract or open the mirrors
“Understanding the Vehicle”) manually: it could damage the power
corresponds to a mirror tilt position in mechanism.
reverse.
Internal Rearview Mirror
NOTE:
The position of internal rearview
The mirrors tilt in reverse can be 3
turned on and off using the MTC+ mirror can be manually adjusted, and
Press the switch once and the mirrors is endowed with an accident-
System, refer to “MTC+ Settings” in
will fold in; press the switch a second prevention release system operating in
section “Dashboard Instruments and
time to reset the mirrors to the the event of a collision.
Controls”.
standard position. Internal rearview mirror is
There is a way to make external electrochromic: this glare function is
Folding Mirrors
mirrors automatically fold/unfold. automatically deactivated in reverse to
The switch for the power folding ensure maximum visibility of obstacles.
• If the function is available, it need to
mirrors is located between the power
be activated by MTC+ (refer to
mirror switches.
“MTC+ Settings” in section
“Dashboard Instruments and
Controls”).
• If the mirrors are automatically
folded after the last lock action,
then they will automatically unfold
when the ignition device is set on
ACC or RUN position.
• If the mirrors were manually folded
by the switch on the driver's door
panel, before a lock action, they will
need to be manually unfolded to
reactivate the automatic function.

105
Understanding the Vehicle

Lights
CAUTION!
Light Switch
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning The light switch located on the left
solution directly onto the mirror. Apply side of the dashboard is used for the
the solution onto a clean cloth and position/DRL lights, headlights, side
wipe the mirror clean. marker, license plate lights and rear
fog lights operation.
3 “Mirror Dimmer” Feature The regulation devices beside the
The auto-dimming feature can be switch may have a different
configuration according to type of Rotate the light switch to the or
disabled or re-enabled by pressing the to the position: the instrument
on/off button on the mirror base. headlights installed. It can adjust
respectively: cluster will display the related telltale.
Disabling this feature will increase the
reflectance of the internal mirror, • the left one: brightness of the
increasing visibility at night. instrument cluster lights, doors
controls rear lighting, interior and
night lighting (see “Interior Lights”
in this chapter).
• the right one: headlights leveling
(see “Headlights Leveling” in this
chapter) or brightness tuning of
night lighting (see “interior Lights”
in this chapter).
NOTE:
If the headlights or position/DRL lights
are on after the ignition switch is
placed in OFF position, a buzzer will
alert the driver while opening the
driver's door.

106
Understanding the Vehicle
Lighting Up External Lights according to the Position of the Lights Switch and Ignition Device, and according to the
Engine Status and Twilight Sensor Mode

Ignition Engine Twilight Lights Switch Position


Device Status Sensor
Position Mode AUTO 0
All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position
side marker and (1), side marker and
OFF – –
license plate lights on license plate lights
(3). on. 3
All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position
side marker and (1), side marker and
ACC Off –
license plate lights on license plate lights on
(2). (2).
All lights off. All lights off. Position lights (1), Low beams, position
side marker and (1), side marker and
RUN Off –
license plate lights on license plate lights on
(2). (2).
DRL (1) on. DRL (1) on. DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position
lights, side marker (1), side marker and
RUN On DAY
and license plate license plate lights
lights on. on.
Low beams, position DRL (1) on. DRL (1), rear position Low beams, position
(1), side marker and lights, side marker (1), side marker and
RUN On NIGHT
license plate lights and license plate license plate lights
on. lights on. on.
(1) The lighting system uses the same LED for DRL and front position lights with two different levels of intensity: high for
DRL and low for position lights.
(2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery.
(3) The lights are powered up for 8 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery.

107
Understanding the Vehicle

Headlights On with Wipers If you turn the headlights off (“0” engine is running and the light switch
position) before the ignition, they will is in or “AUTO” position.
When this feature is active, the
turn off in the normal mode. If a turn signal is activated, the DRL
headlights will turn on approximately
LED on the same side of the vehicle
10 seconds after activation of the NOTE:
switches in position light function for
wipers, if the lights switch is placed in • To activate this feature the lights the duration of the turn signal
the “AUTO” position. The headlights must be turned off (“0” position) activation. Once the turn signal is
will additionally turn off by within 45 seconds of placing the deactivated, the DRL LED will light up
deactivation of the wipers if previously ignition switch in the OFF or ACC again.
activated with this function.
3 position.
NOTE:
NOTE: • Once the delay feature is active, any
additional shifting of the light switch On Canadian vehicles DRL are always
The headlights with wipers feature
will cancel the feature. on. On USA vehicles, the DRL lights can
may be turned on and off using the
• The headlight delay time is be turned on and off using the MTC+
MTC+ System, refer to “MTC+
programmable using the MTC+ System, see “MTC+ Settings” in section
Settings” in section “Dashboard
System, see “MTC+ Settings” in “Dashboard Instruments and Controls”
Instruments and Controls”.
section “Dashboard Instruments and for further information.

Headlights Time Delay Controls”.


• If the low beam bulbs/LEDs are active Bi-Xenon Headlight
This safety feature provides headlight
due to “Headlights On with Wiper”, The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights
illumination for up to 90 seconds
then the headlamps delay feature operate with an electric arc saturated
(programmable) when leaving your
will not be activated when the with Xenon gas under pressure,
vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the
ignition switch is set in OFF position. instead of the incandescent filament.
delay feature, place the ignition switch
The light produced is assuredly higher
in the OFF or ACC position while the
headlights are still on. Then turn off Daytime Running Lights (DRL) compared to traditional light bulbs, in
terms of quality (brighter light) as well
the headlights within 45 seconds. The lighting system uses the same high
as of the span and positioning of the
The delay interval begins when the or low intensity headlamps LED,
illuminated area.
lights switch is turned off (position respectively, for the DRL lights and
“0”). If you turn the headlights or front position lights.
position lights on, or place the ignition DRL lights will turn on when the
switch in RUN, the system will cancel twilight sensor is in “DAY” mode, the WARNING!
the delay. If xenon headlamp replacement is

108
Understanding the Vehicle
necessary, contact the Authorized equipped with traditional or Xenon Automatic High Beam (for
Maserati Dealer only: DANGER - RISK light bulbs. versions/markets, where
OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. Other advantages are: provided)
• a clearer light beam, with a cold The Automatic High Beam headlight
“Full-LED” Headlight with white tonality that allows a better control system provides increased
Cornering Function perception of the contrasts thus forward lighting at night by
These headlamps combine the making the night vision more automating high beam control
cornering function to the “Full-LED” efficient and less tiring; through the use of the forward-facing
technology consisting of an additional • a longer duration equivalent at least digital camera located behind the 3
LED module which turns on when two to that of the vehicle; rear-view mirror, which is the same
conditions occurs: the driver turns the • a reduced current consumption. one used for example by the Lane
steering wheel or the driver activates These features positively affect some Keeping Assist - LKA system on
the turn indicator. The cornering vehicle management economy aspects vehicles with ADAS systems.
function will illuminate the corner to by eliminating/reducing the light bulb This camera detects the environmental
enhance the visibility to the driver as replacements and help limit fuel luminosity, the headlamps of
long as speed will be lower than 25 consumption. oncoming vehicles and the tail lamps
mph (40 km/h). The picture shows the increased of proceding vehicles in the front
brightness of the low beam of area. In these cases, the system
standard headlights (A) compared to automatically switches from high
those Full-LED (B). beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
Futhermore, the digital camera is able
to detect the urban areas and the
inhabited centers and to turn off the
high beams when driving near of one
of them.
The properly working for this feature
(if all the other conditions are met) is
“Full-LED” Technology ensured between 21.7 mph (35 km/h)
This technology creates headlights and 155 mph (250 km/h).
with a simpler construction and a
more compact size compared to those

109
Understanding the Vehicle
Activation Mode NOTE:
To activate Automatic High Beam • The function is enabled only if the
feature: brightness sensor detects the right
• Shift the multifunction lever onward lighting conditions and then switch
. the low beam on.
• Put the light switch in “AUTO” • Broken, muddy, or obstructed
position. headlights and taillights of vehicles
in the field of view will cause
• Touch the “Controls” soft-key in the
headlights to remain on longer
3 lower part of the MTC+ display.
(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
• Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto With ADAS and other obstructions on the
High Beam Assist" soft-key to turn • Within 15 seconds, touch the "Auto windshield or camera lens will cause
on the feature. High Beam Assist" soft-key a second the system to function improperly.
time to turn it off.
After these steps, the green indicator Automatic High Beam Failure
on the upper right side of the TFT In the event of a failure on high beam
display comes on. system, the related amber warning
light will light up on the TFT display.
Take your vehicle to the nearest
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
possible avoiding to use this system.

Without ADAS

110
Understanding the Vehicle

Fog Lights
The rear fog lights switch is built into
the lights switch.
To activate the rear fog lights, turn the
headlight switch to the low beam
light or “AUTO” position. Press
the lights switch to turn on the
rear fog lights.
3
NOTE: The left or right arrow on the
The rear fog lights will NOT activate speedometer and tachometer
automatically when turning on the instrument cluster respectively, flashes
low beam or “AUTO” headlights to show proper operation of the front
if previously deactivated by turning and rear turn signal lights.
the lights switch off. The rear fog
lights will only turn on by operating
the switch as previously described.
Pressing again the lights switch
will deactivate the rear fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Turning the lights switch off (position The multifunction lever controls the
“0”) will also deactivate the rear fog operation of the turn signals,
lights. headlight beam selection, overtaking
A dedicated telltale in the instrument lights and windshield wiper and
cluster illuminates when the rear fog washer.
lights are turned on. The multifunction lever is fitted on the
left side of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down until the stop
triggers.

111
Understanding the Vehicle
High Beams and Flashing You can signal another vehicle with
To switch on the high beams with the your headlights by lightly pulling the
light switch in headlamp or multifunction lever toward you. This
“AUTO” position, shift the will turn on the high beams headlights
multifunction lever onward. until the lever is released.
The blue telltale will illuminate on
the tachometer.

3
To activate lane change function, tap
the lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent. The turn
signals (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
This function is useful when Flashing occurs also with lights off
overtaking or changing lanes. (lights switch in position “0”) if the
NOTE: By pulling the lever backward (toward ignition switch is RUN position.
• If either light remains on and does the steering wheel) you switch off the
not flash, or flashes at a fast rate, high beams and switch on the low CAUTION!
check for a defective outside light. If beams.
The high beams can only be switched
an indicator on the instrument on manually by pushing the
cluster fails while moving the lever, multifunction lever forward.
then the turn indicator is probably
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will
appear in the instrument cluster and WARNING!
a continuous chime will sound if the If the high beams are activated, they
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile will turn on automatically every time
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on. the low beams are switched on either
manually or automatically. We

112
Understanding the Vehicle
recommend therefore that you switch The function is enabled only if the NOTE:
them off when they are no longer brightness sensor detects the right Broken, muddy, or obstructed
necessary and every time the twilight lighting conditions. headlights and taillights of vehicles in
sensor deactivates the external lights. To activate this function: the field of view will cause headlights
• Shift the multifunction lever onward to remain on longer (closer to the
Automatic High Beams (if equipped) vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
.
The Automatic High Beam headlight • Put the headlight switch in “AUTO” obstructions on the windshield or
control system provides increased position. camera lens will cause the system to
forward lighting at night by function improperly.
automating high beam control
• Enable the “Automatic High Beam” 3
function on MTC+. If the windshield or Automatic High
through the use of the forward digital
After these steps, the green indicator Beam headlight control mirror is
camera mounted behind the rearview
on the upper right side of the TFT replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
mirror, which is the same one used
display comes on. to ensure proper performance. See
also by the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system. This camera detects your local Authorized Maserati Dealer.
vehicle specific light and automatically Interior Lights
switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is The interior and exterior approach
out of view. Furthermore, the digital lights turn on and off when
camera is able to detect the urban entering/exiting the vehicle (see
areas and the inhabited centers and to “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section
turn off the high beams when driving "Before Starting" for further
near of one of them. information).
The high beam can be turned back on The brightness of the lights can be
if there are all the necessary manually adjusted with the regulator
conditions and if the vehicle speed positioned beside the light switch.
exceed 21.7 mph (35 km/h). To protect the battery, the interior
The “Auto Dim High Beam” feature lights will turn off automatically 10
can be turned on or off using the minutes after the ignition switch has
MTC+ System. Refer to “MTC+ been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the
Settings” in section "Dashboard interior lights were turned on
Instruments and Controls" for further manually or by opening of a door. The
information. glove box light, share the same

113
Understanding the Vehicle
characteristics excepting the trunk Interior Lights Regulator downward performing stable and
light. (only with Bi-Xenon Headlights) dimmable positions.
To adjust interior lights, either turn the NOTE: This regulator switch has 4 different
ignition switch out of OFF or rotate • The left regulator operates only with positions:
the multifunction lever out of “0” park lights or low beams lights on.
position. Stable position: lower level of
• The right regulator adjusts the 0
the internal and night
Courtesy Dimmable Lights headlights leveling: see “Headlights (OFF)
lighting.
The following dimmable courtesy Leveling” in this chapter. 1st Dimmable position: allows
3 lights, can be set with the regulation minimum to maximum
device: brightness tuning of the
• instrument cluster dials and display; instrument cluster dials,
• dome light (front/rear); display, control switches and
MTC’s backlight, including all
• inside door handle LED;
displayed messages and night
• doors and steering wheel backlight lighting.
controls LED;
2nd Stable position: allows
• front footrest light;
maximum brightness set.
• front seats night lighting.
3rd Stable position: allows to
switch on the main and
The regulation device rotates from reading lights of the front
position “0” upward and back dome light.

114
Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Lights Regulators
3rd Stable position: allows to
Headlights Leveling
(only with Full-LED Headlights) (only with Bi-Xenon
switch on the main and
reading lights of the front Headlights)
dome light. A correct headlights leveling is crucial
for the safety of the vehicle’s
NOTE: occupants and of people in the street.
Moreover it is included in the road
The left regulator operates only with
regulation law.
park lights or low beams lights on.
In order to obtain the best visibility 3
conditions while driving with
The right regulator has 2 different headlights on, the headlight beam
positions: must be properly leveled.
0 Stable position: night Headlights leveling must be adjusted
The regulation devices rotate from (OFF) lighting off. at every change of the weight and
position “0” upward and back 1st Dimmable position: allows position of the passengers and/or of
downward performing stable and minimum to maximum the load carried.
dimmable positions. brightness tuning of the A heavy load will weigh the vehicle
The left regulator switch has 4 front dome light LED and the down and, as a consequence, the light
different positions: night lighting. beam will be raised. In this case it is
important to adjust the beam to a
0 Stable position: lower level
correct level using the right regulator
(OFF) of the internal lighting. NOTE:
located on the side of the light switch.
1st Dimmable position: allows The right regulator is only active if the
minimum to maximum switch is in “AUTO” or in low beam
brightness tuning of the mode .
instrument cluster dials,
display, control switches and
MTC’s backlight, including all
displayed messages and
night lighting.
2nd Stable position: allows
maximum brightness set.

115
Understanding the Vehicle
switched on manually by pressing the
The regulator has 3 different
central button.
positions:
The reading lights are controlled by
0 One or two people on the front the respective side buttons.
seats. If they are turned on by pressing the
1 Four or five people in the button, both central and reading lights
vehicle. will stay on for about 10 minutes after
2 Four or five people + load in turning the engine off, and will then
the trunk. turn off gradually.
3 When the exterior lights are switched
During the regulation, the different on, the two night LEDs fitted on the If one or more doors are opened, the
positions (0, 1 and 2) are visualized on side of the power buttons on the front and rear dome lights will turn on
the TFT display. overhead console will light up to for 27 seconds. If the door is closed
facilitate the use of the transmission before this time, the lights will dim
lever and the central console. and subsequently switch off after
about 3 seconds.
NOTE:
The dome lights will also turn on by
pressing the or button for
centralized doors unlock and lock on
the key fob RKE transmitter. See
“Illuminated Entry/Exit” section
“Before Starting” for further
Dome Lights information.
The front and rear part of the dome, In the event of a collision causing
include each a central and two reading automatic interruption of fuel supply,
lights. the dome lights switch on
The central light automatically turns automatically and remain lit for
on when one of the doors is opened approx. 15 minutes.
and turns off when the door is closed
(timed switching off). The light may be

116
Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: independent of the ignition device on the hazard warning flashers will
The controls of the sunroof, of the position. also activate these LEDs.
HomeLink and the button to switch Press the button again to turn them
off Park Assist system can be found on off.
the front dome console. When these lights are on, the
direction indicators, the related arrow
indicator on the instrument cluster
Cargo Lights
and the button itself will flash.
To illuminate the cargo area there are
two lights inside the trunk 3
compartment, one on each side. These
lights turn on when trunk lid is
opened and turn off when it is closed.
The external mirrors are equipped also
with approach and courtesy LEDs,
lighting up when the vehicle entry/exit
lights are activated.

NOTE:
When the hazard warning lights are
activated, the direction indicator
controls are disabled.
If trunk lid is left open for a long time,
lights will turn off after 30 minutes to
Integrated External Rearview
save battery charge. Mirror Lights
External mirrors are supplied with LED
Hazard Warning Flashers turn signals integrated on the support.
Press the indicated button on the The LED turn signal indicators flash
central console to turn on the hazard simultaneously with the
warning flashers. The operation is corresponding turn signal lights in the
front and rear of the vehicle. Turning

117
Understanding the Vehicle

Windshield Wipers and setting (see “Rain Sensing Wipers”


paragraph in this chapter).
Washers • For low speed wiper operation
CAUTION!
The multifunction lever operates the (stable position "LO"): rotate the end • Turn the windshield wipers off when
wipers and washers acting on the of the multifunction control lever driving through an automatic car
windshield when the ignition switch is forward to the first trigger after the wash. The windshield wipers may be
placed in RUN or ACC position. The intermittent setting. damaged if the wiper control is left
multifunction lever is located on the • Rotate to the second trigger after in any position other than “OFF”.
left side of the steering column. the intermittent setting for • In cold weather, always turn off the
3 A low fluid level of windshield washers high-speed (stable position HI) wiper wiper switch and allow the wipers to
is indicated by the indicator light operation. return to the park position before
and by the message on the • Rotate the end of the lever turning off the engine. If the wiper
instrument cluster. downward to the “MIST” position to switch is left on and the wipers
activate a single wipe cycle. freeze to the windshield, the wiper
• The wipers will continue to operate motor may be damaged when the
until you release the multifunction vehicle is restarted.
lever. • Always remove any buildup of snow
• To turn the wipers off rotate the that prevents the windshield wiper
lever to “OFF”. blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper
control is turned off and the blades
cannot return to the off position, the
wiper motor may be damaged.
To refill the fluid, see “Maintenance
Procedures” in section “Maintenance Rain Sensing Wipers
and Care”. This feature detects moisture on the
windshield through an internal
Windshield Wipers
rearview mirror integrated sensor,
• Rotate the end of the multifunction which automatically activates the
lever to one of the four settings to relative wipers.
activate the automatic intermittent

118
Understanding the Vehicle
Rotate forward the end of the The rain sensing system has protective light switch is placed in “AUTO”
multifunction lever to one of four features for the wiper blades and position. In addition, the headlights
settings to adjust the detection arms. It will not operate under the switch off when the wipers are turned
system. following conditions: off (position “OFF”) if they were
First wiper delay position is the least • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit: the previously turned by using this
sensitive, and fourth wiper delay rain sensing feature will not operate function. Powering on Headlights with
position is the most sensitive. Third when the ignition is in RUN position, wipers can be activated and
position should be used for normal the vehicle is stationary and the deactivated with the MTC+ System,
rain conditions. outside temperature is below 32°F see “MTC+ Settings” in section
The rain sense wipers will (0°C). To resume, set the automatic “Dashboard Instruments and 3
automatically change between an feature on the multifunction lever, Controls” for further information.
intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a start the engine and drive or wait
fast wipe depending on the amount Wiper Blade Maintenance
until the outside temperature rises
of detected moisture sensed by a above freezing. When the wiper arms acting on the
particular area of the windshield. windshield are in the rest position it is
• Wipe Inhibit with Transmission in
Place the wiper switch in the “OFF” not possible to check or replace the
Neutral Position: the rain sensing
position when you do not want to use blades (Service position) as they are
feature will not operate when the
the automatic intermittent system. folded under the hood. To service the
ignition is placed in the RUN
The rain sensing feature can be turned blades (see paragraph “Wiper
position, the transmission shift lever
on and off using the MTC+ System, see Maintenance and Blades
is in the N (Neutral) position and the
“MTC+ Settings” in section Replacement” in chapter
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
“Dashboard Instruments and “Maintenance Procedures” of section
(8 km/h). To resume, set the
Controls” for further information. “Maintenance and Care”) it is
multifunction lever to the automatic
necessary to shift the multifunction
function or move the shift lever out
lever to “OFF” and the ignition switch
CAUTION! of N (Neutral).
to OFF position.
• The rain sensing feature may not Headlights On with Windshield Shift the control lever within 15
function properly by ice or dried salt Wipers seconds to the “MIST” position
water on the windshield. (forward rotation of the end of the
When activating this function, the multifunction control lever) and
• Use on the windshield of RainX® or headlights will light up approximately
products containing wax or silicone release. The blades are brought in a
10 seconds after the wipers acting on position enabling to open the wiper
may reduce rain sensor performance. the windshield are turned on if the arms and change the blades.

119
Understanding the Vehicle

Windshield Washers during the cold months until the


windshield has warmed up. If it has
To use the washer on the windshield,
not warmed up, the liquid could
push the end of the multifunction
freeze on the glass and block your
lever inward (toward the steering
view.
column) and hold it as long as washer
spray is desired. • Sudden loss of visibility through the
If you activate the washer while the windshield could lead to a collision.
windshield wiper control is in the You might not see other vehicles or
automatic intermittent range, the other obstacles. To avoid sudden
3 icing of the windshield during
wipers will operate for two wipe cycles
It is possible to use the “MIST” position after releasing the lever and then freezing weather, warm the
for a maximum of 3 times within two resume the previously selected windshield with the defroster before
minutes, corresponding to different intermittent interval. and during windshield washer use.
three blades positions on the If you activate the washer while the
windshield. When completed, bring windshield wiper is turned off (“OFF”
the ignition switch in RUN: the arms position) the wipers will operate for
will reposition. If necessary move the WARNING!
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
multifunction lever to other required California Proposition 65
operating positions. Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
WARNING!
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
Operate or service the windshield
which are know to the State of
wiper blades without deactivating the
California to cause cancer and birth
wipers (“OFF” position), leaving the
defects or other reproductive harm. To
ignition switch in RUN can be
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
dangerous for the operator since the
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
rain sensor may suddenly activate the
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
wipers. Always use “Service” position
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
for any intervention on the windshield
WARNING! or wash your hands frequently when
wiper blades.
• Do not start the windshield washer servicing your vehicle. For more

120
Understanding the Vehicle
information go to: Interior Features any other object in the power
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- outlets as this will damage the outlet
vehicle Electric Power Outlets and blow the fuse. Damages caused
by improper use of the power outlet
Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles The vehicle is equipped with four 12 are not covered by the New Vehicle
(for version/markets, where provided) Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, Limited Warranty.
two available for the front seat
To avoid fluid freezing inside at low
passengers, one for rear seat
external temperatures, the fluid
passengers and one fitted in the trunk
supply nozzles can be heated by
compartment. WARNING! 3
internal resistors.
In vehicles equipped with “Smoking To avoid serious injury or death:
Kit” the electric power outlet inside
• Only devices designed for use in this
the cupholder is replaced with a
type of outlet should be inserted
cigarette lighter.
into any 12 Volt outlet.
All power outlets are supplied only
when the engine is started or the • Replacing the fuses that protect
ignition device set to ACC or RUN. power outlets with others of higher
Power outlets are protected by a fuse. amperage, there is the risk of fire.
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug • Do not touch with wet hands.
into the power outlets to ensure • Close the lids when the plug is not
proper operation. Otherwise, check used and while driving the vehicle.
the matching fuse integrity, see “Fuse
Replacement” in section • If this outlet is mishandled, it may
“Maintenance and Care” for further cause an electric shock and failure.
information.
Power Outlet inside the Cupholder
To access the power outlet is inside the
CAUTION! cupholder beside the transmission
• Do not plug in accessories that lever, press the cover as indicated to
exceed the maximum power of 160 open it completely. This operation is
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. not necessary on versions without
access cover. Remove the cigarette
• Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not insert

121
Understanding the Vehicle
lighter (if equipped) and use its socket upon request for rear seat passengers
as power outlet. (see “Rear Seats” in this section).

WARNING!
High power consumption items
plugged into this outlet for long
periods may discharge the battery
and/or prevent the engine from
3 starting.
Version without cover
Power Outlets inside the Central
Console Power Outlet inside the Trunk
To access the power outlet located The power outlet is positioned on the
inside the glove box of the central right side of the trunk compartment.
console you need to open the half-lids
as indicated in the following
paragraph.

Cupholders
The vehicle is equipped with several
Rear Power Outlets cupholders.
A 12 V power outlet inside the armrest
between the rear seats is available

122
Understanding the Vehicle

CAUTION!
• Use light and shatterproof
containers.
• Do not forcefully push unsuitable
containers into the cupholders to
prevent damage to the containers.
• Do not store hot drinks. 3
Cupholders for Front Passengers The storage and passenger
compartment share the same air
The front cupholders are located
conditioning even though you may
beside the transmission lever and
exclude the air conditioning of the
within the central console.
cupholder compartment by moving
To access the cupholder, push the
the indicated button.
cover (if equipped) as shown in the
picture and it will open completely.

Version without cover


By pressing the indicated button on
the central console, the half-lids will
rise completely enabling access to the
inner compartment where the two
cupholders are located.
To close one or both of the half-lids,
push them down to the locking
position.

123
Understanding the Vehicle
Cupholders for Rear Passengers • Before closing the compartment
Two cupholders are available in the door, ensure that the drawer is fully
front side of the rear seats central back in its seat.
armrest.

3
Multimedia Ports and Phone
Housing Compartment
Multimedia ports and the sliding
drawer for the phone are located
Versions with cupholder visible inside the dashboard compartment
On versions with access covers, press below the climate control panel. To
the button as shown in the picture to access this compartment check that
access them. cupholder cover (if equipped) is closed,
then push the door as indicated in
picture: it will open completely.
If needed, gently pull out the drawer
until it stops at the very first position.
In case of emergency pull out the
drawer completely.
NOTE: The AUX auxiliary port features:
• To prevent damage to the sliding • typical input impedance between
mechanism, do not force the drawer AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm;
into the extracted position. • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at
1 kHz;
• input compatible only with 3.5 mm
jack connectors (not included).
124
Understanding the Vehicle
Any player with these characteristics the visor laterally, lower and release it
and analogue audio output (headset from its catch as indicated.
output type) can be served by the
MTC+ System. The system can
recognise the connection to a player
outlet autonomously, by enabling
access to the audio functions
connected to this source.
This USB input can be used for
data exchange and charge of the 3
connected source (refer to the MTC+ ®
iPod Connection
guide for further details).
Through this USB input is possible to An iPod® can be connected to the
recharge the connected device for system via USB and AUX ports by
about an hour from when the ignition means of a special cable (optional).
device is turned OFF (“Active The MTC+ will then control the
Charging” feature). When this feature following functions: play, pause, fast
is enabled, the USB port will be forward, rewind, next track, previous
backlight. track, random or repeat mode,
In the dashboard compartment of the selection and navigation of
central console there is also a SD playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast.
memory card input. Once inserted into
the slot, to extract it press lightly on
the card. CAUTION!
Do not leave your USB device, iPod® By lowering the visor you can access
Another USB port can be present for
or an external audio source in the the courtesy mirror with incorporated
rear seat passengers, inside the
vehicle for extended periods of time: light illuminating automatically (with
armrest between the rear seats.
extreme temperatures and humidity the ignition switch in RUN) by raising
To access the USB port, open the
can occur in the vehicle. the mirror protective cover.
outside cover. This USB port allow
Before raising the visor, close the
charging the connected source.
mirror cover.
Sun Visors
A paper holder is fitted inside each
Sun visors can be folded to the front sun visor.
and to the side of the vehicle. To move
125
Understanding the Vehicle
and stops the heating: from this time
the cigarette lighter is ready for use.

CAUTION!
After use, always make sure that the
cigarette lighter is switched off.

3
WARNING!
Smoking Kit (optional) • The cigarette lighter reaches high
The kit includes a lighter and a temperatures. Handle it carefully and
removable ashtray with cover. do not allow children to use it so as
The Smoking kit for front seats to avoid risk of fire and injury!
passengers is located inside the box • The cigarette lighter may not be
beside the transmission lever and can used as a power outlet.
be accessed by pressing the cover as
indicated. This operation is not Handholds and Cloth Hooks
necessary on versions without access
cover. Handholds are fitted above the
passenger doors. Once grabbed, they
Version without cover will lower until the block position.
The rear seat passengers can use the When released, a return spring will
removable ashtray by inserting it into bring them back to the original
the rear doors pocket, while the position.
lighter can be inserted into the power
outlet (if equipped) inside the armrest
between the rear seats.
Press the central button to activate the
cigarette lighter. After about 20
seconds the button returns
automatically to the initial position

126
Understanding the Vehicle

3
Cloth hook is present on each rear The mesh pockets can hold small Wi-fi Connection (optional)
handhold. items, maps and magazines.
The control unit with router function
allows you to access a wi-fi high speed
CAUTION! internet connection on board. This
Do not put heavy or sharp objects in enables web navigation and the
the mesh pockets. possibility to connect several devices
at the same time.
iPad Holder
(Genuine Accessories)
WARNING!
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can Mobile internet connection is
provide you with all information intended for passenger use only. Use
Mesh Pockets about the “Maserati iPad Holder” of handheld electronic devices while
mounted on the rear of the front driving can cause an accident due to
Front seats are fitted with mesh seatbacks, available in the “Genuine
pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, distraction, resulting in death or
Accessories” range. injury.
and accessible by rear passengers.
In order to activate the wi-fi control
unit, please contact your Authorized
Maserati Dealer.
As part of the activation process, you’ll
need to create a new account by

127
Understanding the Vehicle
accessing the following website of the searching the available wireless new owner will not be able to register
manufacturer of the system that Networks from the “Setting” menu. the device if it still appears registered
Maserati has chosen for its models: Select the wireless Network linked to in the prior owner's name. If you are a
https://signup.autonetmobile.com/. your vehicle and select “Connect” to subsequent owner, the unit could be
start the connection. improperly monitored (usage and
If the auto-search is active for wireless location), if it is still registered to a
CAUTION! Networks, every time the device will prior owner.
Refer to an Authorized Maserati be used inside the vehicle or close to it,
Dealer to activate the wi-fi control it will connect to the set connection.
3 unit.
NOTE:
Wi-fi connectivity range is • For futher information about the
approximately 100 ft (30 m). In order pairing procedure, refer to the
to avoid intrusions, the router is instructions given with your mobile
supplied with WEP or WPA2 device.
cryptography. • For further information about wi-fi
During activation, to be performed by connectivity and the control unit,
your dealer, it is recommended to please contact Client Service at
enable the security options available 1-800-977.2107 or write to:
by selecting the cryptographic version support@autonetmobile.com.
(WPA2 is recommended) and inserting
the password. In order to connect to
the wi-fi control unit, it will be
necessary to insert this password on CAUTION!
each device you intend to use. When selling the vehicle, you should
After that, complete the contact the above mentioned Client
authentication process and enable Service to have your device removed
Wireless Security to avoid that from the list of activated devices
unauthorized users access the wi-fi. To registered in your name. Do not simply
navigate the internet it is now give your control unit password to a
necessary to pair the device you intend new owner. To avoid improper
to use in the vehicle to the active wi-fi internet access in your name and allow
connection; you can do that by new owner registration you must
de-register with the service provider. A

128
Understanding the Vehicle

Cargo Area Do not exceed the specified Gross The trunk is the most suitable place to
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the load bulky and heavy objects onboard
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), the vehicle. The maximum allowable
both front and rear. load on the floor of the trunk is 440 lb
WARNING! The GVWR is the total allowable (200 kg).
To help protect against personal weight of your vehicle. This includes To load your vehicle properly, store
injury, passengers must not be seated driver, passengers, and cargo. heavier items below and be sure you
in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo The total load must be limited so that distribute their weight as evenly as
space is intended for load carrying you do not exceed the GVWR possible.
purposes only, not for passengers, indicated on the label. Stow all loose items securely before 3
who should sit in seats and use seat start driving as they could move
belts. Vehicle Loading during the trip.
Light objects can be stored in the net
Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity pocket on the right side of the trunk
WARNING! compartment.
The load carrying capacity of your
• After loading the vehicle, before To fasten heavy and bulky luggage
vehicle is shown on the vehicle
driving, adjust the headlight beam inside the compartment a luggage net
emission control label positioned on
leveling using the specific regulator with hooks anchored to the floor is
the rear driver door's ledge.
(if available) as described in chapter available upon request. The hooking
“Lights” in this section. eyelets of the net are positioned on
• Improper weight distribution can the floor and on the rear wall of the
have an adverse effect on the way trunk compartment.
the vehicle steers, handles and the
way the brakes operate.
• Never drive with the trunk lid open.
Exhaust gases can enter the
passenger compartment.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
The information indicated on the label than the top of the seatback. This
concerns passengers and luggage could impair visibility or become
loading operations. dangerous in a sudden stop or
collision.

129
Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: • Tilt forward the short seatback side.
Both seat backs can be reclined • Secure the rear hook of the bag to
independently. the eyelet located on the rear wall of
the trunk compartment.
Folding the Short (40) Seatback Side • Wrap the belt around the seat back
The short (40) seatback side fold down of the folded seat and fasten the belt
easily by pulling tab between the buckle.
seatback and the side bolster. • Tighten the belt as much as necessary
3 to prevent the bag from moving.

NOTE:
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
provide you with information about
the available “Genuine Accessories”
for the trunk compartment.

Loading with Rear Seatbacks


Folded Down
The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the
rear seat provides cargo-carrying Folding the Long (60) Seatback Side
versatility. • Press the red button located on the
The seatback folded down provides a front of the buckle using the free
continuous nearly-flat extension of the latch plate (step 1) and unlatch the
load floor able to accommodate large plate from the left-side buckle (step
sized equipment and objects (such as 2).
the “Maserati Ski and Snowboard
Bag”) that may not fit within the
normal dimensions of the trunk.

Ski and Snowboard Bag Housing


To safely store the Ski and Snowboard
Bag:
130
Understanding the Vehicle
avoided that the fully reclined seat
back touches the edge of the central
console.

3
• Allow the belt to retract completely When the short or both seatbacks are
into the retractor seat behind the folded to the upright position, make
seatback. sure they are latched by strongly
• Unlatch the long (60) seatback side • Accommodate the head restraint in pulling on the top of the seatback
by pulling tab between the seatback a safe location. above the seat strap.
and the side bolster. NOTE:
When the seatback is folded to the
WARNING! upright position, reassemble the head
Do not leave free the head restraint of restraint of the center seat make sure
the center seat in the passenger the seatbelt of the rear central
compartment: in the event of an position is in the proper condition for
accident it could be dangerous for use.
passengers.

• Fully fold down the long seatback.


WARNING!
• Partially fold down the long • Make sure that the seatback is
seatback side and remove the head securely locked into position. If the
restraint of the center seat, by seatback is not securely locked into
pressing at the same time the push position, the seat will not provide
buttons located at the foot of the the proper stability for child seats
head restraint. In this way it is (Continued)
131
Understanding the Vehicle
(Continued)
and/or passengers. An improperly
Power Sunroof with
latched seat could cause serious Sunshade
injury.
The sunroof is power controlled and
• The cargo area in the rear of the can only be operated with the ignition
vehicle with the rear seatbacks in switch in RUN position.
the folded down position should not It can slide lengthways and be raised
be used as a play area by children at the rear (tilting).
when the vehicle is in motion. They By opening the sunroof a front flap
3 could be seriously injured in a rises automatically in order to deviate
collision. Children should be seated the air flow. The sunshade can be opened manually.
and use proper restraint system. However, the sunshade will open
automatically as the sunroof opens.
The sunshade cannot be closed if the
sunroof is open.

WARNING!
• Improper use of the sunroof can be
dangerous, even if it features a
finger-trap prevention system.
The power sunroof controls are Before and during the sunroof
located between the sun visors on the operation, always make sure that
overhead console. passengers are not exposed to the
The right two buttons controls the risk of injuries caused by the moving
sunroof movement, whereas the left sunroof or by personal objects
button controls the lifting of the dragged or hit by the moving
sunroof for venting. sunroof.
• Never leave children in a vehicle
with the key fob RKE transmitter in
the passenger compartment.

132
Understanding the Vehicle
• In a collision, there is a greater risk • Full or partial manual opening Pinch Protect Override
of being thrown from the vehicle if To open the sunroof manually press If any obstruction (ice, debris, etc.)
the sunroof is open. Always fasten the right rear button for less than prevents closing the sunroof, press the
your seat belt properly and make half second to move step by step right front button and hold for two
sure all passengers are properly the sunroof panel. seconds after the reversal occurs. This
secured too. allows the sunroof to move toward
• Do not allow small children to
Venting Sunroof the closed position.
operate the sunroof. Never insert Press and release the left button, and
NOTE:
fingers, other body parts, or any the sunroof will open to the vent
object through the roof opening. position. This is called “Express Vent”, Pinch protection is disabled while 3
and will occur regardless of sunroof pressing the right front button.
position. During this opening
CAUTION! operation, any movement of the Wind Buffeting
button will stop the sunroof. Wind buffeting can be described as
• In the event of rain, always close the
sunroof to prevent water Pinch Protect Feature the perception of pressure or a
infiltrations from staining the helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle
This feature will detect an obstruction may exhibit wind buffeting with the
fabric/leather upholstery. in the opening of the sunroof during windows down, or the sunroof in
• Do not open the sunroof if there is express close operation. If an certain open or partially open
ice on it: risk of damage. obstruction is detected, the sunroof positions. This is a normal occurrence
will automatically retract. If this and can be minimised. If the buffeting
Slide Opening Sunroof occurs, remove the obstruction then occurs with the rear windows open,
press the right front button and then open the front and rear windows
• Full automatic express opening
release to express close. together to minimise the buffeting. If
Press the right rear button for more
than half second and the sunroof NOTE: the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
will open automatically regardless open, then adjust the sunroof opening
If three consecutive attempts to close
of any previous position. The to minimise the buffeting.
in express mode the sunroof result in
sunroof will open fully and stop pinch protect reversals, the fourth Ignition Off Operation
automatically. During this attempt will be manual, with pinch
operation, if any sunroof button is The power sunroof controls will
protect feature disabled.
pressed, the sunroof will stop. remain active for up to approximately
ten minutes after the ignition switch is

133
Understanding the Vehicle
in OFF position. Opening either front HomeLink® (optional)
door will cancel this feature. The
ignition system timing can be set using HomeLink® replaces up to three WARNING!
the MTC+ System (see “MTC+ Settings” hand-held transmitters operating the • Your motorized door or gate will
in section “Dashboard Instruments and automatic devices that open garage open and close while you are
Controls”). doors and gates, enable/disable the programming the universal
lighting or security systems. The transceiver. Do not program the
Sunroof Maintenance HomeLink® unit is powered by your transceiver if people, pets or other
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a vehicle's 12 Volt battery. The objects are in the path of the door or
3 soft cloth to clean the glass panel. HomeLink® buttons that are located in gate. Only use this transceiver with a
the overhead console designate the garage door opener that has a “stop
three different HomeLink® channels. and reverse” feature as required by
The HomeLink® indicator light is Federal safety standards. This
located behind the buttons. includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not
run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury
NOTE:
or death.
HomeLink® is disabled when the
vehicle security alarm is active (see General Information
“Vehicle security alarm” in section
“Before Starting”). This device complies with FCC rules
Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210
(NZLSAHL5C). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:

134
Understanding the Vehicle
• This device may not cause harmful exhaust, do not idle the engine except • release the buttons.
interference. as necessary, service your vehicle in a
NOTE:
• This device must accept any well-ventilated area and wear gloves
• Erasing the standard codes should
interference that may be received or wash your hands frequently when
only be performed when
including interference that may servicing your vehicle. For more
programming HomeLink® for the
cause undesired operation. information go to:
first time. Do not perform this
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
NOTE: operation to program additional
vehicle
• The transmitter has been tested and buttons.
it complies with FCC and IC rules.
Before You Start Programming • If you have any problems, or require 3
Changes or modifications not assistance, please call toll-free
expressly approved by the party
HomeLink® 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
responsible for compliance could Be sure that your vehicle is parked at www.HomeLink.com for
void the user’s authority to operate outside of the garage before you information or assistance.
the device. begin programming.
• The term IC before the For more efficient programming and
certification/registration number accurate transmission of the
only signifies that Industry Canada radio-frequency signal it is
technical specifications were met. recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system.
WARNING! Before starting programming it is
California Proposition 65 necessary to erase the standard codes
Operating, servicing and maintaining memorized on the HomeLink® device
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle during the production phase. To erase
such codes:
System with Devices Provided
can expose you to chemicals including
such as, engine exhaust, carbon
with Rolling Codes
• place the ignition device in the RUN
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that position without starting the engine; Programming the Hand-held
which are know to the State of Transmitters
• press and hold the two outside
California to cause cancer and birth Programming garage door/gate
HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until
defects or other reproductive harm. To openers that were manufactured after
the indicator light starts flashing
minimize exposure, avoid breathing 1995.
(after approximately 20 seconds);
135
Understanding the Vehicle
These devices can be identified by the NOTE: • Return to the vehicle and press the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” setting button The distance necessary between the programmed HomeLink® button for
located where the hanging antenna is portable hand-held transmitter and two seconds and then release it.
attached to the garage door/gate the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends • Repeat this operation a second time.
opener. It is NOT the button that is on the system you wish to program. If the garage door opening device
normally used to open and close the Probably it will be necessary to try activates, the programming/
door. several times. Upon every attempt, synchronization phase is complete.
The name and color of the button may keep the setting position for at least
vary by manufacturer. NOTE:
15 seconds before trying again.
3 • Place the ignition device to the RUN If the garage door opening device
position without starting the engine. Synchronizing the Rolling Codes does not activate, press the button a
third time for two seconds and then
• Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to At the end of the previously-described
release it to complete the
3 inches (5 - 30 cm) away from the programming, if the HomeLink® has
programming/synchronization phase.
HomeLink® button you wish to been programmed for a rolling code
program. system, it will be necessary to
• To program the remaining two
• Simultaneously press the Homelink® synchronize it to ensure its correct
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
button you want to program and the operation.
for each remaining button. DO NOT
hand-held transmitter button. • Locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” erase the channels.
• Release immediately the Homelink® setting button of the opening motor.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
button you want to program. Firmly press it and then release it. On
Button
• Continue holding the hand-held some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks To reprogram a channel that has been
transmitter button until the indicator
when the garage door opener/device previously trained, follow these steps:
light starts flashing quickly; then
release the button. is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. • Place the ignition device to the RUN
The quick flashing light indicates that NOTE: position without starting the engine.
the channel with the new frequency • Press and hold the desired
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
has been acquired and programmed HomeLink® button.
next step after the setting button has
correctly by the HomeLink® system. • Without releasing the button
been pressed.
proceed with “Programming the
hand-held transmitters” from second
step and follow all remaining steps.

136
Understanding the Vehicle

System with Devices Without • Press and hold the programmed Security
Rolling Code HomeLink® button.
It is advisable to erase all channels
If the garage door opener/device
Programming the Hand-held before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
activates, programming is complete.
Transmitters To erase the channels press and hold
To program the remaining two
Programming garage door openers the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
manufactured before 1995. and III) until the indicator light starts
for each remaining button. Do not
flashing (after approximately 20
• Turn the ignition device to the RUN erase the channels.
seconds).
position without starting the engine. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 3
• Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to Button is disabled when the vehicle security
3 inches (5 to 30 cm) away from the alarm is active (see “Vehicle security
To reprogram a channel that has been
HomeLink® button you wish to alarm” in section “Before Starting”).
previously trained, follow these steps:
program.
• Simultaneously press and hold both • Place the ignition device to the RUN Troubleshooting Tips
buttons until the indicator light position without starting the engine.
If you are having trouble while
starts flashing quickly; then release • Press and hold the desired programming HomeLink®, here are
both buttons. HomeLink® button. some of the most common solutions:
The quick flashing light indicates that • Without releasing the button
• Replace the battery in the original
the channel with the new frequency proceed with “Programming the
hand-held transmitter.
has been acquired and programmed hand-held transmitters” from second
correctly by the HomeLink® system. step and follow all remaining steps. • Press the LEARN button on the
garage door opener to complete the
NOTE: Using HomeLink® training for a rolling code.
The distance necessary between the To operate, press and release the • Did you unplug the device for
portable hand-held transmitter and programmed HomeLink® button. programming and forgot to plug it
the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends Activation will now occur for the back in?
on the system you wish to program. programmed device (i.e., garage door If you have any problems, or require
Probably it will be necessary to try opener, gate operator, security system, assistance, please call toll-free
several times. Upon every attempt, entry door lock, home/office lighting, 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
keep the setting position for at least etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the www.HomeLink.com for information
15 seconds before trying again. device may also be used at any time. or assistance.

137
Understanding the Vehicle

Air Conditioning
Distribution

138
Understanding the Vehicle
Adjustable and fixed air vents allow • The fixed vents under the dashboard compartment. There are also
passengers to achieve the optimal and below the front seats aim to adjustable vents placed at the rear
comfort conditions. ventilate the lower part of the end of the central console. These
passenger compartment. vents can be adjusted in vertical and
Fixed Air Vents horizontal direction, by operating on
• The fixed vents, positioned on the the central handle 1, indicated in the
upper part of the dashboard, following pictures. The rotor 2,
beneath the windshield and above located near each vent, allows to
the front part of the front door control the air flow.
panels are meant to guarantee the 3
demisting and defrosting of the
windshield and the side windows.

Adjustable Air Vents


• The adjustable vents are located at
the center of the dashboard, to both
sides of the MTC+ display, and at the
side ends of the dashboard. They
have the purpose of ventilating the
upper part of the passenger

139
Understanding the Vehicle

3
NOTE:
In order not to obstruct the air
conditioning inlet, the defrosting or
the demisting function of the glass
surfaces, avoid covering vents with
clothing or other items.

140
4 – Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
MTC+ “Controls” Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
MTC+ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Dashboard Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Phone and Voice Controls on Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

141
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster ensure that the odometer is properly Warning and Indicator Lights
reset. on Analog Instruments
The instrument cluster is divided into Speedometer and Rev Counter display
three main areas displaying the main warning lights (see “Warning Telltales on Speedometer
information, signs and text and/or icon and Indicator Lights on Analog The following telltales are displayed
messages. Instruments” in this chapter). on the speedometer, and related
A Analog speedometer. It indicates The other warning and indicator lights messages are visible for 5 seconds on
the vehicle speed. are displayed on the TFT display the central sector of the display, unless
together with mode and drive otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display”
B Rev Counter.
function indicators (see “TFT Display: paragraph in this chapter).
C TFT display. In this area the Warning/Indicator Lights of Set
odometer display shows the Modes/Functions” in this chapter).
total distance covered by the
4 vehicle. NOTE:
The image shows the instrument
U.S. Federal Regulations requires that cluster before starting the engine.
upon transfer of vehicle ownership,
the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has
been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired
or serviced, the repair technician
should leave the odometer reading the
same as it was before the repair or
service. This repair should be
performed by an Authorized Maserati
Dealer.
The odometer setting should be
maintained following the repair or
service.
Keep a record of the odometer
mileage before any repair or service to

142
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The indicator light will flash at the
The Malfunction Indicator same frequency of the turn signals
CAUTION! and is controlled by the stalk switch
Light (MIL) is part of an
onboard diagnostic system • When the ignition switch is in the lever.
that monitors engine and RUN position and if the indicator If the vehicle electronics sense that the
automatic transmission control light does not switch on or if it vehicle drives for more than 1 mile
systems. switches on while driving, contact an (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
Under normal conditions, this Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon continuous sound will alert the driver
indicator light should switch on when as possible. to turn the signal off.
the ignition switch is in RUN position • Prolonged driving with the MIL on If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate,
and switch off soon after the engine is could cause damage to the engine check for a defective exterior light
started (the MIL does not shut off control system. It also could affect bulb.
immediately). fuel economy and drivability. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light 4
This is a sign of the indicator light MIL is flashing, severe catalytic This warning light is
working properly. If the indicator converter damage and power loss connected to the Tire Pressure
remains lit or switches on while will soon occur. Immediate service is Monitoring System (TPMS).
driving, there is a failure in the fuel required. In addition, the OBDII Under normal conditions, the
supply/ignition and emission control system incorporates a diagnostic warning light should illuminate when
systems. connector that can be interfaced the ignition switch is in RUN and
The failure could cause high exhaust using diagnostic equipment. This should go off once the engine is
emissions, loss of performance, poor makes it possible to read the error started.
vehicle handling and high codes stored in the control unit, If the warning light remains lit or
consumption levels. together with a set of specific illuminates while driving, the pressure
Should this occur, proceed with parameters for the engine operation of one or more tires is too low and a
caution to your Authorized Maserati diagnostic cycle, for compliance with message will be displayed.
Dealer without heavy throttle CARB & EPA OBDII regulations. The TPMS malfunction warning light is
application or driving at high speeds. connected to the low tire pressure
Obey all applicable local traffic Left Turn Signal Indicator Light monitoring light.
regulations. The indicator lights up when When the system detects a
The indicator light will go out if the the left turn signals or the malfunction, the monitoring light and
problem is no longer present. hazard flashers are turned on. the related message will flash for
The error will be registered by the
system in any case.
143
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
approximately one minute and then Dealer as soon as possible to restore and the road conditions that caused
remain lit. the Anti-Lock brake function. the ESC activation no longer persist.
This sequence will continue upon Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
subsequent vehicle startups as long as Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
the malfunction lasts. Indicator Light
The ESC activation/malfunction
When the malfunction warning lights This indicator notifies that the
indicator light on the
up, the system may not be able to Electronic Stability Control
instrument cluster will display
detect or signal low tire pressure (ESC) is disabled; the linked
when the ignition switch is in
correctly. message will be displayed.
RUN position.
Please refer to “Tire Pressure
It should switch off by starting the Telltales on Tachometer
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section
engine. Following telltales are displayed on
“Driving” for further information.
If the light stays on with the engine the tachometer and related messages
4 Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) Light running, there is a malfunction in the are visible for 5 seconds on the central
This light, and its related ESC system. sector of the display, unless otherwise
message, indicate possible If the light still stays on after several indicated (see “TFT Display” in this
malfunctions of the Anti-Lock ignition cycles, and the vehicle has chapter).
Brake System (ABS). been driven for several miles at more
The light will turn on when the than 30 mph (48 km/h) speed, visit an
ignition switch is in RUN position and Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS possible to have the problem
light remains lit or turns on while diagnosed and serviced.
driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the
NOTE:
brake system is not functioning and
requires service. However, the Each time the ignition switch is in RUN:
conventional brake system will • The ESC OFF indicator light and
continue to operate normally if the the ESC activation/malfunction
warning light is switched off. If indicator light illuminates
the ABS light turns on while driving, or temporarily. Start&Stop Active Indicator
if it does not switch on when the • When the ESC is functioning, the This telltale indicates that the
ignition switch is in RUN position, system will make buzzing or clicking engine has been switched off
please visit an Authorized Maserati sounds. This is normal. The sounds automatically by the
will stop once ESC becomes inactive Start&Stop system.

144
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
When the engine starts again, the system (ABS) reservoir may have the brake indicator light and the ABS
telltale will switch off. occurred. light illuminate.
If the telltale during an automatic In all the above situations, a related Immediate repair of the ABS system is
engine shutdown (AutoStop) phase message will be displayed. required.
starts flashing, it will be necessary to If the light still illuminates when the Functioning of the brake indicator
restart the engine normally with the parking brake has been disengaged, light can be checked by turning the
ignition device while holding down and the fluid level is at the full mark ignition switch from OFF to RUN
the brake pedal. on the master cylinder reservoir, there position.
See chapter “Normal Starting of the could be a brake hydraulic system The light should illuminate for
Engine” in section “Driving” for malfunction or a problem with the approximately 2 seconds.
further information. brake booster detected by the The light should switch off unless the
Rear Fog Light Indicator ABS/ESC system. If this occurs, the light parking brake is engaged or a brake
will remain lit until the problem has fault is detected. If the light does not
This indicator lights up when been solved. illuminate, have the light system
4
the rear fog lights are If the problem concerns the brake repaired by an Authorized Maserati
switched on. booster, the ABS master cylinder will Dealer.
High Beam Indicator run when engaging the brake and a The light will also switch on when the
This indicator lights up when brake pedal pulsation may be felt parking brake is engaged with the
the high beams are switched during each stop of the vehicle. ignition switch in RUN position.
on or when blinking. Inefficiency of one of the dual brake This light only indicates the brake is
system cycles is indicated by the brake engaged but not the clamping force
Brake Indicator Light indicator light, which will turn on of the parking brake to the wheels.
This light monitors various when the brake fluid level in the
brake functions, including master cylinder has dropped below a
brake fluid level, brake pads certain level. WARNING!
wear and parking brake The light will remain lit until the Driving a vehicle with the red brake
engagement. problem has been solved. light on can be very dangerous and is
If the brake light illuminates the If a brake failure occurs, visit an not recommended. Part of the brake
parking brake may be engaged, the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as system may have failed, resulting in
brake pads have reached wear limit, possible in order to check up the increased braking distances and the
the brake fluid level may be low or a brake system. risk of an accident. Have the vehicle
problem with the anti-lock brake In the event of an Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both

145
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
(Continued) After the bulb check or while driving,
checked as soon as possible at an if a seat belt is unbuckled, together
Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! with the acoustic signal the seat belt
If the warning light remains ON or if it reminder light will light up and a
Air Bag Indicator Light does not illuminate or illuminates message will indicate which belt is not
This light will illuminate for a while driving, contact your Authorized fastened.
few seconds for a bulb check Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
when the ignition switch is in
RUN. If the light does not Right Turn Signal Indicator
WARNING!
illuminate while starting the engine, This indicator lights up when Maserati urges you to use the seat
stays lit, or switches on while driving, the right turn signals or the belts correctly fastened and adjusted
have the system checked at an hazard flashers are switched at all times. Correct use of the seat
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as on.
4 possible. The indicator will flash at the same
belts can help reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of an
In the latter case, the message will frequency of the turn signals and is accident. Do not pass seat belts over
remain displayed: to hide it, press the controlled by the turn signal lever. sharp edges: they could tear. Do not
button ◄ on the steering wheel right If the vehicle electronics sense that the pin anything to the seat belts. This
side. vehicle drives for more than 1 mile could reduce their initial strength and
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a cause them to tear in the event of a
continuous sound will advise the driver crash.
to turn the signal off.
If the indicator flashes at a fast rate, Refer to “Occupants Restraint
check for a defective outside indicator Systems” in section “Before Starting”
light bulb. for further information.
Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is in
RUN, the seat belt reminder
light will light up for a few
See “Supplemental Restraint System seconds as a bulb check.
(SRS) – Air bags” in section “Before During the bulb check, you will hear
Starting” for further information. an acoustic signal if one or both front
seat belts are unbuckled.

146
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

TFT Display: Menus and 3 Main menu titles with scroll 15 Low beam headlights/position
Settings arrows (the number and the lights.
When operating, the TFT Display is main menu title is always visible 16 Speed Warning indicator
divided into sectors including menus while scrolling the menu, and for (dynamic text).
and sub-menus, running data, the next five seconds).
17 NORMAL, SPORT and I.C.E.
warning/indicator lights and messages. 4 Submenu Titles. modes indicator light.
The different sectors of the display
5 Position within the submenus 18* Combined telltale of ACC, LKA
layout are rendered in the following
and scroll arrows (example: 1 of and HAS status. They are
picture.
5). There can be maximum 9 displayed in the cluster when
displayable submenu positions. one (or more) of these systems is
When the number of submenu enabled and a different menu
points exceeds 9, the points are from “Drive Assist” is displayed 4
replaced by a numerical value in the main area.
within the scroll arrows.
19* CC and ACC status function.
6 Menu Instruction (hideable).
20* Traffic Sign Assist icons:
7 Shift lever positions (P, R, N, D, conditioned and unconditioned
M, 1, 2, 3...) and driving modes. speed limit and/or
8 Gear shift indicator light and supplementary signs (time
paddles (if equipped). restriction, etc..). See "Traffic
1 Main area. 9 Hard/Soft suspension indicator Sign Assist - TSA" in section
2 Selectable information (data, light. "Driving" for further details.
time, outside temperature, 10 Complete Odometer. 21 Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
compass, etc.). When setting the failure warning light.
“Automatic High Beam Assist” 11 Fuel Gauge.
(*) See “TFT Display: Warning/
feature, in the right portion of 12 Engine Temperature Gauge.
Indicator Lights of Set Modes/
this area is displayed the 13* Reconfigurable quadrant for red Functions” in this chapter.
respective green indicator. telltales.
14* Reconfigurable quadrant for The display background may change
amber telltales. according to the type of message
displayed.

147
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The screen area in sector 1 (Main Area) sector 20, only the main menu number
will be updated and the selected title and the scroll arrows remain displayed
will be shown in sector 3 (Main Menu in sector 3, left side.
Title).
Press and release the multifunction
switch (►) to enter the information
screens or a submenu. Keep the switch
(►) depressed for 2 seconds to restore
the selected/visualized functions.
The selected sub-menu title selected
• Blue color: normal conditions. will be displayed in sector 4 (Submenu
Title).
• Yellow color: low-critical warning.
4 • Red color: high-critical warning.
Main and Submenu Within a submenu, press and release
the switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow
Operate the controls on the right side directions to scroll the menu.
of the steering wheel to scroll, modify Press the ◄ button to return to the
and program the Main and Submenu. main menu from an item of interest or
from an information screen.

When the driver selects a main menu


page and the Traffic Sign Assist (TSA)
feature on "Controls" page of MTC+ is
set off (see "MTC+ "Controls" Screen"
in this section), main menu title, its
number and the scroll arrows will
disappear after two seconds.
Press and release the multifunction
When driver selects a main menu, if
switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow
the TSA feature is set on and a sign
directions to scroll upwards and
and/or a speed limit icon is displayed in
downwards the main menu titles.

148
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Main Menu & Submenu Content • Trip B: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed Messages on Main Display Area
Overview time, Distance The main display area also displays
1. MAIN MENU 7. START&STOP "pop up" messages. These pop up
• View speed in mph or km/h • Messages relating to the Start&Stop messages fall into several categories:
2. VEHICLE INFO function • Five-Second Stored Messages
• Tire Pressure 8. AUDIO When the appropriate conditions
• Transmission Temperature • Information concerning audio status occur, this type of message appears
• Oil Temperature according to current media source, on the main display area for five
track and station. seconds and then returns to the
• Oil Pressure
9. STORED MESSAGES previous screen. Most of the
• Battery Voltage messages of this type are then
• Maintenance 10. VEHICLE SETTINGS
stored (as long as the condition that
3. DRIVE MODE
• Speed Warning: enables, disables or
activated them remains active) and 4
sets the speed limit represented in
• Drive Mode - Torque Distribution (on can be reviewed from the "Stored
the dynamic icon on the TFT display
AWD version only) - Powertrain Messages" main menu item.
• Auto apply Off/On of the Electric Example of this message type is the
status - ESC status - Suspension
Parking Brake one shown in the picture.
stiffness status
• Screen Setup
4. Driver Assist (if equipped)
– Upper Left
• Shows the status of any active driver
– Upper Right
assist systems: CC, ACC, LKA and
– Main Menu: Line 1
HAS. Graphics in the main area of
– Main Menu: Line 2
TFT display only refer to ACC, LKA
– Main Menu: Line 3
and HAS systems
– MPH km/h Display On/Off
• LKA (LaneSense) status – Main Menu Navigation
5. FUEL ECONOMY – Outline Coloring
• Average, Range, Current gage – Key-On Display
6. TRIP – Key-Off Display
• Unstored Messages
• Trip A: Average, Avg. speed, Elapsed – Defaults
This message type is displayed until
time, Distance the condition that activated the

149
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
message is cleared (see example in this type of message appears on the the ones referred to the distance yet
picture). main display area for five seconds to be traveled will remain on.
then returns to the previous screen.
NOTE:
• Five-Second-displayed Navigation
• Popup boxes might take up the space
Messages
normally used to display main menu
When the navigation menu is items and relevant submenus.
enabled on the MTC+, information
• The distance indicated under the
pop-ups will be displayed for 5
road name is expressed in the unit of
seconds while changing direction or
measure set by the user.
approaching a turning point.
On highway, the first pop up will be 1. MAIN MENU
displayed at 2 miles (3.2 km) from
4 the turn, on roadway, at 1 mile Press and release the multifunction
• Unstored Messages with Ignition
(1.6 km). switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions
Switch in RUN
While approaching the turn, further until this menu item is displayed.
This message type is displayed until Pressing and releasing the switch (►)
the ignition switch is in RUN pop ups will be displayed starting at
437 yd (400 m) from the turning will toggle the unit of measure
position. An example of this between mph or km/h.
message type is the one shown in point and the countdown to 0 miles.
picture.

While getting closer to a turn, the Further to speed, the main area can
sections referred to the distance indicate three lines that can be set to
• Five-Second Unstored Messages the same options and in the top right
already traveled will switch off while
When appropriate conditions occur, or top left area. When these three

150
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
lines are present and turn-by-turn
navigation is on, main menu area will
automatically show navigation
information. For further details, please
refer to MTC+ guide.
2. VEHICLE INFO
Press and release the switch in the ▲
or ▼ arrow directions until this menu
item is displayed.
Press and release the switch (►) to
access the submenus. • Transmission Temperature NOTE:
Press and release the switch in the ▲ Displays the current transmission This strategy is also applicable in the
or ▼ arrow directions to scroll temperature level. Transmission Temperature and Oil 4
through the following information • Oil Temperature Pressure information screen.
displays pressing and releasing the Displays the current engine oil
switch (►) to display the selected temperature level. • Oil Pressure
information. Displays the current engine oil
• Tire Pressure pressure level.
Indicates the pressure of each single • Battery Voltage
tire (see example below). Please Displays the current battery voltage.
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring • Maintenance (service)
System (TPMS)” in section “Driving” Displays mileage and days
for further information. remaining to the execution of
scheduled maintenance service.

The gauge fill and telltale (if


applicable) are highlighted in red to
emphasize that the parameter is at
a critical level.

151
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
For any color-coded components, color NOTE:
depends on settings of: To set drive parameters according to
• ESC: identified by wheel color. own needs and path, refer to chapter
• PowerTrain: identified by engine + “Drive Mode” in section “Driving”.
transmission unit color. Press and release the ◄ button to
• Suspension : identified by the return to the main menu.
color of the four shock absorbers.
4. Driver Assist (if equipped)
Press and release the switch in the ▲
or ▼ arrow directions until this menu
Press and release the ◄ button to item is displayed.
return to the main menu.
• Active Driver Assist System
4 3. DRIVE MODE The screen graphically shows current
Press and release the switch in the ▲ status of driver assist systems: the
or ▼ arrow directions until this menu figure shows an example with ACC
item is displayed. The screen engaged and HAS set.
graphically shows the Drive Mode
(Normal, Sport, and I.C.E.) set by the
For every drive mode, function (ESC,
user through the relevant controls.
PowerTrain and Suspension) and color
The display main area will show
of the components shown are matched
vehicle image with parameters and
as follows:
color-coded components affected by
the selected drive mode.
The image will show the following
parameters:
• selected drive mode (in the example
shown: I.C.E.); • LKA (LaneSense) Status
• torque distribution percentage Vehicle is delivered with LKA in off
indicated under the arrow in front of state set on MTC+ system, page
the wheels (on AWD version only). "Controls".
You can enable LKA in the ”Visual”

152
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
only or “Visual & Haptic” mode by • Current Fuel Economy in mpg (US), continue from the last fuel average
turning on the function via MTC+ mpg (UK) or l/100km reading before the reset.
system soft-key and by changing Shows the instantaneous fuel
your selection in the dedicated economy. During AutoStop stage
submenu. The setting chosen will performed by the Start&Stop system
latch over key cycles. (see “Normal Starting of the
Engine” in section “Driving”), a
dash will be displayed instead of the
value.
• Range in miles or km
Shows the range since the last fuel
average reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the Press and release the ◄ button to 4
display will read “Reset” or show return to the main menu.
dashes for two seconds. 6. TRIP
Then, the history information will Press and release the switch in the ▲
NOTE: be erased, and the averaging will or ▼ arrow directions until this menu
To set these systems, see chapters continue from the last fuel average item is displayed.
“Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC”, reading before the reset.
"Highway Assist - HAS" and “Lane • Fuel Economy Average in mpg (US),
Keeping Assist - LKA” in section mpg (UK) or l/100km
“Driving”. Shows the average fuel economy
Press and release the ◄ button to since the last reset.
return to the main menu. Press the multifunction switch (►)
5. FUEL ECONOMY for 1 second and release it to reset
the “Fuel Economy Average”.
Press and release the switch in the ▲
When the fuel economy is reset, the
or ▼ arrow directions until this menu
display will read “Reset” or show
item is displayed.
dashes for two seconds. For each of the “Trip A” and “Trip B”
The screen will display the following:
Then, the history information will sub-menus the screen will display the
be erased, and the averaging will following:

153
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• “Distance” traveled in miles or km. function, please see paragraph lines of 15 alphanumeric characters.
Shows the total covered distance “Automatic Start&Stop System” in Displays Audio Statuses are:
since the last reset. “Normal Starting of the Engine” of • AM: Station Number, provided with
• “Average” consumption in mpg (US), section “Driving”. one line of info (frequency);
mpg (UK) or l/100km. • FM: Frequency, provided with 2 info
Shows the average fuel lines;
consumption since the last reset. • SXM (SiriusXM Satellite radio):
• “Average” speed in MPH or km/h. number and station name, artist,
Shows the average speed since the song;
last reset. • BTSA Bluetooth: folder, album, artist,
• “Elapsed Time” song;
Shows the total time of travel since • USB (Audio): USB, album, artist,
4
the last reset in “hours:minutes: current track or, if available, previous
seconds.” Elapsed Time will track, current track and next track;
8. AUDIO
increment when the ignition switch • USB: folder, previous track, current
is in the RUN or START position. Press and release the switch in the ▲ track and next track;
Press the multifunction switch (►) for or ▼ arrow directions until this menu
• SD Card (Audio): album, artist,
1 second and release to reset “Trip A” item is displayed.
previous track, current track and next
or “Trip B”. track;
“Trip B” is reset after each key on/key • SD Card: folder, previous track,
off cycle. current track and next track;
Press and release the ◄ button to
• AUX: name of source, “Device
return to the main menu.
Connected” text;
7. START & STOP • No Signal: “No Signal Available”
Press and release the switch in the ▲ text;
or ▼ arrow directions until this menu • Mute: symbol “Mute”, the lines
item is displayed. remain those displayed before the
With the ignition device in RUN command “Mute”.
position, the screen will display the The display will show the audio status
The different reception modes are
status of the function (see example in (source and current audio track) as set
identified by symbols, shown on the
picture). To change the status of the on the MTC+. It is possible to display 5

154
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
display above the info lines. The chart
indicates their meaning.

BTSA

AM App

FM
Press and release the switch in the ▲
Audio mute
or ▼ arrow directions to scroll the
Press and release the ◄ button to stored messages. 4
AUX return to the main menu. When the number of messages
exceeds 9, the submenu points will be
9. STORED MESSAGES replaced by a numerical value
Press and release the central switch in indicating the message number. Press
SD the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until this and release the switch (►) to view the
menu item is displayed. selected message (see example in the
The system will either display the picture).
number of the stored messages (if any
SXM Satellite Radio available) or “No Stored Messages” as
shown in picture.

USB

• Many signals
• Signal not available
Press and release the ◄ button to
return to the main menu.

155
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
10. VEHICLE SETTINGS Press and release the switch (►) to Press and release the switch (►) to
With ignition switch in RUN position select “Speed Warning”. select the option. A check mark will
and vehicle stopped, press and release remain next to the previously-selected
the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow item until a new selection is made.
directions until this menu item is
displayed.
Press and release the switch (►) to
access the submenus.
Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼
arrow directions to view the selectable
items:
• Speed Warning
4 • Electric Parking Brake Press and release the switch (►) once
• Screen Setup again to view the related options:
“Off” is the default status. A setting saved notification appears as
NOTE: a popup for 2 seconds and a white
In order to modify the status of electric telltale indicating the set speed limit
parking brake, please see chapter will appear on display.
“Parking Brake” in section “Driving”.
Example: How to modify the “Speed
Warning” status
NOTE:
When the vehicle is in motion (above
5 mph – 8 km/h) this function is
available and displayed in the list of Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼
“Vehicle Settings” menu. arrow directions to view the selectable
Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ options.
arrow directions to view the selectable Speed values are in loop, keeping the Then the display will show the last
items. switch pressed in the ▲ or ▼ arrow modified item.
directions will increase scroll speed.

156
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
When the set speed is exceeded, the main screen shows possible options in • Time
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal grey (not activable). • Time/Date (default: Upper Left)
and the telltale indicating the speed Operate this function with the vehicle • Range to Empty
limit becomes amber. stopped and transmission in P (Park)
• Average MPG (or l/100km or km/l)
A pop-up message indicating that the position.
limit has been exceeded will appear In order to enter a function, press the • Current MPG (or l/100km or km/l)
on display. switch (►) as shown in the picture. • Trip A Distance
The following directory shows the • Trip B Distance
items available in the "Screen Setup"
submenu:
Upper Left
• None
• Compass 4
• Outside Temperature (default: Upper
Right)
• Date
• Time
The pop-up message and the telltale
will be displayed for 5 seconds then • Time/Date (default: Upper Left)
Main Menu: Line 1
system will return to the previous • Range to Empty (only displays in Main Menu)
screen. • Average MPG (or l/100km or km/l) • None (default status)
SCREEN SETUP • Current MPG (or l/100km or km/l) • Compass
After having entered the “Vehicle • Trip A Distance • Outside Temperature
Settings” menu, press and release the • Trip B Distance • Date
switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions Upper Right • Time
until this menu item is displayed. (example in picture) • Time/Date
Press and release the switch (►) to • None • Range to Empty
access the available items for this • Compass
submenu. • Average MPG (or l/100km or km/l)
• Outside Temperature (default: Upper • Current MPG (or l/100km or km/l)
If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
Right)
this feature is unavailable and the • Trip A Distance
• Date

157
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Trip B Distance Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ Press and release the ◄ button to
• Audio arrow directions to view the selectable return to the “Screen Setup” submenu.
items (in the example “Time” is “Screen Setup” submenu parameters
Main Menu: Line 2
selected). A check mark will remain set by the user as the ones to be
(only displays in Main Menu)
next to the previously-selected item displayed are also indicated in the top
• Same configurable options as Line 1
until a new selection is made. part of the MTC+ (see example in the
Main Menu: Line 3 figures).
(only displays in Main Menu)
• Same configurable options as Line 1
MPH km/h Display
(instruction line)
• On
4 • Off
Main Menu Navigation
• On
• Off
Outline Coloring Press and release the switch (►) to
• On select an item. The notification of
setting saved appears as a popup for 2
• Off
seconds, then the display will show the
Key-On Display last-modified item.
• On
• Off
Key-Off Display
• On: Trip Summary
• Off: screen with Maserati logo and
trident
Defaults As for the instruction line “MPH km/h
• Restore Display”, you can either select to
• Cancel display it in sector 6 or not (“Off”
option). In the latter case, the function

158
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
of changing units remains in any case “Key-On Display” and “Key-Off The “Defaults” item of “Screen Setup”
active. Display” items allow user to set display submenu allows restoring Maserati
If the “Main Navigation Menu” is set during vehicle key-on and off. factory settings.
to “On”, navigation information will “Key-On Display” is normally set to
be displayed in the main area of the “On”. When entering the vehicle, TFT Display: Warning/Indicator
display only if a destination has been after the welcome screen, the display Lights of Set Modes/Functions
set on the navigator of the MTC+. If will show the information concerning Display sections indicated in the figure
function is set to "Off", the navigation engine starting sequence. While if it is show warning/indicator lights
information will not be displayed. set to “Off” (example shown in concerning all selected driving
If the “Outline Coloring” is set to figure), the display will show the functions and all set functions/systems.
“On”, the TFT side edge of engine information displayed before last The relevant messages will be
temperature and fuel gauge indicators vehicle key-off. indicated within the main area for five
will change color depending on the seconds, unless otherwise specified. 4
selected Drive Mode: Fault messages will be stored under
“Stored messages”.
• Sport: green (example shown in
picture); Charging System Warning Light
• I.C.E.: light blue. This warning light shows the
If it is set to "Off", the color/Drive status of the electrical
Mode combination is not active and charging system. If the light
the edges will remain "Normal" Drive stays on or comes on while
Mode color. driving, turn off some of the vehicle's
non-essential electrical devices or
When engine is started and ignition increase engine speed (if at idle). If
device is pressed to stop it, it is the charging system warning light
possible to set “Key-Off Display” to remains on, it means that the vehicle
obtain the following display settings: is experiencing a problem with the
• On: Trip Summary screen (Trip B is charging system. IMMEDIATELY
reset after each key-on/key-off contact an Authorized Maserati
cycle); Dealer to have the vehicle serviced.
• Off: screen with Maserati logo and If jump starting is required, refer to
trident. “Jump Start Procedures” in section “In
an Emergency”.

159
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Transmission Temperature Warning switches off. If the problem persists, Engine Temperature Warning Light
Light contact an Authorized Maserati This warning light notifies
This warning light and the Dealer. when the engine is
related message indicate that overheated. If the
the transmission fluid temperature reaches critical
CAUTION!
temperature is rising. levels and the gauge displayed in
If this warning light turns on, safely Continuous driving with the
sector 12 turns red, this warning light
pull over and stop the vehicle. transmission temperature warning
under the engine temperature gauge
Then, shift the transmission into P light illuminated will eventually cause
indicator will illuminate in red color
(Park) and run the engine at idle until severe transmission damage or failure.
combined with the related message on
the temperature drops and the light display. When the temperature is
reaching the set threshold an acoustic
4 signal will be heard.
If the warning light switches on while
driving, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into N
(Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature does not return to
normal, immediately turn the engine
off and contact an Authorized
Maserati Dealer.
Check “Engine Overheating” in section
“In an Emergency” for more
information.
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
Under normal conditions, the
warning light illuminates
when the ignition device is
turned to RUN and goes off as
soon as the engine is started.

160
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
If the warning light stays or turns on The engine oil level must be checked
while driving, the engine oil pressure with the dipstick fitted under the
is too low. The warning light is hood (see “Maintenance Procedures” WARNING!
combined with a displayed message in section “Maintenance and Care”). • If the warning light is accompanied
and an acoustic signal that will last 4 by the message “Catalyst Temp
Electric Power Steering Failure
minutes. In this case, turn the engine Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the
Warning Light
off immediately and carry out the temperature of the catalytic
This warning light, and the converters is too high. The driver
necessary checks.
related message, illuminate must slow down immediately until
Do not operate the vehicle until the
when the electric power the warning light turns off.
problem has been corrected. This light
steering is not operating and
does not indicate the oil level. The • If the message “Catalyst Temp Hot
needs service.
engine oil level must be checked with Stop Safely Wait To Cool” appears
If the warning light is on, steering
the dipstick located under the hood after decelerating: the temperature
(see “Maintenance Procedures” in
assistance may be not available. 4
in the catalytic converters has
section “Maintenance and Care”). reached a dangerous level and the
If the problem persists, contact an catalytic converters could be
Authorized Maserati Dealer. WARNING! damaged. Drive slowly to the
After battery disconnection event, the nearest Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Engine Oil Temperature Warning Light
warning light may be on. In this case,
This light indicates that the • Maserati declines all responsibility
start the engine and perform a
engine oil is overheated. The for whatever damage deriving from
steering wheel stroke end to end.
warning light is combined non-compliance with the above
with the related displayed If the problem persists, contact an mentioned warnings.
message. In this case, drive carefully Authorized Maserati Dealer.
until the temperature drops back to Door Ajar Indicator
Catalyst Over Temperature Warning
normal level and the light warning Light This indicator illuminates
light turns off. when one or more doors are
This warning light, and the
If the problem persists, contact an ajar. The indicator will show
related message, light up if
Authorized Maserati Dealer. which door is ajar. When one
the engine runs irregularly
or more doors are open, a related
Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light with consequent high
message will be displayed if the
This warning light and the temperature in the exhaust system.
vehicle is running at a speed of 5 mph
related displayed message, (8 km/h) or faster.
indicate a low engine oil level.
161
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Trunk Lid and Hood Ajar Indicators or engine stall and your vehicle may Please contact an Authorized Maserati
These light indicators will require towing. Dealer to check the system.
illuminate to indicate that the Low Fuel Indicator Automatic High Beam Failure Warning
trunk lid and/or the hood are Light
When the fuel level reaches
ajar. approximately 4.2 Gallons (16 This warning light and the
When the trunk lid or the litres) this light under the fuel related message illuminate to
hood is open, a related gauge indicator will turn on, report a failure of the
message will be displayed and remain on until fuel is added automatic high beam
besides the light if the vehicle is together with the related message. In headlights.
running at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) this condition the color indicating the Contact an Authorized Maserati
or faster. quantity of fuel in the tank, inside the Dealer as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator on display, will go from Suspensions Failure Warning Light
4 Indicator white to amber.
This warning light and the
This indicator light indicates a Refer to “Refueling” in section
related message turn on while
failure of the Electronic “Driving” for fuel filling.
driving if there is a failure of
Throttle Control (ETC) system. Windshield Washer Low Fluid the suspension system (only
If the indicator turns on while Indicator with optional Skyhook active
driving (a torque decrease is possible), This indicator will illuminate suspension).
have the system checked by an for 5 seconds to indicate a low Please contact an Authorized Maserati
Authorized Maserati Dealer. level of the windshield washer Dealer to check the system.
When detecting a failure, the light fluid. A related message will
indicator will illuminate while the Ice Hazard Indicator
be displayed.
engine is running. When the external
See “Maintenance Procedures” in
If the indicator remains lit with the temperature falls below 38°F
section “Maintenance and Care” for
engine running, you can still drive your (3°C), the temperature value
fluid filling.
vehicle. However, contact an blinks for a few seconds, the
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as Headlight Aiming System Failure indicator light turns on, a message is
possible. Warning Light displayed and an acoustic signal is
If the indicator is flashing while the This warning light and the triggered to warn the driver of the risk
engine is running, immediate service is related message indicate a of icy roadbed.
required. You may experience reduced failure of the automatic Under such conditions, we recommend
performance, an elevated/rough idle headlight aiming system. using the I.C.E. drive mode (see

162
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
“Automatic Transmission” in section “Automatic Start&Stop System” in ADAS Status Indicators (if equipped)
“Driving”) drive carefully and slow chapter “Normal Starting of the When you are not viewing the
down as the grip of the tires may be Engine” of section “Driving” for “Drive Assist” page, the
significantly reduced. further information. indicators at the top left-hand
The indicator light flashes for 5 Start&Stop Failure Warning Light side of the display indicate
seconds and switches off when the status of individual ADAS system or
temperature reaches 43°F (6°C) or This warning light illuminates
the combination of them (see
higher. when there is a failure in the
examples).
Start&Stop system. Switch the
Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning For further details, refer to
engine on or off using the
Light “Adaptive Cruise Control -
normal procedure with the ignition
This warning light and related ACC”, “Lane Keeping Assist -
device START/STOP and have the
message illuminate when LKA” and “Highway Assist - HAS” in
vehicle checked at an Authorized
there is an EPB system failure. section “Driving”. 4
Maserati Dealer.
The failure could also Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Scheduled Maintenance (Service)
completely or partially block the (If equipped)
Indicator
vehicle because the parking brake This warning light informs the
could remain on even after it has been This indicator illuminates and
driver that Forward Collision
automatically or manually disengaged a message flashes on the
Warning (FCW) is disabled. If
though its controls. display for approximately 5
this light occurs together with
If it is still possible to use the vehicle seconds after an acoustic
other specific messages, take your
(parking brake not engaged) drive to signal to indicate that the next
vehicle to an Authorized Maserati
the nearest Authorized Maserati scheduled maintenance is due or is
Dealer for service. This warning light
Dealer and remember to performing already overdue.
will light even when the activation of
each operation/command that the Unless reset, the message will
another driver assistance feature or
electric parking brake is not continue to display each time you
drive mode (such as “ -ESC OFF”)
functioning. cycle the ignition to the RUN position.
disables the FCW.
To turn off the message temporarily,
Start&Stop Disable Indicator press and release the ◄ button on the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
This indicator illuminates steering wheel. To reset the service Fault (If equipped)
when Start&Stop is turned off indicator system, please visit an This warning light informs
through the controls located Authorized Maserati Dealer. that FCW is in fault state. If
on the right side of the this occurred together with
steering wheel. See paragraph other specific messages, could
163
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
mean that a system fault requiring details, refer to “Drive Mode” in Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Fault
servicing at an Authorized Maserati section “Driving”. This warning light on indicates
Dealer. It is nevertheless possible to Set Drive Mode Indicator that the LKA system is in fault.
drive the vehicle without using this If the warning light and the
function (for further details, refer to Drive mode set by the driver
relevant message do not go
“Forward Collision Warning - FCW” in through the controls on
off after a few manoeuvres and
section “Driving”). central console is displayed
eventually a key cycle, contact an
above the transmission lever
AWD Failure Warning Light (on AWD Authorized Maserati Dealer.
indicator.
version only) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
For further details, refer to
This warning light turns on to “Drive Mode” in section or Canceled
indicate a fault of the AWD “Driving”. This white warning light
system. Contact an Authorized indicates that the ACC is ready
4 Maserati Dealer as soon as Cruise Control (CC) Ready or Canceled to be set (with 3 dashes below)
possible, and avoid using the vehicle in and, once it sets, when it is
heavy duty conditions. This white light indicator will
illuminate when the CC is temporarily canceled (set speed in
Set Passive Speed Limit ready to be set (with 3 dashes white below). For further details, refer
This indicator light indicates below) and, once it sets, when to “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in
the passive speed limit set via it is temporarily canceled (set speed in section “Driving”.
the controls on the RH side of white below). Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
the steering wheel (for further For further information, check This green warning light with
details, refer to “TFT Display: Menus “Electronic Cruise Control” in section below the set speed turns on
and Settings” in this chapter). “Driving”. when the ACC is set (for
Passive Speed Limit Exceeded Cruise Control (CC) Set further details, refer to
This indicator light informs the This green light indicator will “Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC” in
driver that the speed limit that illuminate with the set speed section “Driving”) and vehicle will
was set has been exceeded. when the CC is set and in keep set speed.
driver override. For further Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault (if
Stiff Suspension Setting Indicator
information, check “Electronic Cruise equipped)
This indicator light indicates Control” in section “Driving”. This warning light turns on
that the stiff suspensions
when ACC is not operating or
program (S) is on. For further
needs servicing, For further

164
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
details, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Gear Shift Indicator Light Infotainment System
Control - ACC” in section “Driving”. This indicator lights up to
indicate gear shift change in The vehicle is equipped with the
Blind Spot Assist (BSA) Failure
Warning Light order to optimize fuel infotainment Maserati Touch Control
consumption. Plus (MTC+) System, an advanced user
This warning light and related interface which combines innovative
message light on to report a See “Drive Mode” in section
“Driving” for further and exclusive technical features
failure of the BSA system. integrating entertainment, user
As consequence, on vehicles information.
settings, air conditioning, navigation,
equipped with ABSA also this latter Service AWD System Message (AWD communication and information
will be not working or version only) features within a single system.
malfunctioning. The message and the warning light on The MTC+ System features an audio
Contact an Authorized Maserati the TFT display will illuminate when system which is acoustically optimized
Dealer as soon as possible avoiding to all-wheel drive feature requires for this specific vehicle. 4
use this system. service. For further information refer
Headlight On Indicator to “All-Wheel Drive” in section
This indicator will illuminate “Driving”. WARNING!
when the position lights or The navigation system assists the
headlights are turned on. driver while driving, providing advice
For further details, see and suggestions, by voice guidance
“Lights” in section “Understanding and graphic information, for the best
the Vehicle”. route to reach the set destination. The
Automatic High Beam On Indicator suggestions provided by the
navigation system do not relieve the
This indicator turns on when
driver from full responsibility for the
the “Automatic High Beam”
manoeuvres made through traffic
feature is set on MTC+ (see
while driving, or from compliance
“MTC+ Settings” in this
with road regulations and other
section).
provisions regarding road traffic. The
person driving the vehicle is always
and in any case responsible for safe
driving on the road.

165
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The vehicle is provided with a specific After connecting the device, by using
add to the owner’s manual, describing the MTC+ display softkeys, knobs on
the MTC+ System features and listing the central console and controls at the
all warnings and precautions, which steering wheel, user can navigate
are essential for a safe use of the through the content of the connected
system. Maserati advises you to read device and set its playing mode.
this add carefully and thoroughly. Multimedia Navigation Controls on
The MTC+ display is positioned in the Central Console
central part of the dashboard and the
The manual controls located on the
manual controls and devices for
central console are a further interface
connecting external sources are
for the driver and nearby passenger,
positioned on the central console.
that adds to the MTC+ display
4 1 MTC+ touch display. softkeys. Using the manual controls,
2 Ports for SD card, AUX and USB the MTC+ display will work as a
(for further details, refer to graphic display of the inputs from the
“Interior features” in section controls.
“Understanding the Vehicle”). Volume Control
3 “Browse” button . By working this knob in “Radio” or
“Media” mode, user can adjust the
4 “Back” button . volume of the radio or audio files,
5 “Enter” button. Manual Controls and Devices from minimum to maximum and vice
versa. Turn knob clockwise to increase
6 Volume control. SD, AUX and USB Ports
the volume, counter-clockwise to
7 Tune/scroll control. When an SD card is inserted into its decrease it. The volume status will be
8 Slide phone drawer. housing, the MTC+ is able to read it indicated in the top part of the MTC+
and select multimedia files (music and display.
9 Door for access to multimedia images) from the device.
ports and phone housing. By using the AUX and USB ports it is
possible to connect external devices to
the MTC+ (see chapter “Interior
features” in section “Understanding
the Vehicle”).

166
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
selected, or the favorites when the
“Nav (Navigation)” menu is selected.
Back button
Press this button to go back to
previous menu or previous screen.
Press this button to shift the
navigation one level backwards on
MTC+ screen. If it is pressed and held
for at least 2 seconds, it brings the
cursor back in the lower bar of the
Tune/Scroll Control main menus. Main menu bar is set up by Maserati:
By working this knob in “Radio” or it can be customized according to
Enter Button personal requirements, as explained in
“Media” mode, user can go through 4
the radio stations or scroll the tracks To confirm the function or setting “Customizing the Main Menu Bar” in
inside connected external devices and highlighted on MTC+ display. this chapter.
confirm the selection by pressing enter When in “Radio” mode and the For further information refer to the
button. ignition switch in RUN position, you dedicated booklet included in the
In any other mode of the MTC+, use can save your preset stations. owner documentation.
this knob to scroll the list of available Main Menu Bar on MTC+ 1. “Radio” softkey
options or to manage the cursor
Display Touch this softkey to enter the
movement in the lower bar of the
Radio mode. The different tuner
main menus. Then press enter button The softkeys located on the lower part
modes: FM, AM, SXM and “Aha”
to confirm the function or setting of the MTC+ display represent the
App (for countries where it is
highlighted on MTC+ display. main menu modes/functions, which
supported) can be selected by
are briefly indicated below.
Browse button touching the related softkeys in the
After selecting a function, using the Radio mode.
tune/scroll knob or softkeys on MTC+ 2. “Media” softkey (if connected)
display, press this button to see the Touch this softkey to access media
detail of the items/options of the sources such as: USB Device, AUX,
selected function. This button is also Bluetooth and SD card as long as
used as shortcut to display the phone the requested media is present.
book, when the “Phone” menu is

167
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
3. “Controls” softkey Touch one of these soft-key to access Switch off the screen backlight by
Touch this soft-key to access the the list of functions that users can set. touching “Screen OFF” softkey in the
features of some driver assistance Touchscreen Display Warnings “Controls” screen of MTC+ display.
system (ADAS) that can be set up (if
equipped). Features can be selected
and adjusted or turned on/off by CAUTION!
touching the related soft-key (see • Do NOT attach any object to the
"MTC+ "Controls" Screen" in this touchscreen, doing so can result in
section). damage to the touchscreen.
4. softkey • Do not press the screen with any
Touch this softkey to access hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick,
Applications / settings screen. jewelry, etc.) which could scratch the
4 touchscreen surface.
5. “Climate” softkey
• Do not spray any liquid or caustic Without ADAS
Touch this soft-key to access the air chemicals directly on the screen. Use
conditioning settings. In this screen a clean and dry micro fiber lens
the following controls are also cleaning cloth in order to clean the
available: Heated Seats, Heated touchscreen.
Steering Wheel and Ventilated
• If necessary, use a lint-free cloth
Seats. See “Air Conditioning
dampened with a cleaning solution,
Controls” in this section for further
such as isopropyl alcohol, or an
details.
isopropyl alcohol and water solution
6. “Nav” softkey ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
Touch this softkey to access the solvent manufacturer’s precautions
Navigation feature. Refer to the and directions.
MTC+ instruction manual for further With ADAS
details. Switch OFF Touchscreen Backlight Customizing the Main Menu
7. “Phone” softkey If the screen backlight becomes Bar
Touch one of these softkey to access annoying when driving, it is possible to The softkeys for the main functions of
the MTC+ Phone feature that can be switch it off. the MTC+ system, indicated at the
set or monitored via MTC+. bottom of the MTC+ display, can be

168
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
easily customized to suit user's be downloaded on your mobile possibility to make phone calls or send
requirements, as follows: device. and receive messages without taking
• press button to open your hands off the steering wheel.
applications/settings screen; You can also request Google to make
any type of research. Android Auto
• hold depressed and drag the icon
will give an easier access to
corresponding to the selected
applications and content from the
function until it overlaps the one to
MTC+ system display.
be replaced on the bottom bar.
The following tables show the
“Screen” and “Audio” source (of
projection device or of MTC+
System MTC+ ) when a smartphone is
connected, a session is established and
These applications use the MTC+ the device (Table A) or the MTC+
4
display as projector of the functions System (Table B) is performing an
available on the connected device. action.
“Apple CarPlay” allows the best use of
your iPhone® in the car and perfect
integration with the MTC + display
and with the controls of the car,
Once it is set in the menu bar, the new
including Siri voice control. You can
connection will be immediately
make phone calls, access music, send
operational.
and receive messages, get real-time
Use the MTC+ Display as directions on traffic conditions, all
Projection Device while staying focused on the road.
The “Android Auto” app lets you
If your smartphone is properly share information while driving and
connected to the vehicle via the USB make it easier to access Google. The
port, on the MTC+ screen in place of interface is equipped with Google
“Phone” soft-key and in the source list Maps with voice guided navigation,
of “Media” screen you can find the traffic information in real time,
“Apple CarPlay” (example shown in on-demand access to millions of songs
picture) or the “Android Auto” app in Google Play Music. It also offers the
soft-key. “Android Auto” app needs to
169
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Table A: device is performing an action

MTC+ System MTC+ : Active Mode


Action
Radio Media Navigation Phone Voice Rec.

No App active Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen:


Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+

Screen:
Screen: Screen: Screen:
Start Media Player Audio: +
Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Screen: Audio: MTC+

MTC+
Audio: MTC+

Screen: Screen: Screen:


4 Start Navigation
Popup to ask
Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ which Nav to use Audio: MTC+

+ Audio priority + Audio priority + Audio priority

Screen:
Start Phone Call
Audio: MTC+

Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: Screen: MTC+

Start VR
Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio: MTC+

170
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Table B: MTC+ is performing an action

Device : Active Mode


Action MTC+

No App active Media Navigation Phone Voice Rec.


Screen: MTC+

Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+


Main Audio: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+

Start Radio
Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+
+ mix Audio: Audio:
prompt nav

Screen: Screen: Screen: MTC+


MTC+ MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+

Start Media Player Main Audio: MTC+


Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio:
+ Audio priority
4
Screen: MTC+

Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+

Screen: MTC+ Main Popup to ask


Start Navigation
which Nav to use Audio: Audio:
Audio: MTC+ Audio:
+ Audio priority + Audio priority
+ Audio priority

Screen:
Start Phone Call
Audio:

Screen: Screen:
Screen: MTC+ Cannot start VR Screen:
Start VR Audio: MTC+ Audio: MTC+ during Call
Audio: MTC+ Audio:
+ Audio priority + Audio priority

Start Rear Parking Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+ Screen: MTC+

Camera
Audio: MTC+ Audio: Audio: Audio: Audio:

171
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Audio Controls By pressing the top of the rocker or turn the tune/scroll bottom knob to
switch you can increase the volume tune station.
The vehicle is equipped with audio and by pressing the bottom of the
controls that allow both driver and rocker switch you can lower it. Press
front passenger to operate the audio the center button to mute the volume.
system. These controls can be used to The left-hand control functions
adjust audio volume, change radio depend on the current source. To
station or mode (FM, AM, USB, etc). change source, press the center
button.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls When in “Radio” mode, pressing the
These audio controls are rocker-type top of the switch will “Seek” up for
switches with a button in the center the previous listenable station and
and are located on the rear side of the pressing the bottom of the switch will
4 steering wheel, right behind the front “Seek” down for the previous For further details, refer to
switches. listenable station. “Infotainment System” in this section.
When an external source is connected When in App/Settings mode, the
to MTC+, a light press on the top of tune/scroll bottom knob and the
the switch will play the next track on browse and enter buttons allow
the device connected. you to scroll through the menus and
Press the bottom of the switch once to change the user’s settings (see “MTC+
go to the beginning of the current Settings” in section “Dashboard
track, or to the beginning of the Instruments and Controls”).
previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down
twice, it plays the second track; three
Press any button to display times, it will play the third one, etc.
information on the radio station or
track being listened to inside a pop-up Audio Controls on Central
for 2 seconds on instrument cluster. Console
The right-hand control manages the
In “Radio” mode, turn the volume
volume.
upper knob to set the audio volume,

172
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Audio System • One 3.5 in (90 mm) diameter


Midrange diameter, on the top of
The vehicle is equipped with an audio the dashboard.
system that offers superior sound • Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter
quality, higher sound pressure levels Tweeters, two on the upper edges of
and reduced energy consumption. the dashboard and one on each rear
The system maximises the amplifier door.
and speaker technology delivering
• One 12.4 x 7.9 in (315 x 200 mm)
substantially higher components and
Subwoofer on the rear panel below
system efficiency.
the rear window.
Basic System • 8- channel amplifier in the trunk.
The basic sound system features 8
speakers and can develop a sound 4
output of 80 W.
The basic system includes:
• Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter
Woofers, one on each door.
• Four 1 in (25 mm) diameter
Tweeters, two on the upper edges of
the dashboard and one on each rear
Basic System
door.
Premium System
The vehicle can be equipped with a
“Premium” sound system which
features 10 speakers and can develop
a sound output of 900 W.
This system includes:
• Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter
Woofers, one on each door.

173
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
front door and two on the rear
parcel shelf.
• Five 1 in (25 mm) Tweeters: one on
center dashboard, two on the upper
edges of the dashboard and one on
each rear door.
• 12.4 x 7.9 in (315 x 200 mm)
Racetrack Sub Dual VC on the rear
parcel shelf.
• 16 channel 1280 Watts Class-D
amplifier in the trunk.

Premium System High Premium System


High Premium System .
The vehicle can be equipped with a
“High Premium” audio system
including 15 speakers and 1280 W of
sound power, available upon request.
The “High Premium” system includes:
• Four 6.5 in (165 mm) Woofers: one
on each door.
• Five 4 in (100 mm) Midranges: one
on center dashboard, one on each
174
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

MTC+ “Controls” Screen NOTE:


• For further details refer also to the
Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the “Maserati Touch Control Plus
lower part of the MTC+ display to turn (MTC+)” guide.
on/off some on-board devices and turn
• All settings must be edited with
on/off and adjust some driver assist
ignition device set to RUN position.
systems (ADAS).
Once you enter the “Controls” screen, • Some of the Customer
use the touch soft-keys or turn the programmable features are optional
tune/scroll knob to scroll and change or for a specific model/version and
feature settings and press the enter may not be available on your
With ADAS
upper button to confirm the selection. vehicle.
Some features can be set only on or
Some of these devices or systems are
optional or for a specific
off touching the corresponding
Features Common to All 4
soft-key. The blue colour of the
model/version and may not be
soft-key outline will confirm the state Configurations
available on your vehicle. • Glove Box
change.
The “Controls” screen is specific to the
Other features can have one or more This feature allows you to enter a
vehicles that are not equipped with
instruction/setting pages that are 4-digit PIN code to lock and unlock
driver assistance systems (Without
accessed by touching the the glove box in the passenger side
ADAS Systems) and for those that
corresponding soft-key (example: of the dashboard.
have them (With ADAS Systems).
"Glove Box"). See "Dashboard Compartments" in
The ADAS features have two soft-keys: this section for further details.
the first soft-key changes the current
• Rear Sunshade
setting on or off, the second soft-key
on the side shows the current setting. This feature allows you to open and
By touching the second soft-key, you close the sunshade on the rear
will enter the setting page in which all window.
feature options are visible and See "Rear Window" in section
adjustable. "Before Starting" for further
details.
• Start & Stop Off
Without ADAS This feature allows you to disable

175
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
the Start & Stop when frequent activated in “Lights” mode, the
stops and restarts of the engine may system will only show a warning
become annoying. light in the outside mirrors.
See "Normal Starting of the Engine" When “Lights + Chime” mode is
in section "Driving" for further activated, the system will show a
details. warning light in the outside mirrors
• Auto High Beam Assist as well as give an audible alert when
By selecting this feature, when the the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
forward digital camera detect a selected, the system is deactivated.
vehicle that precedes in the For description of this system, see
direction of travel or in the opposite Without ADAS chapter “Blind Spot Assist - BSA” in
direction, adjust the high beam in • Settings section “Driving”.
4 an automatic way not to dazzle. Touch this soft-key you enter the Features specific for Vehicles
See "Lights" in section “Settings” page that displays all user with ADAS
"Understanding the Vehicle" for - customizable features: see “MTC+
Settings” in this section. • Lane Keeping Assist
further details.
Activating this feature the LKA
• Screen OFF Features Specific for Vehicle system will attempt to keep the
This feature allows you to switch off without ADAS vehicle in lane and can apply direct
the MTC+ screen backlight if it input to electric power steering
becomes annoying when driving. • Blind Spot Assist
system to change direction of
See "Infotainment System" in this Activating this feature the BSA and
vehicle.
section for further details. RCP systems assist the driver when
changing lanes, overtaking and The current system setting is shown
• Outlet in blue on the right side of the LKA
when parking, by detecting the
Activating this feature an electrical arrival of other vehicles from a side soft-key.
power converter allows you to use or rear blind spot. When this Touching this soft-key the set page
the 115V AC-150W power outlet happens, a light signal appears in of LKA system will be displayed (see
that may be present on some the external rear-view mirror. picture).
versions, inside the compartment
When Blind Spot Assist (BSA) is
between the backrests of the rear
selected, the feature can be set to
seats.
“Off”, “Lights” or “Lights + Chime”
(default mode). When this feature is

176
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
soft-key the set page of ABSA driver and may perform braking
system will be displayed (see maneuvers.
picture). The current system setting is shown
in blue on the right side of the FCW
soft-key.
Touching this soft-key the set page
of FCW system will be displayed (see
picture).

Driver warnings can be only


"Visual" or "Visual & Haptic"
(default mode). 4
System response can be set to Driver warnings can be only
"Early", "Medium" (default mode) "Visual", "Visual & Acoustic"
and "Late". (default mode) or "Visual & Haptic".
System reaction force can be set to System response can be set to
"Low", "Medium" (default mode) "Early", "Medium" (default mode)
and "High". and "Late". FCW is always active: it is possible to
See "Lane Keeping Assist - LKA" in System reaction force can be set to set the sensitivity and the aid of the
section "Driving" for more details. "Low", "Medium" (default mode) active braking.
• Active Blind Spot Assist and "High". FCW sensitivity can be set to
Activating this feature the system See "Active Blind Spot Assist - “Near”, to “Medium” or to “Far”.
will try to prevent collision between ABSA" in section "Driving" for more The default status of FCW is the
host vehicle and potential blind details. “Medium” setting. Setting it to
spot collision hazard. System applies • Forward Collision Warning (with “Far” means the system will warn
direct input to electric power active braking) you of a possible collision with the
steering system to change direction The FCW feature primarily uses the vehicle in front of you when you are
of vehicle to avoid collision. front radar and forward looking farther away. This gives you the best
The current system setting is shown camera for sensing vehicles ahead, reaction time, though could lead to
in blue on the right side of the and will provide warnings to the some more unwanted warnings.
ABSA soft-key. Touching this “Medium” gives instead a little less

177
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
time for reacting compared to (12 km/h), at which point it will MTC+ Settings
“Far”, but at the same time should immediately cancel and return to
lead to less not desired warning. the last-viewed screen. Customer Programmable
To change the setting for more The feature can be set to “On” or Features
dynamic driving, select the “Near” “Off”. See “Surround View Camera
The MTC+ System uses a combination
setting. This warns you of a possible System (optional)” in section
of keys able to access and change the
collision when you are much closer “Understanding the Vehicle” for
customer programmable features
to the vehicle in front of you. further details.
present in the “Settings” and
FCW with active braking can be set • Traffic Sign Assist “Controls” page (see also “MTC+
to "On" or "Off". By activating this feature, the “Controls” Screen” in this section).
• Surround View Camera forward-facing digital camera, with Access programmable features
By activating this feature the system the aid of maps on the navigation touching “Settings” soft-key in the
4 uses four cameras to monitor the system, is able to detect certain signs “Controls” screen page, or using
area around the vehicle when and speed limits. Those are manual controls on central console
transmission lever is shifted to P displayed by the TSA system on the (refer to “Infotainment System” in this
(Park), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) instrument cluster display together section).
position. with a possible alert when the Turn the tune/scroll knob to scroll
When activation occurs by pressing vehicle exceeds the speed limit. through menus and change settings on
the “Surround View” button in the MTC+ display, touch the enter upper
“Controls” screen or moving the button to confirm the selection.
shift lever in R (Reverse) position,
the initial view will be the default
view (associated with current gear
state). Image will be displayed with
active guidelines while in that gear
as long as vehicle speed remains
lower than 8 mph (12 km/h).
When vehicle is shifted into a
different gear, the image will See "Traffic Sign Assist - TSA" in
remain displayed for 10 seconds, or section "Driving" for further details.
vehicle is shifted in P (Park), or until Without ADAS
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

178
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
To make a selection, and enter the
desired function, touch the
corresponding softkey on the menu
(the picture shown is “Engine Off
Options”).

With ADAS In this mode the MTC+ System allows


NOTE: you to access the following
• For further details refer also to the programmable features (some of them 4
“Maserati Touch Control Plus are optional or for a specific
(MTC+)” guide. model/version and may not be
available on your vehicle): Display, To scroll through the functions, move
• All settings must be edited with
Units, Voice Commands, Clock, Safety the cursor up or down, or touch the
ignition device set to RUN position.
& Driving Assistant, Lights, Doors & arrow ▼ or ▲. Once the desired mode
Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote is entered, press and release the
To display the programmable features
Start, Engine Off Options, Audio, touchscreen area of the setting that
menu on MTC+, you can also touch
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, you wish to modify. The new setting
soft-key to view all available
Restore Settings and Clear Personal will be highlighted with one or more
applications and then select
Data. boxes to indicate status or possible
“Settings”.
NOTE: variants of the function status. A
• Only one touchscreen area/softkey check mark in a box indicates the
may be selected at a time. current status of the function. Touch
• Menu navigation indications refer to the check mark to cancel, or the
the use of softkeys on MTC+ display: empty box to insert the check mark,
the same operations can be and change the status of the function.
performed using the manual
controls on central console.

179
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Display (if equipped). The available


languages are specific to the target
After pressing the “Display” soft-key
markets.
the following mode settings will be
available. • Touchscreen Beep
• Display Mode When in this display, you can turn
on or shut off the sound activated
When in this display you can select
by pressure of a touchscreen
one of the auto display settings. To
soft-key.
change mode status, checkmarked
"Night", “Day” or “Auto” cell. • Controls Screen Time-Out
Once the procedure is completed (for • Display Brightness with Headlights When this mode is selected, the
example, Display mode) touch the On (Night) “Controls” screen will remain
displayed for 5 seconds. If this mode
4 back arrow softkey to return to the When in this display, you can select
previous menu or touch the upper is not selected, the screen will
the brightness with the headlights
right “X” softkey, to close the settings remain displayed until closed
on. Adjust the brightness from level
screen. Touching the ▲ or ▼ softkeys manually.
0 to 10 with the “+” and “–” setting
and the cursor on the right side of the soft-keys or by selecting any point
screen will allow you to scroll up or on the scale between the “+” and
down through the available settings. “–” soft-keys.
• Display Brightness with Headlights
Off (Day)
When in this display, you can select
the brightness with the headlights
off. Adjust the brightness as
previously explained for "Night"
setting.
• Nav Next Turn Pop-ups in Cluster
• Set Language
By selecting this feature, the next
When in this display, you can select turn direction will appear on the
one language for all display instrument cluster along a
descriptions, including the trip programmed route until the desired
functions and the navigation system destination is reached (see picture).

180
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
selectable units of measure are listed response length, touch the “Brief”
below: or “Detailed” softkey.
• Distance unit: • Show Command List
select from: “mi” or “km”. When this feature is selected, it is
• Speed unit: possible to select options during a
select from: “mph” or “km/h”. voice control session. Options for
available controls are: “Always”,
• Consumption unit:
“w/Help” or “Never”.
select from: “mpg” (US), “mpg”
(UK), “l/100km” or “km/l”. Clock
• AutoShow Smartphone Display • Capacity unit: Time is always visible on the
Upon Connection select from: “gal” (US), “gal” (UK) dashboard analog clock (see “Analog
This feature allows to use the MTC+ or “l”. Clock” in this section) and in digital 4
display as a projection device • Pressure unit: format on the instrument cluster and
connected via USB port in order to on the MTC+ display.
select from: “psi”, “kPa” or “bar”.
browse the Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto apps. By setting this • Temperature unit:
feature, automatic switch from select from: “°F” or “°C”.
native screen to projection device • Power unit:
will happen every time you connect select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK) or
your smartphone. For further details “kW”.
refer to the “Maserati Touch
• Torque unit:
Control Plus (MTC+)” guide.
select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm”.
Units
Voice Commands
After pressing the “Units” and then
“Custom” softkey on the touchscreen After pressing “Voice” softkey the
you may select between “Imperial” following modes will be available.
units and “Metric” of measure. Each • Voice Response Length
unit of measure can be independently When in this display, you can
displayed in the TFT Display and in the change the voice response length
navigation system. The following settings. To change the voice

181
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
you can set the hours manually from
1 to 24. To select, touch the “+” or
“–” soft-keys to adjust the hours.
• Set Time Minutes
With “Sync Time with GPS” feature
unchecked and this mode selected,
you can set the minutes manually
from 0 to 59. To select, touch the
“+” or “–” soft-keys as done for the
hours.
With this feature it is possible to view
• Time Format
Safety & Driving Assistant
and set the following modes.
When in this mode, you can select Touch this soft-key to set the following
4 • Sync Time with GPS modes.
the time format display. To change
Time is normally automatically the current setting, touch and • ParkSense (Park Assist)
synchronised with the radio signal. It release the “12 Hrs” or “24 Hrs” The park assist system will scan for
is also possible to set automatic soft-key. objects behind and in front of the
synchronisation mode using GPS
• Show Time In Status Bar vehicle when the transmission shift
signal instead.
This feature will allow you to turn lever is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle
on or shut off the digital clock in the speed is less than 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
status bar. The system can be enabled with
“Sound” only, “Sound+Display”, or
• Set Date in Cluster
turned “Off”. See “Park Assist
When in this mode, you can set the (optional)” in section “Before
date manually in the status bar of Starting” for further information.
the MTC+ and on the instrument
cluster display. Touch the “+” or “-” • Front Sensors Active in Drive
soft-keys to adjust “Day”, “Month” If this feature is active, when driver
and “Year”. takes shift lever from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) to D (Drive), front parking
• Set Time Hours sensors are activated. If this feature
With “Sync Time with GPS” feature is not active, when driver takes shift
unchecked and this mode selected, lever from P (park) or N (Neutral) to

182
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
D (Driver), front parking sensors are • Auto Folding Side Mirrors will automatically activate the
NOT activated. By selecting this feature the power windshield wipers if it senses
• Front ParkSense Volume external mirrors will automatically moisture on the windshield. The
fold alfter a lock door request, feature can be set to “On” or “Off”.
When this feature is selected, the
chime volume of front park assist performed by key fob RKE • Hill Start Assist
sensors can be set to “Low”, transmitter or by the “Passive This feature allows you to disable
“Medium” or “High” level. Entry” system. the HSA system. The feature can be
“Medium” is the default setting. Power external mirrors will set to “On” or “Off”. See “Brake
The system will retain its last known automatically unfold once the and Stability Control System” in
configuration state through ignition ignition device is in ACC or RUN section “Driving” for further details.
cycles. position, only if the last fold
movement has been automatic. Lights
• Rear ParkSense Volume
If the mirrors were manually folded Press the “Lights” soft-key to set the 4
When this feature is selected, the
by the switch on the driver's door following modes.
chime volume of rear park assist
panel, before a lock action, they will
sensors can be set to “Low”, • Headlight Off Delay
need to be manually unfold to
“Medium” or “High” level. By selecting this feature, the driver
reactivate the automatic behave.
“Medium” is the default setting. can choose to have the headlight
The system will retain its last known • ParkView Backup Camera Delay off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds
configuration state through ignition By selecting this feature, when the when the engine is shut off. To
cycles. shift lever is moved out of R change the current headlight off
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Reverse), the rear view image with delay status, touch and release the
dynamic grid lines will be displayed “0”, “30”, “60” or “90” soft-key to
By selecting this feature the outside
for up to 10 seconds after shifting select the desired time range.
side-view mirrors will tilt downward
unless the forward vehicle speed
when the ignition is in RUN position
exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), or the
and the transmission shift lever is in
transmission is shifted into P (Park)
R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will
or the ignition device is switched to
move back to their previous
the OFF position. The feature can be
position when the transmission is
set to “On” or “Off”.
shifted out of R (Reverse). The
feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
By selecting this feature, the system

183
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
“Understanding the Vehicle” for
further information.
• Headlight Dip - Traffic Changeover (if
equipped)
By selecting this feature, the
headlights will change their light
distribution when a left-hand-drive
vehicle enter a Country with
right-hand-drive system and vice
versa. The feature can be set to
• Headlight Illumination on Approach “On” or “Off”. • Auto Unlock on Exit
By selecting this feature, the driver • Daytime Running Lights (DRL) By selecting this feature, all doors
4 can choose to have the headlight off will unlock when the vehicle is
By selecting and check-mark this
or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds when stopped, the transmission is in P
feature, the DRL lights will turn on
the doors are unlocked with the key (Park) or N (Neutral) position and
whenever the engine running. The
fob RKE transmitter. the driver's door is open. The
feature can be set to “On” or “Off”.
• Headlights with Wipers feature can be set to “On” or “Off”.
• Adaptive Front Light (if equipped)
By selecting this feature, while the • Flash Lights with Lock
By selecting this feature, the system
headlight lever is in “AUTO” By selecting this feature, the
turn off the beam shaping and
position, the headlight will turn on headlights will flash when the doors
bending. See “Lights” in section
approximately 10 seconds after the are locked or unlocked with the key
“Understanding the Vehicle” for
wipers are activated. The headlight fob RKE transmitter or when using
further details.
will also turn off when the wipers the Passive Entry feature.
deactivate if they were activated in Doors & Locks • Sound Horn with Lock
the current mode. The feature can
Press the “Doors & Locks” soft-key to When this feature is selected, the
be set to “On” or “Off”.
set the following modes. horn will sound when the doors are
• Auto High Beams Assist locked with the key fob RKE
• Auto Door Locks
By selecting this feature, the high transmitter. You can choose from
beam headlight will deactivate When this feature is selected, all the following options: “Off” (no
automatically under certain doors will automatically lock when sound), “1st Press” (sound on the
conditions. See “Lights” in section the vehicle is in motion. The feature first press of the button) and
can be set to “On” or “Off”.
184
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
“2nd Press” (sound on the second • with “Passive Entry”, touching the • Power Trunk Lid Alert
press of the button). handle more than once will only When this feature is selected,
• Sound Horn with Remote Start result in the driver’s door opening. further to turn indicators flashing,
When this feature is selected, the If driver door first is selected, once an acoustic warning will also be
horn will sound when you use the the driver door is opened, the triggered when opening and closing
key fob RKE transmitter to start the interior door lock/unlock switch can the trunk lid. The feature can be set
engine. The feature can be set to be used to unlock all doors (or use to “On” or “Off”.
“On” or “Off”. See “Remote Start key fob RKE transmitter). • Hands Free Power Trunk Lid
System” in section “Before Starting” • Passive Entry To prevent the accidental opening
for further details. This feature allows you to lock and of the Power Trunk Lid/Hands Free
• Remote Unlock Sequence unlock the vehicle door(s) without (optional) with the movement of
By selecting this feature you may set having to push the key fob RKE the foot, it is possible to disable the
transmitter or buttons. By “Hands Free” function. The feature 4
up only the driver's door or all
doors mode will unlock on the first selecting this feature, “Passive can be set to “On” or “Off”. This
press of the key fob RKE transmitter Entry” may be set to “On” or “Off”. operation is recommended when
button. When “Driver Door” is The default status is “On”. With you have to wash the car (for
selected, you must press the key fob “Passive Entry” deactivated, also the further information, refer to
RKE transmitter button twice to “Pre-Short Drop” function is “Power Trunk Lid Operation” in
unlock also the passenger's doors. disabled (for further information, section “Before Starting”).
When unlocking “All Doors” by first refer to “Bodywork Maintenance
and Care” in section “Maintenance Auto-On Comfort & Remote
press selection mode, all doors will Start
unlock on the first press of the key and Care”).
fob RKE transmitter button. • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob • Auto-on Driver Comfort System
If the vehicle is programmed on “1st This selected mode enables to This feature allows to activate the
Press of Key Fob Unlocks”: combine the key fob to personal comfort of the driving seat when
driver’s position settings. These starting the engine.
• all doors will unlock no matter
which “Passive Entry” equipped settings will be implemented when If equipped, the driver’s
door handle is grasped; pressing the button on the key heated/vented seat and/or heated
• only the driver’s door will unlock fob RKE transmitter with ignition steering wheel will automatically
when the driver’s door is grasped; device in RUN position. activate by temperatures below
40°F (4°C). When temperatures are

185
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
above 80°F (26°C) the driver vented cancelled (0 seconds) or reduced to
seat will turn on. 60 or 30 seconds.

Audio
This feature enables to view and set
the available audio modes depending
on the type of audio system supplied
on the car.
The following modes refer to the
“High Premium” audio system.
• Engine Off Power Delay (Power • Balance/Fade
duration after engine shutdown) Use this screen to adjust the balance
4 • Remote Start By selecting this feature, the power and fade settings. Touch and drag
You can choose from the following window switches, radio, MTC+ the speaker icon, use the arrows to
options: “Off”, “Remote Start” Phone System, power sunroof (if adjust, or tap the “C” icon to
(activation of this function when equipped), and power outlets will readjust to the centre.
you use the key fob RKE transmitter remain active for up to 10 minutes
to start the engine) and “All Starts” after turning off the engine.
(activation of this function when Opening of one front doors will
you start the engine in all modes). cancel this feature.
The switch-off delay can be
Engine Off Options cancelled (0 seconds) you can choose
This feature allows you to set some from 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10
functions after turning off the engine. minutes.

• Easy Exit Seat • Headlight Off Delay


When this feature is selected, the By selecting this feature the
driver's seat will automatically move headlight will stay lit for up to 90 • Equalizer
rearward once the engine is shut off seconds after turning off the Use this screen is used to adjust the
for easy exit of the vehicle. The engine. “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings.
feature can be set to “On” or “Off”. The switch-off delay can be Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting soft-keys or scroll and

186
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
touch the slider in any point on the surround sound mode. Available
scale between the “+” and “–” settings: “On” and “Off”.
soft-keys.

Phone/Bluetooth
Press this soft-key to select and
• Clari-Fi connect phones and audio sources. 4
• Speed Adjusted Volume This function improves the audio • Do Not Disturb
This feature increases or decreases quality by enhancing digitally
Settings available for this feature:
volume combined to vehicle speed. compressed source files such as MP3
To change the speed adjusted and AAC files and certain music • Auto Reply
volume touch the “Off”, “1”, “2” or tracks played by radio stations. In To change the mode status, touch
“3” soft-key. case of high-definition source files the “Text”, “Call” or “Both”
like the ones on a CD, Clari-Fi shall soft-key.
apply no enhancement. Clari-Fi • Auto Reply Message
intervention is completely To change the mode status, touch
automatic. The feature can be set the “Custom” or “Default”
“On” or “Off”. soft-key.
• Customize Auto Reply Message
• Auto Play
This feature allows you to
When a portable device is customise the “Auto Reply
connected via USB port to MTC+ Message”. Text messages are
system, it plays automatically the limited to 160 characters (key pad
songs if this feature is set to "On". is not available while vehicle is it
• Surround Sound motion).
This feature provides simulated

187
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
On the Maserati website, at
www.maserati.com, or through an
Authorized Maserati Dealer you may
consult the list of telephones that are
compatible with the MTC+, and their
level of compatibility.

SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup”
• Paired Phones • Paired Audio Sources
soft-key the following settings will be
By selecting this feature you will be By selecting this feature you will be available.
4 notified which phones are combined notified which audio source are
to the Phone/Bluetooth system. combined to the Phone/Bluetooth • Tune Start
For each option, you can also add system. “Tune Start” begins playing the
one or more devices: for further For each option, you can also add a current song from the beginning
information, see the MTC+ guide. device and change the PIN code of when you tune to a music channel,
the device you wish to connect. For so you can enjoy the complete song.
further information, see the MTC+ “Tune Start” works in the
guide. background, so you will not even
realize it’s on, except that you will
• Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
miss the experience of joining your
When this mode is selected a pop-up favorite song with only a few
message will appear in case of seconds left to play.
incoming call. Information
• Channel Skip
associated to call in progress are
available by entering to the “Audio” SiriusXM can be programmed to
menu using the buttons on the designate a group of channels that
steering wheel RH side. are the most desirable to listen to or
to exclude undesirable channels
while scanning. To make your
selection, touch the Channel Skip
soft-key, select the channels you

188
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
would like to skip followed by Restore Settings Dashboard Compartment
pressing the arrow ◄ soft-key.
When this feature is selected, it will There are two glove box
• Subscription Information reset the “Display”, “Clock”, “Audio”, compartments on the dashboard sides
SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires a and “Radio Settings” to their default to store small items or documents.
user-paid subscription to access settings. In the compartment below the climate
these stations. Run this feature and a pop-up will control panel, on the slider drawer
It will be necessary to access the appear asking user to confirm default support can be housed the phone,
information on the Subscription settings resetting. Select “Yes” to cards or small items. In this
Information Screen in order to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the compartment there are also the
subscribe. settings are restored, a pop-up multimedia ports (see “Interior
Touch the Subscription Info soft key appears confirming that settings have Features” in section “Understanding
to access your receiver ID number. been reset to default. the Vehicle” for further information).
Write down the SiriusXM ID 4
Clear Personal Data
numbers for your radio. To activate
SiriusXM service, either call the When this feature is selected, it will
WARNING!
number listed on the screen or visit remove personal data concerning
settings and/or options that have been Do not operate the vehicle with a
SiriusXM online at
modified compared to factory settings glove compartment lid in the open
www.siriusxm.com/subscriptions or
and will also remove from system position. Cellular phones, music
call the number listed.
memory Bluetooth devices and players, and other handheld electronic
presets. devices should be stowed while
To remove personal information, driving. Use of these devices while
select this feature and a pop-up will driving could cause an accident due to
appear asking confirmation to delete distraction.
all personal data. Select “OK” to clear,
or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data
have been cleared, a pop up appears CAUTION!
confirming that personal data have Do not place objects weighing over
been cleared. 22 lb (10 kg) in the glove box
compartment.

189
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Glove Box Driver Side Glove Box Passenger Side compartment is closed) moreover, the
compartment is also air-conditioned
To open the glove box on the driver To open the glove box on the
like the rest of the interior.
side, pull the handle as indicated. passenger side, pull the handle as
The air outlet inside the compartment
shown in the picture.
is located on the lower right side: it
can be opened/closed by turning
counterclockwise/clockwise a ring nut
placed in correspondence.

4
The compartment is ca. 10-12 in (25-30
cm) deep and is lit by two courtesy The compartment is divided into two
lights when open (the light parts: in the lower part you can find
automatically switches off when the the Owner’s documentation, while in
compartment is closed). the upper part you can fit small items.
Lock Feature of Passenger Side
Glove Box
The glove box in the passenger side is
equipped with an opening/closing
electric actuator that can be locked
and unlocked via a feature of the
MTC+, by entering a 4-digit PIN code.
It is important to memorize and take
note of the PIN. If it is lost, you must
contact an Authorized Maserati Dealer
that will reset this feature.
The compartment is illuminated by a
courtesy light when open (the light
will automatically switch off when the

190
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
NOTE:
“Glove Box” lock feature must be
activated when the glove box is
already closed. If you activated the
“Glove Box” lock feature when the
glove box is opened, the glove box
will not close properly and will not
lock

Glove Box Lock


• Open “Controls” screen and touch With ADAS NOTE:
“Glove Box” soft-key. • To open the screen required to enter • If you do not enter all PIN digits, a
the PIN, answer “Yes” to the prompt. prompt will indicate that you should 4
do so.
• In case of an incoming call while
entering the PIN, the MTC+ system
will temporarily stop the release
function. As soon as the call is over,
the keypad screen will be displayed
again so that you can enter the PIN.

• When the next page shown in figure


appears, touch “OK”.
Without ADAS
• Using the keypad, enter the four
digits of the PIN and press “OK”. The
system prompts you re-enter the PIN
code to confirm it.

191
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Analog Clock
To adjust the analog clock located on
the center of the dashboard above the
MTC+ display, use the MTC+ System
(see “MTC+ Settings” in this section).

Glove box is now locked and the MTC+ Unlock glove box by entering the lock
will go back to “Controls” page. code as previously specified.
4 Glove Box Unlock Glove Box Manual Unlock
To unlock the glove box which was If battery is dead, it is necessery to
locked with the PIN code, touch manually unlock the actuator on the
“Controls” soft-key on the status bar LH side of the glove box in order to
and then “Glove Box” soft-key to open the glove box that has been The time can be displayed also on the
enter this feature. The MTC+ screen locked using the PIN code. MTC+ status bar and on the
will display the page on which a To perform this operation you need to instrument cluster display (see “MTC+
message will indicate that system remove the lower dashboard moulding Settings” in this section).
operation is reduced and that only to access the actuator unlocking cable. Clock lighting works in the same way
“Climate”, “Controls” and “Settings” Considering the complexity of this as instrument and controls
features are active. operation, we recommend you to backlighting (refer to “Lights” in
contact an Authorized Maserati section “Understanding the Vehicle”).
Dealer.

192
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Air Conditioning Controls Dual Zone Climate Controls


The vehicle is equipped with an This system can be operated by using
automatic dual-zone air conditioning the controls of the automatic climate
system that allows to adjust separately control panel on the dashboard, or
the air temperature in the left and in the softkeys on the MTC+ display
the right zone of the passenger when “Climate” mode is selected.
compartment, according to the In the "Climate" screen of the MTC+,
requests of the driver and the front the front seats and steering wheel
passenger. comfort setting soft-keys may be
A humidity sensor, positioned on the present (optional equipments).
The “OFF” state of the front seats and When the MTC+ System is in any mode
inner surface of the windshield, over other than “Climate” (“Radio”,
the rear view mirror, allows the A/C steering wheel comfort setting is
shown on their soft-key. “Media”, “Controls”, etc.) the driver 4
system to prevent/eliminate fogging and passenger temperature settings
of the windshield and side windows. will be indicated on the upper part of
The best efficacy in preventing the display.
fogging is obtained by selecting the
AUTO function, described later. Description of Controls
A dual zone solar sensor, positioned All described functions can be set and
on the center of the dashboard upper modified using the climate control
surface, helps to achieve the best panel or the MTC+ display.
comfort in presence of solar radiation.

CAUTION!
Front seats and steering wheel
To ensure proper functioning of the
comfort setting soft-keys are present
solar sensor, do not apply adhesive
even when the A/C is off (see "Front
parking stickers, etc. in the checking
Seats" and/or "Steering Wheel
area between the solar sensor and the
Adjustment" in section
windshield. Therefore, keep the
"Understanding the Vehicle" for
windshield and the solar sensor clean
further details).
to prevent accumulation of dust or
other impurities.

193
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The “OFF” soft-key will illuminate NOTE:
when the A/C is on. In “SYNC” mode, this button will also
NOTE: automatically and simultaneously
adjust the passenger temperature.
The Air Conditioning System will not
function during Remote Start 4. Passenger temperature control
operation if the climate control is left Provides the passenger with
in “OFF”. independent temperature control.
Push the ▼ softkey for cooler
2. A/C
temperature. Push the ▲ softkey for
Press to change the current air
To adjust driver and passenger side warmer temperature. The passenger's
conditioning (A/C) setting; the
temperature and blower speed, temperature setting will be displayed
indicator illuminates when the “A/C” is
4 climate control panel features on the MTC+ screen between the
on. Operating this function will cause
two-function controls that can be softkeys ▲ and ▼.
the automatic feature to switch into
pushed up to increase temperature/ manual mode and the “AUTO” LED on NOTE:
speed, or down to decrease them. the button/MTC+ softkey will turn off. Pressing the 4 button while in “SYNC”
1. Climate control on/off 3. Driver temperature control mode will automatically exit “SYNC”.
Once you enter the screen “Climate”, Provides the driver with independent
press the “ON” soft-key to switch the temperature control. Push the blue ▼ 5. Recirculation
climate control on/off. softkey for cooler temperature. Push Press to change the current setting,
the red ▲ softkey for warmer the LED indicator on the button/the
temperature. The driver's temperature relevant softkey illuminates to indicate
setting will be displayed on the MTC+ which recirculation function is
between the softkey ▲ and ▼. The activated. For further details, see
MTC+ display can also be used to paragraph “Dual zone Climate Control
adjust the temperature by pressing Functions” in this chapter.
and sliding the bar towards softkey ▲, 6. Blower control
to increase temperature, or towards Blower control is used to regulate the
softkeys ▼ to decrease it. amount of air forced through the
climate system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower

194
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
will cause automatic mode to switch 8. FAST defrosting/defogging rear windows defroster:
to manual. Press the button/MTC+ softkey to • Use care when washing the inside of
On the climate control panel, push the switch the airflow setting to the the rear window. Do not use
rocker switch up to increase blower windshield and the front side abrasive window cleaners on the
speed. Push the rocker switch down to windows to get a quick defrosting/ interior surface of the window. Use a
decrease blower speed. Pushing down defogging. The LED on the soft cloth and a mild washing
the rocker switch when set blower is button/MTC+ softkey illuminates solution, wiping parallel to the
at the first speed, causes the A/C when this feature is activated. heating elements. Labels can be
system shutdown (OFF condition). Operating this function will cause the peeled off after soaking with warm
On the MTC+ display, touch the small ATC to switch into manual mode: so water.
icon of the blower to decrease the the “AUTO” LED/MTC+ softkey will
• Do not use scrapers, sharp
speed, or the big icon to increase it. turn off; the fifth blower speed will be
instruments, or abrasive window
Between the two icons, bars will automatically selected, unless the
appear to show the number of the blower is already set to a higher
cleaners on the interior surface of 4
the window.
corresponding selected speed. speed. If this function is turned off the
The blower can also be activated/ climate system will return to the • Keep all objects inside the vehicle at
regulated by touching the bars previous setting. a safe distance from the window.
between the two blower icons. 9. REAR defrosting/defogging 10. Air flow distribution modes
7. AUTO Press the button/MTC+ softkey to The airflow distribution mode can be
This function automatically controls turn on the rear window defroster adjusted so air comes from the
the interior temperature by adjusting and the heated outside mirrors. A LED dashboard vents, floor vents,
the air flow rate and the air indicator/MTC+ softkey will illuminate defog/defrost vents.
distribution. Press “AUTO” to switch when the rear window defroster and The display contains the relevant
the ATC between manual and the heated outside mirrors are on. softkeys used to set these modes. The
automatic mode. The LED on the The rear window defroster and the climate control panel features a
button/the “AUTO” softkey heated outside mirrors automatically button : press it several times to
illuminates when the “AUTO” turn off after 10 minutes. select and set the required airflow
function is activated. See “Automatic distribution mode.
Temperature Control (ATC)” in this
chapter for more information. CAUTION! Available settings are as follows:
Failure to observe the following • “Dashboard” mode
cautions may cause damage to the Air flows in from the four
adjustable vents of the dashboard

195
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
and the two positioned at the rear climates, to improve comfort and When the “A/C” and “AUTO” are
of the central console. Each of these prevent fogging. switched off it is not possible to have
vents can be singly adjusted. The air 11. “SYNC” mode air at a lower temperature than the
grids or vanes of the vents can be Press the “SYNC” softkey on the MTC+ outside.
moved to adjust air flow direction. A to switch the Sync feature on/off. The Recirculation and Air Quality
setting wheel, placed near each “SYNC” indicator illuminates when this Sensor (AQS)
vent, allows to regulate or close the feature is selected. This function is When outside air contains smoke,
air flow. used to synchronize the passenger odours, or high humidity, or if rapid
• “Bi-Level” mode temperature setting with the driver cooling is desired, you may wish to
Air comes from the dashboard vents, temperature setting. recirculate interior air by pressing the
the central console adjustable vents Changing the passenger temperature recirculation control button to activate
and the fixed floor vents. A small setting while in “SYNC” will the two different functionalities.
4 portion of the airflow is directed automatically exit this feature. The recirculation function, that allows
through the defrost/defog vents. 12. MAX A/C to open/close the A/C air inlet by
By pressing the “MAX A/C” operating the relevant button on the
NOTE:
button/MTC+ softkey, the system climate control panel/MTC+ softkey, is
Bi-Level mode is designed to have integrated with the Air Quality Sensor.
automatically switches to get the
more fresh air out of the dashboard This sensor, positioned upstream of the
maximum cold air flow.
vents and rear part of the central A/C filter, in front of the air intake of
console vents and warmer air from the Dual Zone Climate Control the A/C system, detects the presence of
floor vents. Functions polluting substances and submits an
electric signal to the A/C control unit,
• “Floor” mode Air Conditioning (A/C)
that closes the intake of the external
The “A/C” button allows to manually
Air comes from the floor vents. A air by activating the air recirculation.
activate or deactivate the air
small portion of the airflow is The recirculation button/MTC+ softkey
conditioning system. When the air
directed through the defrost/defog can therefore enable three operating
conditioning system is turned on, cool
vents. modes, switchable in sequence.
dehumidified air will flow through the
• “Mix” mode Starting from the outside air
vents into the cabin. For improved fuel
Air comes from the defrost/defog condition, in which the external air is
economy, press the “A/C” button to
vents and from the floor vents. This aspirated by the A/C system and
turn off the air conditioning and
mode is recommended for cold treated to be introduced into the
manually adjust the blower and
passenger compartment, subsequent
airflow mode settings.

196
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
actuations of the button/MTC+ softkey maximum blower speed and the air
change the state as follows. distribution are also selected.
• First press: the A/C system activates The blower speed can be adjusted and
the recirculation, the LED on the the air distribution can be modified
button/MTC+ softkey lights up. The without exiting “MAX A/C”. To exit
A/C system will stay this way up to a “MAX A/C” press the relevant softkey
new actuation, or until the increased or exit A/C or recirculation. Selecting
humidity could lead to windshield , “AUTO”, or “OFF”, will also exit
fogging: in this case the recirculation “MAX A/C”.
automatically switches to external Automatic Temperature
air. Control (ATC)
• Second press: the A/C system
activates the automatic recirculation Automatic operation 4
control by using the signal • Press the “AUTO” softkey on the A/C
transmitted from the AQS. The panel or the softkey button on the
symbol ‘’A’’ on the recirculation MTC+ screen.
button/MTC+ softkey lights up. • Set the desired temperature
• Third press: the A/C system switches adjusting the driver and/or
back to external air. passenger temperature hard or soft
The next press of the recirculation control buttons. Once the desired
button/MTC+ softkey restars the NOTE: temperature is displayed, the system
operating cycle just described. • In cold weather, use of recirculation will achieve and automatically
mode may lead to window fogging. maintain that comfort level.
NOTE:
In this case select the MIX mode • When the system is set up for your
To avoid the risk of fogging, the AQS comfort level, it is not necessary to
and increase the blower speed
is disabled when the external change the settings anymore, simply
to prevent fogging.
temperature falls below 35 °F (2 °C). allow the system to function
MAX A/C automatically.
When activating this function, the
system switches to exit “AUTO”, enter
“A/C” and recirculation. The minimum
temperature (LO) in both zones, the

197
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
control. In this case the blower will temperature and humidity, when the
operate at a fixed speed until any A/C compressor is switched on (A/C
speed change is selected. This allows softkey illuminated on MTC+ display
the front occupants to control the or LED on climate control panel A/C
volume of air circulated in the vehicle button ON) there may be some cold
and cancel the “AUTO” mode. steam at ventilation port outlet: this
The user can also select the direction situation is normal and does not
of the airflow by selecting one of the indicate air conditioning system
available mode settings. A/C operation malfunction.
and recirculation control can also be • Automatic Temperature Controls
manually selected. (ATC) will automatically adjust the
climate control settings to prevent or
Operating Tips
4 eliminate window fogging on the
• Continuous use of the air front windshield.
recirculation in winter, in rainy
weather or humid climate is not • Make sure the A/C system air intake
recommended because it may cause grille, located under the bonnet
window fogging. directly in front of the windshield, is
• Interior fogging on the windshield free of obstructions such as leaves or
can be quickly removed by fast other objects. Leaves collected in the
defrosting/defogging. The “Mix” air intake may reduce airflow, and if
• To provide you with maximum mode can be used to maintain a clear they enter the plenum, they could
comfort in the Automatic mode, windshield and provide sufficient plug the water drains. In winter
during cold start-ups the blower heating. If side window fogging make sure the air intake is clear of
speed will remain low until the becomes a problem increase blower ice, slush, and snow.
engine warms up. speed. • The temperature can be displayed in
Manual operation U.S. or Metric units by selecting the
NOTE:
The system allows manual selection of “Units” customer programmable
• Recirculation mode without A/C feature. See “MTC+ Settings” in this
blower speed, air distribution mode, should not be used for long periods
A/C status and recirculation control. section.
of time, as fogging may occur.
The blower fan speed can be set to any • Any time you store your vehicle or
• If inside the passenger compartment keep it stationary (i.e., during
fixed speed by using the blower
there are conditions of high

198
Dashboard Instruments and Controls
vacation) for two weeks or more, Phone and Voice Controls The voice command communication
run the air conditioning system at system is fully integrated with the
idle for about five minutes in the on Steering Wheel vehicle's audio system.
fresh air by high blower setting. This The commands on the right side of the The volume can be adjusted from the
will ensure adequate system steering wheel activate/deactivate the upper knob on the central console
lubrication and minimize the phone mode ( ) and the Voice (see “Infotainment System” in this
possibility of compressor damage Recognition ( ) controls functions. section or from the steering wheel
when the system is started again. radio controls (see “Audio Controls” in
this section).
A/C Filter The system will automatically mute
The climate control system filters the radio when using the phone
outside air containing dust, pollen and mode.
some odors. Strong odors cannot be When activating the phone mode
totally removed by A/C filter at the using voice commands with
4
entrance of the air climate system. See speakerphone, you should talk quietly
“Maintenance Procedures” in section in a normal conversational tone by
“Maintenance and Care” for filter keeping the driving position and
replacement instructions. turning to the microphone of the
These functions are only available voice command system located inside
when one or more Bluetooth® of the internal rear-view mirror.
compatible mobile phones are paired The ability of the system voice control
with the MTC+ System connection: to to recognize the user's voice
pair a phone and to learn all available commands can be invalidated when
functions refer to the MTC+ guide. speaking too quickly or too loudly.
NOTE:
On the Maserati website, at
WARNING!
www.maserati.com, or through an
Authorized Maserati Dealer you may Any voice-controlled system should be
consult the list of telephones that are used only in safe driving conditions
compatible with the MTC+, and their following all applicable regulations.
level of compatibility. Full attention should be kept on
driving.

199
Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Phone Mode Voice Commands


By using the phone button on the By using voice commands, after
steering wheel it is possible to: activate pressing the VR button on the
the phone mode, start a call, show steering wheel, it is possible to control
recent incoming and outgoing calls, the AM, FM radio, SiriusXM satellite
show contacts list, etc. radio and all devices connected and
managed by the “Media” mode (i.e SD
card, USB/iPod player).
When pressing the VR button an
acoustic signal will invite to give a
When pressing the phone button voice command.
an audible sound will invite you to
NOTE:
4 impart a command.
Information on incoming call is For further details refer to the Maserati
indicated in a pop-up on instrument Touch Control Plus (MTC+) guide.
cluster display main area if this feature Siri Smart Personal Assistant
is checkmarked on MTC+ (see “MTC+
Settings” in this section). Said When a compatible iPhone or iPad that
information will stay displayed until a supports Siri voice recognition is paired
control is executed (e.g.: answer, to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, a long
reject, etc.) for the incoming call. press of the VR button activates the
The screen will only display the phone Siri Smart Personal Assistant.
number or name of caller (if available) When you use MTC+ display as
as long as this complies with system projection device (mirroring function)
specifications in terms of font and a short press is sufficient.
number of characters. Siri requires mobile internet access and
Call details can be displayed at any its functionality might change
time through “Audio” submenu item. depending on the geographical area.
All these functions can also be reached “Phone: call details” using the buttons Through simple voice commands,
by using the touchscreen commands on steering wheel RH side. On display, without taking your eyes off the road,
on the MTC+ display in “Phone” mode. said details shall temporarily replace it may be possible to send messages,
the ones on media source in use. make phone calls, create notes and
reminders, etc.

200
5 – Driving
Normal Starting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
All-Wheel Drive (AWD version only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Adaptive Cruise Control – ACC (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Forward Collision Warning – FCW (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . 249
Lane Keeping Assist - LKA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Blind Spot Assist (without ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Active Blind Spot Assist - ABSA (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . 262
Highway Assist – HAS (optional, with ACC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Traffic Sign Assist – TSA (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tires - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

201
Driving

Normal Starting of the www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-


vehicle
Engine CAUTION!
When doors are opened, the • Before starting the engine, switch off
instrument cluster displays the the electrical devices with a high
WARNING! Maserati Logo in the center and the power consumption (air-conditioning
It is dangerous to run the engine in an complete odometer plus the open and heating system, heated rear
enclosed area. The engine consumes doors indicator in the lower part of window, headlights, etc.).
oxygen and discharges carbon the cluster.
• Do not start the engine if the fuel
dioxide, carbon monoxide and other level in the tank is low.
toxic gases in the atmosphere.
The keyless ignition allows the driver
to operate the ignition switch by
pushing the center button, as long as
WARNING! the key fob RKE transmitter is within
California Proposition 65 the passenger compartment (check
“Keys” in section “Before Starting” for
5 Operating, servicing and maintaining
a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle further information).
can expose you to chemicals including By pressing the brake pedal and
such as, engine exhaust, carbon pushing the START/STOP button the
Before starting the engine, close the engine starts. Instrument cluster
monoxide, phthalates and lead, that
doors, adjust your seat, the inside and displays the initial sequence with
which are know to the State of
outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt indicator light and analog instruments
California to cause cancer and birth
and instruct all other occupants to test routine and switch-on of the
defects or other reproductive harm. To
buckle their seat belts. engine temperature indicators and
minimize exposure, avoid breathing
The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N fuel level. This happens if option “On”
exhaust, do not idle the engine except
(Neutral) position before you can start was set in screen settings for display
as necessary, service your vehicle in a
the engine. Apply the brakes before switch-on (see chapter “Instrument
well-ventilated area and wear gloves
shifting into any driving gear (see cluster” in section “Dashboard
or wash your hands frequently when
“Automatic Transmission” in this Instruments and Controls”).
servicing your vehicle. For more
section).
information go to:

202
Driving
NOTE: NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a If the ignition switch is left in the ACC
warm engine is obtained without or RUN (engine not running) position
pumping or pressing the accelerator and the transmission is in P (Park), the
pedal. system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
If the driver only pushes the
ignition will switch to the OFF
START/STOP button but does not press
position.
the brake pedal, the ignition switch
cycles to the ACC position (see “Keys” After starting the engine, the idle
in section “Before Starting”) and the speed is controlled automatically and
The current display subsequently sets
instrument cluster displays the latest will decrease as the engine warms up.
up with the latest screenshot.
screenshot.
At the second press of the Engine Start Failure
START/STOP button, the ignition
device switches to RUN position (see
“Keys” in section “Before Starting”) WARNING!
and the instrument cluster displays the
5
• Do not attempt to push or tow your
latest screenshot. vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
At the third press of the START/STOP equipped with an automatic
button the ignition switch returns to transmission cannot be started this
OFF position and the display powers way.
down. • If the vehicle battery is dead,
If the engine fails to start, the starter At the fourth press of the START/STOP booster cables may be used to
will disengage automatically after 10 button the screen will display the obtain a start from a booster battery
seconds. If you wish to stop the message that invites you to press the or the battery in another vehicle.
cranking of the engine prior to brake pedal and push the START/STOP This type of start can be dangerous
starting it, press the button again. button to start the engine. if done improperly. See “Auxiliary
Jump Start Procedure” in section “In
an Emergency” for further
information.

203
Driving
Starting with a Cold Engine NOTE: Automatic Start&Stop System
Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden If the ignition switch is left in the ACC The Maserati Start&Stop system allows
acceleration and rev the engine up at or RUN (engine not running) position the engine to automatically switch off
low medium speeds. High- and the transmission is in P (Park), the when the vehicle stops and to restart
performance driving should be system will automatically time out when the driver intends to drive. This
avoided until the engine temperature after 30 minutes of inactivity and the feature helps reduce fuel
reaches 149-158°F (65-70°C). ignition will switch to OFF position. consumption. During the “Stop
Engine Turn-Off (AutoStop)” phase the ignition is still
Engine Turn Off when in Automatic on and all security features are
• With the shift lever in P (Park), D Start&Stop available.
(Drive) or R (Reverse) positions (see When the engine has been turned off In order for the Start&Stop to activate,
“Automatic Transmission” in this by the Start&Stop system, press and the vehicle must be stationary and the
section) and vehicle standstill, press release the START/STOP button. The brake pedal adequately pressed.
and release the START/STOP button ignition switch will return to the OFF
to switch off the engine. A burst on position and the vehicle is off. NOTE:
the accelerator pedal before turning If the brake pedal is not sufficiently
off the engine has no purpose and “Panic Stop” Strategy
5 pressed the Start&Stop may not
increases fuel consumption. In panic conditions, if driver stops function even if the vehicle is stopped.
• If the shift lever is in N (Neutral) and engine in any non-standard manner
the START/STOP button is pressed while driving at a speed over 2 mph When the Start&Stop switches off the
once, the instrument cluster will (3 km/h), the “Panic Stop” strategy can engine, the related light
display a “Vehicle Not in Park” manage the situation by checking illuminates on the instrument
message and the engine will remain gearchange condition upon engine cluster.
running. cutting, driver’s action on brakes, road As soon as the brake pedal is released,
condition (flat or slope) so as to set the engine turns on.
gearchange to the most suitable While the vehicle is stopped, the shift
condition. lever can be placed in P (Park).
WARNING! In this case it is possible to release the
The “Panic Stop” strategy considers
Never leave a vehicle out of the P brake pedal and the vehicle will
that the driver should stop the engine
(Park) position, as it could move. remain in “AutoStop” with engine off.
by pressing the ignition switch at least
3 times or holding it depressed for at Pressing the brake pedal and shifting
least 2 seconds. gear into D (Drive) or R (Reverse) will

204
Driving
deactivate the “AutoStop” condition Start&Stop Not Active • When the front and rear “defroster”
and restart the engine. For keeping driving safety, interior function is activated.
comfort and a correct functioning of • When the engine coolant and the
engine and vehicle, the Start&Stop engine oil temperature are not on
function does not activate under the proper functioning level.
following conditions: • When the external temperature is
• When the driver’s seat belt is too cold.
unbuckled (see example). • When the battery charge is below
safety value.
• When the previous stop had just
happened (few seconds) and the
minimum speed has not yet been
Start&Stop Deactivated achieved.
Start&Stop function is deactivated • Shortly after R (Reverse) has been set
under the following conditions: or when driving under a certain
speed level.
• When SPORT drive mode is activated. 5
• When (ESC OFF) drive mode is • When the hood is open.
activated. • The sensors managing the
• If it has been disabled through the • When the driver door is open. Start&Stop have been damaged.
main menu item “Start & Stop” via • When the fuel level is too low. • Start&Stop system faults are present.
the controls on the right side of the • When the vehicle is stopped on a • When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
steering wheel (see chapter very steep road. and/or Highway Assist (HAS) system
“Instrument cluster” in section • When the vehicle is stopped with are engaged.
“Dashboard Instruments and steered wheels (over 135° of steering Automatic Restarting of the Engine
Controls”) or via the MTC+ in the wheel angle for each part).
“Controls” page (see “MTC+ The engine may automatically restart,
• When the vehicle is manoeuvring: before the brake pedal has been
"Controls" Screen” in section shift lever in R (Reverse).
“Dashboard Instruments and released, when one of the following
• When the temperature conditions conditions occurs:
Controls”).
inside the vehicle do not correspond
• The SPORT drive mode or drive
to the air conditioning setting.
mode is being activated.

205
Driving
• If the Start&Stop function has been • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt and the vehicle’s surrounding area.
disabled through the main menu and releases the brake pedal. Never leave the vehicle unattended
voice “Vehicle Settings” (see chapter • The driver opens the door and with the engine running; doing so
“Instrument cluster” in section releases the brake pedal. poses a risk of danger. It is a good
“Dashboard Instruments and • The driver unbuckles the seat belt practice to always ensure to set the
Controls”). and opens the door. parking brake and place the
• If shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). transmission gear selector lever into
• The driver opens the hood.
• If the steering wheel is moved to the P (Park) position, thereby
All the above-mentioned conditions
steer the wheels. ensuring the vehicle will not move,
deactivate the Start&Stop function
when performing any vehicle checks,
• When the temperature conditions (the “AutoStart” is deactivated and
maintenance and/or service
inside the vehicle do not correspond the engine remains off) and the shift
procedures on the vehicle.
to the air conditioning setting. lever moves automatically in P (Park).
• When changing the temperature The telltale will flash to indicate Start&Stop Function Disabling
setting on the air conditioning. the Start&Stop function disabling. To
restart the engine it is necessary to Under certain driving conditions, when
• When the defroster function is being frequent stops and restarts of the
activated. press the brake pedal and push the
5 START/STOP button. engine may become annoying, it is
• When the battery charge is below possible to disable the Start & Stop
Move the shift lever to D (Drive) to
safety value. function.
drive away.
• When the accelerator pedal is being Use the controls located on the right
pressed (together with the brake side of the steering wheel (see
pedal). instructions in chapter “Instrument
WARNING!
• If a long time has passed since the Cluster” in section “Dashboard
• Even when the vehicle is stopped in Instruments and Controls”) and select
last automatic stop of the engine.
the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, the “Start & Stop” main menu item which
Occupants Safety Function driver is responsible for the vehicle displays the status of the function:
To enhance occupants safety, the and the occupants and shall take Start & Stop enabled is the default
Start&Stop system monitors if the care of what happens inside and status.
driver is present and does not allow outside the vehicle. Hold the switch (►) to change the
automatic restarting of the engine if • Even when the vehicle is stopped status of the function.
one of the following maneuvers is within the “Stop (AutoStop)” phase, When the Start&Stop function is
being performed while in “AutoStop” the vehicle driver is responsible for disabled, in addition to the related
condition: the vehicle, the vehicle’s occupants message the amber indicator
206
Driving
indicated in the picture will turn Automatic Transmission
on.
The electronic shift lever replaces the
conventional mechanical lever and has
no mechanical connection to the
transmission. The transmission is
operated by electrical actuators on the
hydraulic system and all commands to
the control system are transmitted by
the CAN network. The lever itself
With ADAS represents a mere user interface. Gear
positions are simulated by solenoids
• Touch a second time the same
inside the lever body, which are
Another way to disable the Start & soft-key to re-enable the function.
computer-controlled and enable or
Stop is via the MTC+. NOTE: disable certain positions of the lever.
• Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the The highlighted soft-key indicates the The solenoids inside the shift lever
lower part of MTC+ display. prevent the movement of the lever
disabled status of Start & Stop system 5
• Touch the “Start & Stop Off” and vice versa. towards invalid positions.
soft-key to disable the function. The electronically-controlled
Start&Stop System Failure transmission provides a precise shift
schedule.
When the indicator light and the
related message illuminate on the TFT
display (see chapter “Instrument CAUTION!
Cluster” in section “Dashboard In order to properly use the automatic
Instruments and Controls”) there is a transmission, it is essential that you
malfunction in the Start&Stop system read through the whole chapter, so
and the engine cannot be switched off that you can understand right from
and restarted automatically. To switch the start what the correct and
off or restart the engine it is necessary permitted operations are.
Without ADAS to push the START/STOP. Have the
Damage to the transmission may occur
vehicle checked at an Authorized
Maserati Dealer. (Continued)

207
Driving
(Continued) is running. Before exiting a vehicle, • N (Neutral);
if the following precautions are not always apply the electronic parking • D (Drive) automatic forward speed (8
observed: brake, shift the transmission into P speeds);
(Park), and turn the engine off. • -/+ to downshift or upshift when
• Shift into P (Park) only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop. • When leaving the vehicle, always manual mode in D (Drive) status, or
This is the default position of the remove the key fob and lock your set to M (Manual) mode (see “Drive
lever and should be used every time vehicle. Mode” in this section).
the ignition switch is cycled to OFF. • Do not leave the key fob in or near
• Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only the vehicle.
after the vehicle has come to a
This vehicle is equipped with a feature
complete stop and the engine is at
which requires the shift lever to be
idle speed.
placed in P (Park) before the engine
• Do not shift between P (Park), R can be turned off. This prevents the
(Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) driver from inadvertently leaving the
when the engine is above idle speed vehicle without having placed the
5 • To effect any change from vehicle transmission in P (Park). This system
stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or also locks the shift lever in P (Park)
2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the whenever the ignition switch is in the Transmission status is visible on the
brake pedal fully depressed. OFF position. lever and on the lower part of the
Instrument cluster display.
Automatic Transmission Lever
Automatic transmission is operated by
WARNING! a selection lever with unlock button
• It is dangerous to move the shift located on the central console.
lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if By using the selection lever it is
the engine speed is higher than idle possible to select the following
speed. Only shift into gear when the positions, indicated on the top of the
engine is idling normally and when lever: the selected position will
your foot is firmly pressing on the illuminate in white light.
brake pedal.
• P (Park);
• As with all vehicles, you should
• R (Reverse);
never exit a vehicle while the engine

208
Driving
By pressing the release button on the position is indicated beside the lever You must also press the brake pedal to
lever, the gear position field is status, on the lower part of the shift the transmission out of P (Park)
displayed: if you release the button display. position.
without moving the lever, the field Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R
disappears after 2 seconds. By (Reverse) should be done only after
operating instead the lever, the new the accelerator pedal is released and
range will be indicated in the field the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep
and in the lower part of the display. your foot pressed on the brake pedal
when moving the shift lever between
these gears.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into
another gear range.

Automatic Transmission Range


P (Park)
Use this position to park the vehicle. 5
The transmission can be shifted from P
(Park) position only with the brake
pedal pressed. To move the shift lever
from P (Park) position to any other
position, the engine must be switched
on. The engine can be regularly
started in P (Park) range. Never
In normal conditions, the shift lever is attempt to use P (Park) while the
always unlocked. When in D (Drive) vehicle is in motion. When parking on
mode it is possible to upshift or a level surface, you may place the shift
downshift the changing gears by lever in the P (Park) position first, and
automatically temporarily setting in M then apply the electronic parking
If the vehicle is temporarily in the (Manual) mode. brake by pulling the trigger upwards.
manual drive mode, D (Drive) status,
or in M (Manual) drive mode, the gear

209
Driving
R (Reverse)
This range is used to move the vehicle
WARNING!
backward.
• Never use the P (Park) position as a
We recommend to shift into R
substitute for the electronic parking
(Reverse) only after the vehicle has
brake. Always apply the parking
come to a complete stop.
brake fully when parked to prevent
vehicle movement and possible • Vehicle halted: switching between P
injury or damage. (Park), R (Reverse) and D (Drive)
requires pressing the unlock button
• Make sure the transmission is in P
on the lever and brake pedal: N
The Instrument cluster will display the (Park) before leaving the vehicle.
(Neutral) is reached only by pressing
related indicator light and the the unlock button on the lever.
message for 5 seconds.
• Vehicle moving: the driver can switch
CAUTION!
from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral), or
• DO NOT race the engine when vice versa, by pressing the unlock
shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) button on the shift lever.
5 into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain. N (Neutral)
• The following indicators should be • Vehicle halted and engine started:
used to ensure that you have switching from N (Neutral) to R
engaged the shift lever into the P (Reverse), P (Park) and/or D (Drive)
(Park) position: requires brake pedal and unlock
– when shifting into P (Park), press button pressed.
the unlock button on the shift • Vehicle moving: switching from N
When parking on a hill, apply the lever and push the lever all the (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D
parking brake before placing the shift way forward until it stops. (Drive) requires pressing the unlock
lever in P (Park). – with the brake pedal released, button. Switching to R (Reverse)
For enhanced security, turn the front verify that P (Park) position is starting from N (Neutral) is only
wheels toward the kerb on a downhill illuminated on the shift lever. possible if the vehicle is moving
and away from the kerb on an uphill
backwards, while switching to D
grade.
(Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is

210
Driving
only possible if the vehicle is moving driving characteristics under all normal the system to enter a temporary
forwards. operating conditions of the vehicle. function and enable the manual
Set the parking brake and shift the • Vehicle stationary: switching from D shift mode. This range is indicated
transmission into P (Park) if you must (Drive) to R (Reverse) and/or to P with the symbols “-/+” on the left
leave the vehicle. (Park) requires brake pedal and and right sides of the “D” letter on
unlock button pressed: reaching N the gear range field of the display.
(Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is The system will then switch back to
WARNING! allowed by only pressing the unlock automatic mode according to time
Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or button on the shift lever. elapsed in “temporary” mode and
never turn off the ignition to coast driving conditions.
• To enable special operations while
downhill. These are unsafe practices At extremely cold temperatures
the car is moving at a low speed,
that limit driver’s response to (-23°F/-30°C or below), transmission
such as getting out of marsh or
changing traffic or road conditions. may be affected by the low
snow, it is possible to run quickly
temperature of the engine and
from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and
transmission. Normal operation will
vice versa, by pressing the reset
resume once the transmission
CAUTION! button on the gear shift lever.
temperature has risen to a normal 5
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or • Vehicle moving: switching to N level.
driving for any other reason with the (Neutral) from D (Drive) requires the
transmission in N (Neutral) can result unlock button on the shift lever Transmission Malfunction and
in transmission damage. Refer to pressed. Overheating Conditions
“Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in section • From D (Drive) selected mode it is Transmission Emergency Control
6 for further information. always possible to switch to M Transmission function is electronically
(Manual), by pressing the M monitored to detect abnormal
D (Drive) (Manual) button: the Led indicator conditions. If a condition that could
This range should be used for most beside the button will light up; to result in transmission damage is
city and highway driving. It provides return to D (Drive) position, the detected, Transmission Limp Home
the smoothest upshifts and downshifts same action should be performed as Mode will be activated. In this
and the best fuel economy. The the LED will turn off. situation, the transmission may
transmission automatically shifts up • When in D (Drive) mode, moving the operate only in certain gears, or may
and down through all gears. The D shift lever forward or backwards to not shift at all. In some situations, the
(Drive) position provides optimum the next step without pressing the transmission system may not
unlock button on the lever will cause

211
Driving
re-engage if the engine is turned off driving without demanding high NOTE:
and restarted. engine performance. If the red Even if the transmission can be reset,
A message in the instrument cluster warning light and the related we recommend that you visit an
will inform the driver about the more message turns on again, it is advisable Authorized Maserati Dealer at your
serious transmission conditions, and to stop the vehicle, turn off the engine earliest possible convenience, which
indicate what actions may be and wait for the engine/transmission has diagnostic equipment to
necessary. assembly to fully cool down. determine if the problem could recur.
Transmission Oil Overtemperature If the instrument cluster message
If the transmission oil temperature indicates that the transmission may Transmission Manual Release of
exceeds the operating limit, the red not re-engage after engine shutdown, P (Park) Position
warning light illuminates on the perform the following procedure See chapter “Transmission Manual
instrument cluster. preferably at an Authorized Maserati Release of P (Park) Position” in section
Dealer. “In an Emergency”.
In the event of a momentary problem,
the transmission can be reset to regain
all forward gears by performing the
5 following steps.
• Stop the vehicle.
• Shift the transmission into P (Park), if
possible.
• Turn the engine off.
• Wait approximately 30 seconds.
In this case, slow down until • Restart the engine.
temperature returns to normal level • Shift the transmission into D (Drive)
(the light will turn off). and then into the desired gear
If this is not sufficient, we recommend range. If the problem is no longer
to stop the vehicle, shift the lever to detected, the transmission will return
position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and to normal operation.
keep the engine idle until the
temperature red warning light
turns off and the message
disappears from the display. Resume

212
Driving

All-Wheel Drive (AWD


version only) WARNING!
There may be a slight delay for AWD
The active on-demand All-Wheel Drive
engagement after a wheel slip
(AWD) system provides available
condition occurs.
optimum traction for a wide variety of
road surface and driving conditions.
The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to
the front and rear wheels as necessary.
To maximise fuel economy, the AWD .
system automatically disangages
torque distribution on front axle when
road and environmental conditions
are such that wheel slip is unlikely to
occur. When specific road and
environmental conditions require 5
increased levels of road traction, the NOTE:
AWD system automatically distributes If the AWD system service warning
the torque between front and rear light and message appears after
axle in order to grant the best driving engine start up, or during driving, it
experience. Torque distribution is means that the AWD system is not
displayed on the TFT in the “Drive functioning properly. If the warning
Mode” main menu. Refer to light and message are often activated,
paragraph “TFT Display: Menus and it is recommended to have the vehicle
Settings” in chapter “Instrument serviced at an Authorized Maserati
Cluster” of section “Dashboard Dealer.
Instruments and Controls” for further
information.

213
Driving

Drive Mode • I.C.E: to activate/deactivate the drive “On” (see example in the figure).
mode to ensure increased control on Refer to chapter “Instrument Cluster”
Controls Preview slippery surfaces as well as higher in section “Dashboard Instruments and
energy efficiency. Controls” for further information.
Drive modes can be set using the
buttons on central console. • SPORT: to activate/deactivate a
sportier drive mode. In this mode,
the vehicle has a faster throttle
CAUTION! response and ESC sport calibration
“Normal” is the default drive mode, (not recommended on wet/slippery
optimized for the best balance surfaces). Activating this drive mode,
between performance, fuel will also change the EPS setting.
consumption and emissions in the • (Suspension): to switch between
standard conditions use of the car. the two Sport suspensions setting
modes: Sport-Normal (S, LED light
off) and Sport-Firm (H, LED light on)
Setting the Drive Mode
(for versions/markets where
5 provided). Activating this drive Drive modes can be set using the
mode, will also change the EPS buttons on central console.
setting. Keys (buttons) only have two statuses:
By selecting one of these drive modes, OFF and ON. The OFF status (button
the LED beside the button illuminates released) is the standard function
and the vehicle configuration obtained mode. The ON status is activated by
is graphically displayed on instrument pressing the button, the dedicated LED
cluster. The same screen is also will illuminate. It is necessary to press
obtained when selecting the “Drive the (ESC OFF) button for at least 3
Buttons on the central console have seconds.
mode” menu using the buttons on
following functions:
steering wheel.
• (ESC OFF): to disable/reactivate When changing the drive mode
the ESC system. between NORMAL, I.C.E., SPORT and
• M (Manual): to switch from (Suspensions), engine temperature
automatic to manual drive mode. and fuel level indicators inner edge
will change color if “Outline Coloring”
of submenu “Screen Setup” is set to
214
Driving
The table shows the different drive The tables below summarise the
modes according to the status of the adjustment of transmission and
buttons. engine parameters according to set
drive mode/s. (ESC OFF) is the only
Button OFF – Button released ON – Button pressed (LED ON) mode that does not depend on the
Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC activation or deactivation of the other
activated. partially deactivated. modes. The tables show the two
configurations with:
M Autoshift Mode (Auto). Manual shift mode (Manual) ON.
• (ESC OFF) button NOT pressed;
I.C.E. Increased Control and Increased Control and Efficiency
Efficiency mode OFF. mode ON (**). • (ESC OFF) button pressed.
SPORT Normal drive mode (NORMAL)
Sportier drive mode (SPORT) ON.
ON.
Sport-Normal suspensions
(*) Sport-Firm suspension setting (S).
setting.
(*) Only with optional Skyhook active suspensions.
(**) I.C.E. (Increased Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order 5
to reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampening
vehicle reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low-grip
surfaces.

215
Driving
(ESC OFF) Button NOT pressed

Button
pressed: LED ON
M M M M M
Button not
pressed: LED I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E.
OFF
SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

Setup Normal +
Normal + Auto + I.C.E. + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto +
Manual + Soft
Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Hard suspensions
suspensions
Stability control Active Active Active Active-Sport (*) Active-Sport (*)
Electric Power
Normal Normal Normal Sport Sport
Steering (EPS)
5
Suspensions
Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm
setup
Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance
Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost
Low (Rev. Low (Rev.
Exhaust sound Low Always High Always High
Threshold) Threshold)
Gear shifting
Normal - Comfort Performance Performance
point
Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong
Upshift rev. Yes (No, when in Yes (No, when in
Yes Yes Yes
limiter M) M)

216
Driving

Button
pressed: LED ON
M M M M M
Button not
pressed: LED I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E.
OFF
SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

Performance Performance
Automatic
Normal Anti - Stall Comfort (Anti - Stall, (Anti - Stall,
downshift
when in M) when in M)
Sport (Rapid - Sport (Rapid -
Shifting timing Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport, when in Sport, when in
M) M)

(*) In low- and medium-grip 5


conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
etc.) it is advisable not to activate
Sport mode, even with the ESC system
active (button (ESC OFF) not
pressed).

217
Driving
(ESC OFF) Button pressed

Button
pressed: LED ON
M M M M M
Button not
pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E.
SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

Setup Normal +
Normal + Auto + I.C.E. + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto +
Manual + Soft
Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Hard suspensions
suspensions
Stability control OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Electric Power
Normal Normal Normal Sport Sport
Steering (EPS)
5 Suspensions
Normal Normal Normal Sport-Normal Sport-Firm
setup
Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance
Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost
Low (Rev. Low (Rev.
Exhaust sound Low Always High Always High
Threshold) Threshold)
Gear
Normal - Comfort Performance Performance
shifting point
Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong
Upshift rev. Yes (No, when in Yes (No, when in
Yes Yes Yes
limiter M) M)
Performance
Automatic Performance (Anti
Normal Anti - Stall Comfort (Anti - Stall,
downshift - Stall, when in M)
when in M)

218
Driving

Button
pressed: LED ON
M M M M M
Button not
pressed: LED OFF I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E. I.C.E.

SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT SPORT

Sport (Rapid -
Sport (Rapid -
Shifting timing Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport, when in
Sport, when in M)
M)

NOTE:
A different drive mode can be set even
with engine running and vehicle in
motion.
5
To activate a drive mode, press briefly
the corresponding button. The LED
beside the button will light up and set
drive mode screen will be displayed
(example in the figure: I.C.E.) for 5
seconds.

219
Driving
Activate/Deactivate (ESC OFF) Drive
Mode
To activate (ESC OFF) drive mode
press the corresponding button for at
least 3 seconds.

To disable the drive mode activated,


A Powertrain
press the same button again: the LED
will turn off. B ESC
Monitoring Settings on Display C Suspension stiffness
By gaining access to “Drive mode” D Torque distribution (AWD version
To deactivate the drive mode, press menu through the buttons on steering only)
5
the same button again: the display will wheel right-hand side, it is possible to
Press (Suspension) button, the
show the message indicating that monitor the settings for driving.
icon with "S" beside will light up on
(ESC OFF) drive mode is off and ESC The list and figure show vehicle
the upper right side of the TFT display.
system is active. parameters referred to each drive
Activate/Deactivate I.C.E., SPORT and mode. Driving mode and its
(Suspension) Drive Mode parameters are identified by a
different color (example in the figure:
To activate one of this drive mode,
I.C.E.).
press the corresponding button once:
the LED above the symbol will turn on.

The table below specifies the default


setting for each drive mode.

220
Driving

Drive Mode Default Condition

ESC Normal

Normal

ESC I.C.E.

Normal 5

ESC Sport

Sport-Normal

221
Driving

Drive Mode Default Condition

ESC Sport

Sport-Firm

M (Manual) Drive Mode Using the shift paddles behind the


In this mode, the transmission interacts steering wheel (if equipped), the
with the driver in order to allow corresponding icon will be displayed
manual shift and increase driver beside the “M” indication and current
interaction. The current mode allows shifted gear.
5 the gear system to optimize the Pull the right shift paddle (+) towards
engine brake action, remove undesired the steering wheel and release it to
shifting into higher and lower gears engage the higher gear; do the same
and improve the overall performance operation with the left shift paddle (-)
of the vehicle. to engage the lower gear.
This mode allows you to move the shift
lever step by step forward (-) or
backward (+) without pressing the
unlock button. The current
transmission gear is displayed on the
instrument cluster beside “M”.

222
Driving
• If in SPORT mode, the transmission The indicator beside the displayed
will remain in the selected gear even gear will light up just before reaching
when maximum engine speed is the required speed to downshift or
reached. The transmission will upshift (example in the figure).
upshift only if enabled by the driver.
Manual upshift or downshift will be
maintained as long as SPORT mode is
selected, even by full stroke pedal
press.
• If in M (Manual) or in SPORT mode,
Manual mode can be activated at any the transmission will automatically
time, with no need to release the downshift as the vehicle slows to
brake pedal. halt (to prevent engine lagging) and
Even if the release button is pressed the current gear will be displayed on
and gear is shifted in R (Reverse), P the instrument cluster. Shifting the
(Park) or N (Neutral), the selected shift lever backward (+) or moving
manual mode will be maintained. the right shift paddle (+) towards 5
In Manual mode, the transmission will the steering wheel when stationary,
shift up or down (+/-) if manually will cause the vehicle to start in
selected by the driver by using the second gear. If the vehicle speed is
shift lever, or shift paddles on the too low, the system will ignore
steering wheel (if present). The further upshifts. Avoid using speed
transmission remains in the engaged control when the M (Manual) mode
gear until the driver shifts into is engaged.
another higher or lower gear, except Gear Shift Indicator Light
in the following cases. When the new gear is engaged, the
In order to improve fuel economy, we
• Lack of accelerator pedal activity will recommend that you shift gears when indicator turns off. If the shift runs
cause the transmission to revert to the system prompts you to do so. This late or is not performed at all, the
automatic operation. The will help reduce fuel consumption indicator remains lit for a few seconds
transmission will also upshift without significantly affecting vehicle then turns off. As soon as new
automatically once maximum engine performance. conditions requiring further gear
speed is reached.

223
Driving
change occur, the indicator light will Parking Brake Cluster” in section “Dashboard
illuminate again. Instruments and Controls”).
The vehicle is equipped with an
NOTE: electric automatic parking brake, also
The gearshift indicator will only work called EPB (Electric Parking Brake).
when the transmission is set in M The EPB braking action on model with
(Manual) mode. “Base” braking system (equipped with
rear floating calliper) is ensured by a
I.C.E. Mode excluding ESC power actuator directly working on
To release the vehicle in low grip the brake pad inside each calliper of
conditions (e.g.: heaps of snow, mud, the rear brake system.
sand, etc), it is possible to shift the All other modes with “Dual Cast”
transmission feature in the specific braking system are equipped with a
mode as required for these situations, dedicated calliper which acts on each During engagement and
by pressing the I.C.E. button and to rear brake disc. disengagement procedures, the
exclude completely the yaw and It can be automatically engaged when warning light flashes until the
spinning control system, by pressing the engine is turned off and parking brake has reached its
5 maximum activation force and is
the button for two seconds (ESC disengaged with engine running,
OFF). driver seatbelt latched and driver door respectively fully released.
closed, while pressing the brake pedal In the above-mentioned conditions,
and operating the shift lever. the automatic engagement function
Furthermore, EPB can be automatically can be deactivated/activated by
engaged above a slope threshold with selecting the menu item “Vehicle
the gearshift in P (Park) to avoid settings” on the main menu (refer to
damage to the vehicle. EPB can be paragraph “Deactivating Automatic
disengaged before turning off the Operation” in this chapter).
vehicle.
Manual Engagement/
When the parking brake is applied, the
warning light lights up on the
Disengagement
tachometer display and the related The parking brake can also be
message is displayed on the instrument manually engaged or disengaged
cluster for 5 seconds (see “Instrument when the engine is running or the
ignition switch is in the RUN position,

224
Driving
by pressing the brake pedal and • It is advisable to keep the "Auto
raising the lever located behind the Apply" function always active (On)
shift lever. CAUTION! so that the vehicle is properly
When the parking brake is applied, The main function of the EPB is to secured with electric parking brake.
the warning light lights up on allow safe parking of the vehicle,
the tachometer and the related therefore it must only be applied Deactivating Automatic
message will be displayed for 5 when the vehicle is already stationary.
Operation
seconds on the instrument cluster. If the EPB is used while the vehicle is
If you attempt to engage/disengage moving and decelerating until a speed The automatic engagement function
the parking brake without having lower of 3 mph (5 km/h) and, in can be deactivated/reactivated by
pressed the brake pedal, a message particular, until complete stop selecting the menu item “Vehicle
will be displayed, warning you to (typically in a sudden brake), it is settings” through the switch on the
proceed. necessary to have the EPB system right side of the steering wheel (refer
If the engine was turned off when the checked by an Authorized Maserati to “Instrument Cluster” in section
automatic engagement device was Dealer. “Dashboard Instruments and
deactivated (see “Deactivating Controls”.)
Automatic Operation” in this chapter) Press and release the switch toward
the arrow (►) to select “Electric Park 5
it is possible to shift the parking brake
simply by pulling the lever upward WARNING! Brake”.
within 3 minutes after turning off. • Always hold the brake pedal pressed
during engagement or
disengagement of the parking
brake.
• The EPB command activation while
running generates a deceleration of
the vehicle with strong deceleration
(Dynamic Braking). It is therefore
recommended to use this feature
only in case of emergency. The
stability of the car is guaranteed by Press and release the switch once
the action of the activated ESC again toward the arrow (►) to
system. visualize the options connected to this
function.
225
Driving
• Auto Apply On (recommended “Setting Saved” Selection notification on the TFT display, please contact an
setting); appears as a popup for 2 seconds then Authorized Maserati Dealer.
• Auto Apply Off. the display will show again the
modified function. Failure Indication
In the event of electric parking brake
system failure, the warning light
on the display will light up and the
related message will show for 5
seconds.

WARNING!
In the event of an EPB failure, take
Scroll with the switch toward the your vehicle to the nearest Authorized
arrow ▲ or ▼ through the In order to disable the automatic Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
programmable options. operation follow the same procedures
5 and select the other option.
Press and release the switch toward
the arrow (►) to set the selected
option. A check mark will remain next
CAUTION!
to the previously-selected item until a
new selection is made. • Under certain conditions when the
battery voltage is low, the electric
automatic parking brake system may
temporarily be deactivated for safety
reasons. Therefore, typically upon
starting the engine, when the
battery voltage drops, a message
Initialize the EPB System after
may temporarily be displayed,
Re-connecting the vehicle battery
indicating that automatic operation
After the detachment and the
is temporarily disabled.
subsequent connection of the battery,
• In case of repetitive requests to reset
the EPB through the messages shown

226
Driving
on the instrument cluster display the Parking and away from the curb on an uphill
warning light will be illuminated. grade.
To initialize the EPB system, lift, Before leaving the vehicle, make sure Apply the parking brake before
release and lift again the lever located that the parking brake is fully applied placing the shift lever in P (Park),
behind the shift lever. and place the shift lever in the P (Park) otherwise the load on the
position. transmission locking mechanism may
Emergency Disengagement
In case of brake lock with complete make it difficult to move the shift
electrical system failure, it is necessary lever out of P (Park).
to force the electric actuator on the WARNING! In certain conditions, it is however
rear calipers (see “Emergency Release • Always check that the vehicle is advisable to disengage the parking
of the Parking Brake” chapter in locked before leaving it. brake manually and slightly apply the
section “In an Emergency”). service brake for starting off. This is
• Never leave children unattended in
advisable when there are obstacles
the vehicle.
EPB Operation with very close to the vehicle in the
Overheated Brakes • Do not park the vehicle on paper, direction in which you intend to move.
grass, dry leaves or other flammable
Driving on mountain roads with steep materials.
slopes or a sports use of the vehicle 5
could overheat the brake system • Do not leave the engine running
components. In these conditions, the while the vehicle is unattended.
parking brake must not be used since
the push of the power actuator might
not be sufficient to ensure vehicle CAUTION!
braking, especially on a slope. When you need to park the vehicle on
Drive normally without braking to a steep slope, both with the engine on
allow the brakes to cool down a few or off, it is recommended not only to
minutes before stopping. In this way, engage the parking brake, but also to
the automatic or manual activation of shift the gearshift lever to P (Park)
the parking brake will ensure vehicle before leaving the vehicle.
braking.
When parking on hill roads, it is
important to turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade

227
Driving

“Drive Away Inhibit” strategy “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy alerts The table shows the vehicle condition
the driver with messages on the and the action that the system runs to
In order to avoid a dangerous
instrument cluster display and exit the dangerous condition.
condition resulting from leaving the
sounding chimes, then puts the
vehicle not “braked” with running
transmission in P (Park).
engine and without driver on board,

Vehicle condition Action of the driver


• Engine running and speed lower than
1.8 mph (3 km/h).
• Transmission in any position other P
The driver releases the brake pedal to
(Park).
get out of the vehicle.
• Driver safety belt unlocked.
• Driver door opened. The system puts the
• Brake pedal pressed. transmission in P
(Park) position.
Warnings Warnings
5 • Slow continuous chime. • Fast chime.
• The condition of the vehicle not in P • A message which invites to engage
(Park) position will be signaled by a the parking brake to prevent vehicle
message on the display. movement will be displayed on the
display.

228
Driving

Brake and Stability the condition of the vehicle brakes of discrepancy between the required
and tires. trajectory and the current one, the
Control System ESC system brakes the appropriate
• These systems cannot prevent
The vehicle is equipped with an collisions, including those resulting wheel to counteract over or under
Electronic Stability Control System from excessive speed in turns, steering.
(ESC), which helps to maintain following another vehicle too • Oversteer - when the vehicle is
directional control in the event of loss closely, or aquaplaning. turning more than appropriate for
of grip of the tires. The system is able • The capabilities of a vehicle the steering wheel position.
to detect potentially dangerous equipped with these systems must • Understeer - when the vehicle is
situations for the stability of the never be exploited in a reckless or turning less than appropriate for the
vehicle and automatically sets the dangerous manner that could steering wheel position.
brakes on all four wheels in a jeopardise the driver’s and the The ESC system has two available
differentiated manner, in order to passenger’s safety or the safety of operating modes:
provide a torque settlement of the others.
vehicle. ESC on
ESC includes the following subsystems: This is the normal ESC operating
Electronic Stability Control mode. At each start-up of the vehicle,
• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); (ESC) 5
the ESC system is set in this mode and
• EBD (Electronic Brake-force should be used for most driving
This system enhances directional
Distribution); conditions. The ESC should only be
control and stability of the vehicle
• TCS (Traction Control System); under various driving conditions. The turned off for specific reasons as
• BAS (Brake Assist System); ESC corrects over steering and under pointed out in the following
steering of the vehicle by applying the paragraphs.
• BTO (Brake Throttle Override);
• HSA (Hill Start Assist). brake to the appropriate wheel. ESC off
Engine power may also be reduced to The “ESC off” mode is aimed for a
assist in counteracting the conditions more spirited driving experience but
of instability and maintain the right also purposeful for driving in deep
WARNING!
direction. The system is also able to snow, sand, or gravel. The current
• These systems cannot prevent the reduce the engine power. mode disables the TCS portion of the
natural laws of physics from Through sensors fitted on the vehicle, ESC and raises the threshold for ESC
affecting the vehicle, nor can they the ESC system detects the driver’s activation, allowing higher wheel spin
increase traction, braking or steering chosen direction comparing it to the than normally granted by the ESC
efficiency beyond that afforded by one maintained while running. In case system. The (ESC OFF) button is
229
Driving
fitted beside the gear shift lever: to situation requiring “ESC off” mode is NOTE:
deactivate the system see “Drive overcome, turn the ESC on again by • When the vehicle's speed is higher
Mode” in this section. pressing the (ESC OFF) button. This than 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear
may also be performed while in a slight clicking sound as well as
motion. other motor noises. The system is
WARNING! performing a self-check cycle to
In SPORT mode the ESC control Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ensure that the ABS is working
thresholds are higher for maximum and Electronic Brake-force properly.
performance on dry road surface. To Distribution (EBD) • This self-check occurs each time the
ensure maximum security of the ESC, vehicle is started and accelerated
The Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
it is recommended not to activate past 7 mph (11 km/h).
provides increased vehicle stability and
SPORT mode on surfaces with
brake performance under most ABS is activated during braking under
medium- and low-grip (e.g., wet,
braking conditions. The system certain road or stopping conditions.
snow, dirt, etc..) with ESC system
automatically “pumps” the brakes ABS-inducing conditions can include
active ( (ESC OFF) button not
during severe braking to prevent ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
pressed).
wheel lock-up. tracks, loose debris.
5 The Electronic Brake-force Distribution You may also experience the following
NOTE: (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from when the brake system goes into Anti-
• When in “ESC off” mode, the TCS over-braking and provides greater Lock:
functionality of ESC is deactivated control of available braking forces
(except for the limited slip feature • The ABS motor running (it may
applied to the rear axle.
described in the TCS paragraph of continue to run for a short time after
this chapter). All other stability the vehicle stops).
features of ESC function regularly. • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
WARNING!
• To improve the vehicle's traction • Brake pedal pulsations.
The ABS helps prevent the wheels
when driving with snow chains, or from locking, but it does not increase • A slight drop or fall away of the
when starting off in deep snow, the physical grip limits between the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable tires and the road. Therefore, always These are all normal characteristics of
to switch to the “ESC off” mode by keep a safe distance from the vehicle ABS functioning.
pressing the (ESC OFF) button and in front of yours and reduce your
remain in this operational mode no speed when entering a curve.
longer than needed. Once the

230
Driving
Activating under slip conditions the vehicle even when it is being
different control systems: accelerated. If the brake pedal is
WARNING! depressed together with the
• if slippage affects both drive wheels,
• The ABS contains sophisticated accelerator, the system does not
it reduces the power transmitted by
electronic equipment that may be consider as “conflict” the sequence
the engine;
susceptible to interference caused “brake-first-then-accelerator” of pedal
by improperly installed or high • if slippage only affects one drive
application and it will not engage the
output radio transmitting wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel
BTO. When the system recognizes the
equipment. This interference can automatically.
sequence “accelerator-first-then-
cause possible loss of anti-lock Brake Assist System (BAS) brake-pressed” as “conflict” the
braking capability. Installation of engine power should be automatically
such equipment should be This system completes the ABS system reduced and, if the driver continues to
performed by qualified Maserati by optimizing the vehicle braking depress the accelerator, the system can
personnel. capacity during emergency brake make the vehicle to come to a
maneuvers. The system detects an complete stop.
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will
emergency braking situation by Additionally, if the brake pedal is
diminish their effectiveness.
sensing the rate and amount of brake released when the accelerator is still
Pumping brakes makes the stopping 5
application and then applies optimum depressed, the corresponding engine
distance longer. Just press firmly on
pressure to the brakes in order to help torque increase gradually to a safe
your brake pedal when you need to
reduce braking distances. value.
slow down or stop. Do not pump
The quick brake coupling is optimal During this event, the ETC light
brakes.
for BAS performances. In order to fully indicator will illuminate. The system
exploit the system, apply continuous exits from this strategy when the
Traction Control System (TCS) brake pedal pressure during the entire accelerator pedal is completely
The current device is an integral part vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce unstuck.
of the ESC system. It operates brake pedal pressure earlier than
automatically by reducing the power required. Once the brake pedal is Hill Start Assist (HSA)
transmitted by the engine in case of released, the BAS is deactivated.
The HSA system is designed to assist
slipping, loss of grip on wet floor the driver when starting a vehicle
(aquaplaning), acceleration on
Brake Throttle Override (BTO)
uphill. HSA will maintain the level of
slippery snow-covered or frozen To complete the range of systems that
brake pressure applied for a short
surfaces, etc. assist braking, the vehicle is equipped
period of time also after releasing the
with BTO, which is designed to stop
brake pedal.

231
Driving
If the driver does not apply the Using the Brakes abnormally high brake temperatures,
throttle during this short period of excessive lining wear, and possible
time, the system will release brake brake damage. In an emergency full
pressure and the vehicle will start CAUTION! braking capacity may be impaired.
sloping down. The system will release To obtain a good performance by
brake pressure proportionally to the brake pads and discs, avoid sudden Brake Pads and Brake Discs
amount of throttle/torque applied as braking during the first 190 mi Wear on the brake pads and brake
the vehicle starts to move in the (300 km). discs depends to a great extent on the
chosen direction.
driving style and the conditions of use
HSA Activation Criteria The pad wear limit is indicated by the and therefore cannot be expressed in
The following criteria must be met in illumination of the warning light actual miles driven on the road.
order for HSA to activate: and by a message on the The brake system is designed for
instrument cluster. optimal braking effect at all speeds
• vehicle is stationary; In this event, please contact an and temperatures.
• gear selection matches vehicle uphill Authorized Maserati Dealer. Certain speeds, braking forces and
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is ambient conditions (e.g. temperature,
5 in forward gear; vehicle backing humidity and long outdoor stopping
uphill is in reverse gear). periods) can therefore cause the
HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all brakes to "squeal". This is normal and
forward gears when the activation will cease after a few brakings.
criteria have been met.
The system will not activate if the gear New Brake Pads and/or Brake
is placed in N (Neutral) or P (Park). Discs
New brake pads have to be “broken
in”, and therefore only attain optimal
friction to the brake disc when the
vehicle has covered several hundreds
of miles.
WARNING!
During this break-in period, the
Riding the brakes can lead to brake slightly reduced braking ability must
failure and possibly an accident. be compensated for by pressing the
Driving with your foot resting or brake pedal harder. This applies
riding on the brake pedal can result in
232
Driving
whenever the brake pads and/or brake Use of the Engine of the break-in and not interpreted as
discs are replaced. an indication of malfunction.

Brake Overheating Breaking-In Specific Requirements


Today's most modern production Avoid exceeding 5000 rpm for the first
Driving on mountain roads with steep
methods are designed to provide 620 mi trip (1000 km).
slopes or a sports use of the vehicle
extremely precise construction and After starting the vehicle, do not
could overheat the brake system
assembly of components. However, exceed 4000 rpm until the engine has
components. In these conditions, the
moving parts do undergo a settling warmed up sufficiently (coolant
parking brake must not be used since
process, basically in the first hours of temperature: 149-158°F /65 70°).
the push of the power actuator might
vehicle operation.
not be sufficient to ensure vehicle While Driving
Do not drive keeping at a constant
braking, especially on a slope.
high speed rate for a prolonged time. Never travel with the tachometer
Drive normally without braking to
While cruising, brief full-throttle indicator approaching the peak rpm,
allow the brakes to cool down a few
acceleration within the limits of local not even downhill. When the
minutes before stopping. The
traffic laws contributes to a good tachometer indicator is approaching
automatic or manual activation of the
break-in. Wide-open throttle the peak rpm (red colored zone), take
parking brake will ensure vehicle 5
acceleration in low gear can be precautions to avoid exceeding that
braking.
detrimental and should be avoided. limit.
Brake overheating could also cause
The engine oil installed in the engine
“squeals”.
at the factory is a high-quality energy
conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality
grades, see “Refillings” in section
“Features and Specifications”.
A new engine may consume some oil
during its first few thousand
miles/kilometers of operation. This Ensure proper operation of different
should be considered as a normal part devices checking their respective
control telltales.

233
Driving
Authorized Maserati Dealer will use to will soon occur. Immediate service is
service your vehicle. Although the required at an Authorized Maserati
CAUTION! vehicle will still be driveable and not Dealer.
• Under normal conditions, all red need towing, contact an Authorized • After the problem has been solved,
warning lights on the instrument Maserati Dealer for service as soon as the Authorized Maserati Dealer
cluster display should be off. When possible. personnel will perform specific tests
they come on, this indicates a for a complete check of the system
malfunction. Refer to “Instrument and, if necessary, road tests.
Cluster” in section “Dashboard
Instruments and Controls”.
• Continuing to drive when a red
warning light is on could cause
serious damage to the vehicle and
affect its performance.

Onboard Diagnostic System


5
Your vehicle is equipped with a
sophisticated onboard diagnostic
system. This system monitors the CAUTION!
performance of the emissions, engine, • Prolonged driving with the
and automatic transmission control Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
systems. When these systems are on could cause further damage to
operating properly, your vehicle will the emissions control system. It could
provide excellent performance and also affect fuel economy and
fuel economy, as well as engine drivability. The vehicle must be
emissions well within current local serviced before any emissions tests
regulations of various countries. can be performed.
If any of these systems require service,
• If the Malfunction Indicator
the system will turn on the
Light (MIL) is flashing while the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
engine is running, severe catalytic
It will also store diagnostic codes and
converter damage and power loss
other information, which your

234
Driving

Electronic Cruise Control Controls


The electronic Cruise Control controls
The electronic Cruise Control (CC)
are located on the left side of the
enables the driver to maintain the
steering wheel.
desired vehicle speed without pressing
Control configuration depends on
the accelerator pedal, reducing driving
which driver assist systems are
fatigue on highways, especially long
installed to the vehicle.
trips, as the set speed is automatically
In the standard configuration there is
maintained. A firm press on the
a specific button to enable and disable
accelerator pedal or the braking pedal
the CC.
will temporarily deactivate the cruise Optional Configuration
control function.
Control buttons have the following
functions:
CAUTION! Standard Configuration
The device can only be switched on at
ON/OFF button to
speeds exceeding 18 mph (30 km/h)
and it switches off automatically when
engage/disengage CC 5
system.
the brake pedal or the accelerator
pedal is pressed.
Optional Configuration

Standard Configuration Press ACC Gap button and


hold it down for 2 seconds
WARNING! In the optional configuration, there is
to enable the CC system.
no specific button to enable and
The Cruise Control function must only
disable the CC, since the driver uses Press ACC button to disable
be activated when traffic and the
the ACC control buttons. the CC system.
route permit a constant speed to be
maintained safely for a sufficiently
long distance.

235
Driving
Shared by All Configurations Displayed Information
Multifunction switch: CC conditions are displayed on the
• Press up (indication RES instrument cluster after selecting
+): increase speed, set “Driver Assist” menu (see paragraph
current speed or resume “TFT Display: Menus and Settings"
previously set speed under “Instrument Cluster” in section
when system is in “Dashboard Instruments and
“cancelled” status; Controls”).
• Pushed (indication Displayed information depends on
CANC): deletes the set system status: ready, disabled,
speed; cancelled or set. To turn the system off, push the
• Press down (indication Apart from the pop-up messages at ON/OFF button a second time or
SET -): set speed/decrease the centre of the display, CC system the ACC button (in the Optional
speed. status is represented by icons at the Configuration). The white light will
top left. These icons remain displayed turn off.
NOTE: even when you exit the "Driver Assist"
5 • The figures only show the Standard screen.
Configuration. The CC screen can be displayed any
time the driver changes system status
• In order to ensure proper operation,
or settings. After 5 seconds of CC
the CC system has been designed to
inactivity, the display goes back to last
shut down if multiple systems are
screen.
operated at the same time (example:
ACC and FCW). When conditions so Activation
allow, the CC system can be
To turn the system on, push the
reactivated by pushing the CC
ON/OFF button or the ACC Gap
“ON/OFF” button or the ACC Gap NOTE:
button for 2 seconds (in the Optional
button (in the Optional
Configuration). The white light The CC system must be turned off
Configuration) and resetting the
with below 3 dashes on the instrument when not in use.
desired vehicle set speed.
cluster display will illuminate.

236
Driving
will be visualized below the green
light.
WARNING! To decrease speed, push downward
Never leave the electronic Cruise the multifunction switch (SET -).
Control system on when not in use. Keeping the switch pushed in the
You could accidentally set the system downward position, the set speed will
or cause it to go faster than you want. continue to decrease by 5 units at a
Always leave the system off when time (5 mph or 5 km/h) until the
you are not using it. switch is released. Release the switch
when the desired speed is reached,
Speed Range of Use Release the accelerator and the and the new set speed will be
vehicle will operate at the selected visualized below the green light.
Speed mph (km/h) speed. Pushing the multifunction switch
Minimum 18 (30) upward (RES +) or downward (SET -)
NOTE: once will enable to increase or
Engaged/activated 18 (30)
The vehicle should be traveling at a decrease the set speed by one unit
Maximum 130 (210) steady speed and on level ground (1 mph or 1 km/h). 5
before pushing the switch downward. Each subsequent tap of the
Setting Desired Speed multifunction switch will increase or
Pressing the “ON/OFF” button or decrease the speed by 1 mph or
Turn on the CC function. When the the ACC Gap button for 2 seconds (in 1 km/h.
vehicle has reached the desired speed the Optional Configuration) or
(in the example: 60 mph), push moving the ignition switch in OFF Temporary Deactivation
downward the multifunction switch position erases the set speed memory. A soft tap on the brake pedal,
(SET -) and release.
Changing Speed Setting pressing the multifunction switch
The green light below the desired
(CANC), or normal brake pressure
speed will illuminate on the When the CC is set, you can increase while slowing the vehicle will
instrument cluster display. cruise speed by pushing upward the temporarily deactivate the CC without
multifunction switch (RES +). Keeping erasing the set speed memory. The
the switch pressed, the set speed will white light will appear on the
continue to increase by 5 units at a display.
time (5 mph or 5 km/h) until the
switch is released. The new set speed

237
Driving
below the set speed with steady light traffic or on winding, icy,
will be displayed. snow-covered or slippery roads.

Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push
upward the multifunction switch (RES
+) and release. The green light with
below the set speed will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. Resume can be
used at any speed above 18 mph
(30 km/h).
Driver Override
If the driver presses the accelerator Using Electronic Cruise Control
pedal while the CC is on, such as to on Hills
overtake another vehicle, and exceeds The transmission may be downshifted
the set speed limit, the system will on hills to maintain the vehicle set
temporarily deactivate the CC. During speed. The CC system maintains set
5 the event, the speed indication below speed up and down hills. A slight
the green light will be blinking. speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep slopes, a greater
speed loss or gain may occur so we
recommend to drive without CC.

WARNING!
Electronic Cruise Control can be
dangerous where the system cannot
maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the
When the accelerator pedal is conditions, and you could lose control
released, the vehicle will return to the and have an accident. Do not use
set speed and the green light with electronic Cruise Control in heavy

238
Driving

Adaptive Cruise Control – on the front grille behind the trident,


and the forward-facing camera behind
ACC (optional) the internal rear-view mirror to detect WARNING!
the presence of a vehicle ahead at a • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
ADAS Equipments close distance and moving in the same designed to increase vehicle driving
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is direction. comfort. It must not be considered
part of ADAS equipments together as a means of replacing the required
with: attention of the driver. The driver is
always required to drive carefully.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The driver is always required to pay
• Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) utmost attention to driving
• Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) conditions (road, traffic, weather)
• Highway Assist (HAS) and style (speed, distance from
• Traffic Sign Assist (TSA). sensed vehicle ahead, brake use).
Driver has the full responsibility of
NOTE: the vehicle therefore his attention is
FCW, LKA ABSA, HAS and TSA are crucial to keeping vehicle control, in
described in the relevant chapters of This vehicle, in this chapter, will be particular when approaching curves
5
this section. indicated as "target vehicle" or and situations with heavy traffic.
"vehicle ahead". Failure to follow these warnings can
ACC Preview NOTE: result in a collision and death or
• If the sensor detects no vehicle serious personal injury.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
further increases the drive comfort ahead, the ACC system will maintain • In some driving scenarios, the ACC
ensured by the Cruise Control when set steady speed. could have detection problems. In
driving on highways and freeways. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle such cases, the ACC could kick in late
Always consider that ACC is not a ahead, the ACC system automatically or unexpectedly. The driver must be
safety system and is not designed to kicks in by slightly accelerating or careful since his/her intervention
prevent accidents. braking (to avoid exceeding the could be necessary.
The ACC allows driver to keep Cruise initially set speed) so that the vehicle • It is always the driver’s responsibility
Control active in limited or moderate keeps present distance, trying to to obey speed limits and to keep
traffic conditions with no need to adapt to the speed of the detected minimum legal distance to the
constantly restore the Cruise Control. vehicle ahead. preceding vehicle.
The ACC uses a radar sensor, located (Continued)
239
Driving
(Continued) similar complex situations such as (green); the white, grey or yellow lines
• ACC system can decelerate only with highway construction zones. represent the LKA and HAS systems.
limited braking, it cannot execute • When entering a junction lane or a The ACC screen can be displayed any
emergency braking. slip road to leave the highway; when time driver changes system status or
The ACC system: driving on narrow, icy, snowy, settings. After 5 seconds of ACC
slippery roads, or on steep uphill and inactivity, the display goes back to last
• Does not activate/react in the screen.
downhill roads.
presence of pedestrians, bicycles,
incoming traffic from the opposite • When circumstances do not allow to ACC Controls and Activation
direction and steady objects such as a drive safely at constant speed. Conditions
vehicle stuck in a traffic jam. Displayed information The buttons on the RH side of the
• Is meant for the use on highways and steering wheel control the ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
well-built roads, not for city traffic or operations and the other
condition, as well as the LKA and HAS
mountain roads. functions/driver assist systems installed
status, is displayed on instrument
• May not have enough time to react cluster after selecting “Driver Assist” to this vehicle.
and/or decelerate sufficiently on menu (see paragraph “TFT Display:
5 vehicles when lane is changed too Menus and Settings" under
quickly or the relative speed is too “Instrument Cluster” in section
high. In such cases the driver has to “Dashboard Instruments and
react appropriately and without any Controls”).
acoustic/visual and warning. Displayed information depends on
• Cannot consider road, traffic and system status: ready, set, temporarily
weather conditions and might prove cancelled or override.
limited when visibility is poor. Apart from the image at the center of
• Does not always fully recognize the display, CC, ACC, LKA and HAS
complex driving conditions and this systems status is represented by icons
could cause an incorrect assessment at the top left and right. These icons
of the required safety distance. remain displayed even when exiting
It is recommended to disable the ACC the "Driver Assist" screen.
system in the following instances: The vehicle(s) and horizontal bars
represent the ACC status as ready
• When driving in the fog, heavy rain,
(white) or with sensed vehicle ahead
heavy snow, slush, heavy traffic and

240
Driving
NOTE: as ACC and ABSA just to mention
1 Multifunction control shared by all
Any change made to tire dimensions some.
driver assist functions/systems:
affects performance of Adaptive While activation of ACC and CC at the
• Press up (indication “RES +”):
Cruise Control and Front Collision same time is impossible.
increase speed, set current speed
or resume previously set speed Warning (FCW), if equipped. Speed Range of Use
when system is in “cancelled” The ACC is not activated in the
status. following conditions: Speed mph (km/h)
• Pushed (indication “CANC”): Minimum 0 (0)
cancel the function if it was in • When braking.
• When parking brake is activated. Engaged/activated 18 (30)
“set” status, going in a ready
condition but remembering the • When automatic transmission is in P Maximum 130 (210)
previous set speed. (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral).
• Press down (indication “SET -”): • When vehicle speed is out of preset Activation/Deactivation
set speed/decrease speed. speed range
NOTE:
2 Two functions button with ACC • When brakes are overheated.
activated: Pictures show status of ACC and LKA
• When driver door is open. 5
• ACC Gap: pressed and released; systems.
• When the driver’s seat belt is
set the distance to sensed
unbuckled. Press and release ON/OFF button to
vehicle ahead as horizontal bars
(setting cycle starts to 3 bars). • When the road is particularly steep activate the ACC. The display will
• CC On: pressed for 2 seconds (both uphill and downhill) at low show the white symbol with below
activates the CC system. speed. 3 dashes will illuminate indicating that
• Press it to switch from CC to • When drive mode (ESC OFF) is system is ready to be set.
ACC. selected.
3 ACC ON/OFF button. If enabled, • When the door is opened at low
pressing this button will disable speed.
CC. • When there has been an ESC event
4 HAS ON/OFF button with ACC set in the last 5 seconds, or is still active.
only. See "Highway Assist - HAS" • When there is an object too close in
in this section for further details. front of the vehicle.
It is possible that more than one
system is active at the same time such

241
Driving
faster than you want. Always leave
the system off when you are not using
it.

Setting the Speed


When the vehicle reaches the required
speed, press down and release the
multifunction control (SET -). The
display will show set speed
corresponding to vehicle current one.
When in Driver Assist Page Push the ON/OFF button a second time Speed value will be indicated below
and release to turn the system off. A the green symbol and above the
pop-up message is displayed for 2 distance bars, in the center of the
seconds to indicate that ACC was display.
disabled.

Out of Driver Assist Page


If a vehicle is detected as being too
close, the display will show a message
for 5 seconds and trigger a signal to Remove foot from accelerator pedal
warn the driver that current conditions and vehicle will continue at set speed.
do not allow enabling of the ACC. At
any rate, system will remain in the WARNING! Driver Override
ready status. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control If the driver accelerates beyond the set
(ACC) system on when not in use is speed or faster than the car would do
dangerous. You could accidentally with ACC engaged, the set speed
activate the system or cause it to go below the green light will blink and
242
Driving
the time gap bars will vanish to • The ACC system applies the brake the vehicle will temporarily deactivate
indicate that in this condition the down to a full stop when following the ACC without erasing the set speed
system cannot control the distance a target vehicle. If an ACC host memory. The white light will appear
between vehicle and sensed vehicle vehicle follows a target vehicle to a on the display with below the set
ahead. Vehicle speed will be standstill, after a two or three speed.
determined only by the accelerator second delay, the system will not be
pedal position. able to resume driving the car Conditions for Disabling and
autonomously. At this point it is Deactivation
Changing Speed Setting necessary for the driver to manually Besides the cases specified in the
Once speed is set, driver can increase reengage the system by either using previous paragraph, the following
or decrease it by respectively pressing the multifunction control (press SET- conditions will disable the system:
multifunction control up (RES +) or or RES+) or by pressing the
• Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) kicks in.
down (SET -). Speed can be increased accelerator pedal (see “ACC
or decreased in two ways: Operation Before and During Stop” • Transmission lever is not in D (Drive).
in this chapter). • The Electronic Stability Control and
• Pressing control once, set speed will
• The ACC system maintains set speed the Traction Control System
increase or decrease by one unit
(ESC/TCS) activate.
corresponding to 1 mph (1 km/h). when driving up hill and down hill. 5
However, a slight speed change on • Vehicle parking brake is operated.
• Hold the control to increase or
decrease set speed by 5 mph moderate hills is normal. In addition, • The driver safety belt is unbuckled at
(10 km/h) at a time. downshifting may occur while low speed.
climbing uphill or descending • The driver door is ajar at low speed.
NOTE: downhill. This is normal operation • The driver disabled the ESC using the
• When pressing the multifunction and necessary to maintain set speed. (ESC OFF) button on central
control up (RES +) or down (SET -), When driving uphill and downhill, console.
the new set speed will be the current the ACC system will cancel if the
speed of the vehicle. • The road is too steep both uphill and
braking temperature exceeds normal
downhill at low speed.
• When using (SET -) control to range.
The system is deactivated and set
decelerate, if the engine braking
speed is deleted from system memory,
power does not slow down the Temporary Deactivation if the ACC ON/OFF button is pressed or
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing if ignition device is turned to OFF.
speed, the brake system will
the multifunction control (CANC), or
automatically slow down the vehicle.
normal brake pressure while slowing

243
Driving

Resuming Speed If system does not detect the presence vehicle ahead, press and release the
of any vehicles ahead, only the bars distance setting button.
If a speed setting is stored in system
referred to set distance will be
memory, press the multifunction
displayed.
control (RES +) up and take foot off
When system detects the presence of a
the accelerator pedal. The last set
vehicle ahead, it is displayed in front
speed will be displayed.
of the bars (see example in the figure).

WARNING!
The resume function should be used
only when road and traffic conditions
allow it. Resuming a too high or too
low speed for current traffic and road Each press and release of the button
conditions could cause a harsh vehicle changes the gap starting from 3 bars
acceleration or deceleration which (default distance) and moving in a
could increase the risk of collisions sequential way towards the minimum
5 and death or serious injury. distance: 3→2→1→4→3→2→1→4 and so
When in Driver Assist Page on.
Setting the ACC Gap If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle
will maintain the set speed. If a slower
The specified ACC gap can be set by moving vehicle is detected in the same
varying the distance setting among the lane, the system displays the target
four possible options identified by the vehicle icon before the bars. From that
number of horizontal bars: moment, the system adjusts the vehicle
• Maximum (longest) distance: 4 bars. speed automatically to maintain the
• Long distance: 3 bars (default distance setting, regardless of the set
distance). speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set
• Medium distance: 2 bars.
distance until:
• Short distance: 1 bar. Out of Driver Assist Page
Using this distance setting and the • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a
To increase or decrease the number of speed above the set speed.
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets bars, corresponding to the gap from
the gap to the vehicle ahead.
244
Driving
• The vehicle ahead moves out of the NOTE: determines that the vehicle has moved
lane or view of the sensor. The displayed warning is a warning back to a location with left hand
• The distance setting is changed. for the driver to take action and does drive.
• The driver disables the system. not necessarily mean that the Forward ACC Operation Before and
The maximum braking applied by ACC Collision Warning (FCW) system is
During Stop
is limited; however, the driver can applying the brakes autonomously.
always apply the brakes manually, if If an ACC host vehicle follows a target
necessary. Obviously, any time the ACC Overtake Aid vehicle to a standstill, after two or
system automatically operates the three seconds the system will not be
When driving with ACC engaged and able to resume driving the car
brakes, the brake lights will turn on as
following a target vehicle, the system autonomously. In this condition, TFT
if the driver was braking.
will provide an additional acceleration displays an instruction message pop
A Proximity Warning on display will
to assist in passing vehicles in front. up for 5 seconds.
alert the driver if ACC predicts that its
This additional acceleration is When the ACC system brings the
maximum braking level is not
triggered when the driver utilizes the vehicle to a standstill while following
sufficient to maintain the set distance.
left turn signal to start overtaking. In a target vehicle, the brakes are
If this occurs, a visual alert will flash
locations with left hand drive traffic, released after two or three seconds
on the display and a chime will sound
overtake aid is active only when
5
while ACC continues to apply its after the stop and at the same time
passing on the left hand side of the the system inserts the parking brake.
maximum braking capacity.
target vehicle. When parking brake engages the ACC
When a vehicle goes from a location deactivates going to ready state.
with left hand drive traffic to a At this point the driver must reengage
location with right hand drive traffic, the system acting on the multifunction
the ACC system will automatically control (RES + or SET -) or alternatively
detect traffic direction. In this on the accelerator pedal. While ACC
condition, overtake aid is active only with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
when passing on the right side of the standstill, if the driver unbuckles the
target vehicle. This additional seatbelt or opens the door, the ESC
acceleration is triggered when the system will activate the EPB. During
driver utilizes the right turn signal to standstill, ACC system monitors the
start overtaking. In this condition the occupant detection signals: if the
ACC system will no longer provide driver's seatbelt becomes unbuckled,
overtake aid on the left side until it

245
Driving
the ACC system shall be cancelled ACC and FCW systems will recover the condition that deactivated the
when the EPB is applied. operation after the vehicle has left system is no longer present, the
these areas. Under rare conditions, system will return to the “Adaptive
when the radar is not tracking any Cruise Control Off” state and will
WARNING! vehicles or objects in its path this resume function by simply
When the ACC system is resumed, the warning may temporarily occur. reactivating it.
driver must ensure that there are no If weather conditions are not a factor,
NOTE:
pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the the driver should examine the sensor.
It may require cleaning or removal of If the radar sensor wipe warning
path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
an obstruction. The sensor is located in message occurs frequently (e.g. more
these warnings can result in a collision
the center of the front grille, behind than once on every trip) without any
and death or serious personal injury.
the Maserati trident. snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
To keep the ACC System operating have the radar sensor realigned at an
Display Warnings and properly, it is important to note the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Maintenance of ACC and FCW following maintenance items:
Systems Clean Front Windshield Warning
• Always keep the sensor clean. This warning will display and a signal
5 Wipe Front Radar Sensor Warning Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a will indicate when conditions
This warning will display and a signal soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage temporarily limit system performance
will indicate when conditions it. due to failed signal reception. This
temporarily limit system performance • Do not remove any screws from the most often occurs at times of poor
due to sensor poor or failed signal sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain
reception. This most often occurs at system malfunction or failure and and fog. The ACC and FCW systems
times of poor visibility, such as in snow require a sensor realignment. may also become temporarily blinded
or heavy rain. The ACC and FCW
• If the sensor or front end of the due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt,
systems may also become temporarily
vehicle is damaged due to a collision, or ice on the windshield and fog on
blinded due to obstructions, such as
see your authorized dealer for the inside of glass or when driving in
mud, dirt or ice on the radar sensor. In
service. bad weather. In these cases, the system
these cases, the system will be
• Do not attach or install any will have degraded performance.
disabled.
accessories near the sensor, including The ACC and FCW systems will recover
This message can sometimes be
transparent material or aftermarket operation after the vehicle has left
displayed while driving in highly
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC these areas. Under rare conditions,
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with
system failure or malfunction. When when the camera is not tracking any
reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The

246
Driving
vehicles or objects in its path this If the problem persists, contact an
warning may temporarily occur. Authorized Maserati Dealer.
If weather conditions are not a factor,
the driver should examine the
windshield and the camera. They may
require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created
limited functionality is no longer
present, the ACC and FCW systems will
return to full functionality. Turns and Bends
NOTE: When driving on a curve with ACC
engaged, the system may decrease the
If the windshield wiper warning Precautions while Driving with
vehicle speed and acceleration for
message occurs frequently (e.g. more ACC stability reasons, with no target
than once on every trip) without any
Offset Driving vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the windshield and
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the out of the curve the system will 5
same lane that is offset from your resume your original Set Speed. This is
forward-facing camera inspected at an
direct line of travel, or a vehicle a part of normal ACC system
Authorized Maserati Dealer.
merging in from a side lane. There functionality. Moreover, the radar
may not be sufficient distance to the sensor might detect a vehicle on a
Service ACC/FCW Warning
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may nearby lane or no longer detect the
If the ACC and FCW systems turn off,
move in and out of the line of travel, target vehicle.
and the system displays a service
which can cause your vehicle to brake
warning, there may be an internal
or accelerate unexpectedly.
system fault or a temporary
malfunction that limits functionality.
Although the vehicle is still driveable
under normal conditions, ACC and
FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC and
FCW again later, following a key cycle.

247
Driving
In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lane
and it may not detect the vehicle until
it is too late for the driver to take
action. ACC may not detect a vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the
lane changing vehicle.
Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Using ACC on Hills Stationary Objects and Vehicles
When driving on steep hills, ACC may ACC does not react to stationary
not detect a vehicle in your lane when objects and stationary vehicles. For
the vehicle reaches the crest. example, ACC will not react in
Depending on the speed, vehicle load, situations where the vehicle you are
traffic conditions, and the steepness of following exits your lane and the
5 the hills, ACC performance may be vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane.
limited. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles (like
motorcycles) traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the
lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you
are traveling.

248
Driving

Radar Device - Compliance harmful interference in which case the Forward Collision Warning
Statement user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense. – FCW (optional, with ACC
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure only)
Operation is subject to the following Information
This equipment complies with FCC
Operation
two conditions:
radiation exposure limits set forth for The Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
• this device may not cause harmful system with braking action interacts
an uncontrolled environment. This
interference, and with the Adaptive Cruise Control
equipment should be installed and
• this device must accept any operated with minimum distance of (ACC), uses the same parts for sensing
interference received, including 7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator vehicle ahead (hereinafter “target
interference that may cause and your body. vehicle”) as well as part of the
undesired operation. This transmitter must not be warnings/messages on system
Any unauthorized modifications or co-located or operating in conjunction condition and activation status. For
changes to these devices could void with any other antenna or transmitter. further details, refer to “Adaptive
the authority of the user to operate Cruise Control - ACC” in this section.
this equipment. Full performance can be reached only 5
This equipment has been tested and when both the sensing parts have
found to comply with the limits for a detected the object, the difference
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part between full and reduced
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are performance is not visible for the
designed to provide reasonable driver.
protection against harmful The FCW provides audible and visual
interference when the equipment is warnings when a potential collision is
operated in a commercial detected. Brake actuation and limited
environment. This equipment braking may also be applied
generates, uses, and can radiate radio depending on the specific scenario.
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the NOTE:
instruction manual, may cause harmful FCW system is not intended for
interference to radio communications. towing: this could lead the system to
Operation of this equipment in a malfunctions and/or to late reaction.
residential area is likely to cause

249
Driving
When the system determines a actuation too.
collision with the vehicle in front of • FCW will automatically deactivated
you is no longer probable, the warning when (ESC OFF) button is pressed
messages will be deactivated. (LED light up).
NOTE:
• Bad weather conditions, like heavy
rain, snow, etc., can lead to reduced
WARNING!
system performance. Under these
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is
conditions relevant objects will not
not intended to avoid a collision on
be detected or detected late by the
FCW monitors the information from its own, nor can FCW detect every
system.
the forward looking radar sensor as type of potential collision. The driver
• FCW is designed to react in specific has the responsibility to avoid a
well as the Electronic Brake Controller situations in typical traffic scenarios
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a collision by controlling the vehicle
with objects in the same lane driving via braking and steering. Failure to
forward collision. When the system in the same direction, but under
determines that a forward collision is follow this warning could lead to
certain conditions it can also react on serious injury or death. The driver is
5 probable, the driver will be provided stationary objects in the same lane. It
with audible and visual warnings and always in charge to safely drive and
is not designed to react to oncoming to avoid critical situations, and not
may provide a warning brake traffic or crossing traffic.
actuation. If the driver does not take rely on the support of the FCW
• The FCW alerts may be triggered to system. Driver has to keep in mind
actuation based upon these
objects other than vehicles such as that the system and therefore its
progressive warnings, then the system
guard rails or sign posts based on the intervention is always subject to the
will provide a limited level of active
course prediction. This is expected prevailing physical limits.
braking to help slow down the vehicle
and is a part of normal FCW
and mitigate the potential forward • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is
activation and functionality.
collision. If the driver reacts to the not intended either to warn or to
warnings by braking and the system • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. apply any brake aid/brake
determines that the driver intends to To prevent such misuse of the system, intervention in the event of
avoid the collision by braking but has after four Active Braking events collisions with pedestrians or
not applied sufficient brake force, the within a key cycle, the Active Braking bicycles.
system will compensate and provide portion of FCW will be deactivated
additional brake force as required. until the next key cycle. The limit of
four events applies to the brake

250
Driving

Speed Range of Use NOTE:


The FCW system setting is kept in
Speed mph (km/h) memory from one key cycle to the
Minimum 0 (0) next.
Engaged/activated 1.12 (1.8)
Maximum 155 (250) Changing FCW Sensitivity and
Active Braking
When the speed is outside the The default status of FCW Sensitivity is
specified limits, the system the “Medium” setting. When the
automatically disables without turning Setting options are described in the active braking function (“Forward
on the corresponding warning light following paragraph. Collision Warning Active Braking”)
on the instrument cluster. When FCW status for some reason setting is on, the system warns you of
changes to off, the corresponding a possible collision with the vehicle in
FCW Status front of you when you are farther
amber warning light on instrument
The driver can adjust FCW sensitivity cluster will light on. away and it applies limited braking.
or enable/disable the brake actuation This gives you the most reaction time
5
with the other emergency brakings by to avoid a possible collision.
touching "Controls" soft-key on MTC+ Changing the sensitivity status to the
display. The current setting is indicated “Near” setting, allows the system to
beside to the "Forward Collision warn you of a possible collision with
Warning" soft-key. If you want to the vehicle in front of you when you
change the setting, touch the soft-key are much closer. This setting provides
on the side to enter FCW page. less reaction time than the “Far”
sensitivity setting, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
“Medium” is the intermediate status
This warning light informs the driver between the two described above.
that FCW is disabled. This warning
light will light even when the
activation of another driver assistance
feature or drive mode (example:
(ESC OFF)) disables the FCW.

251
Driving
providing limited autonomous braking This equipment has been tested and
or additional brake support if the found to comply with the limits for a
driver is not braking adequately in the Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
event of a potential frontal collision. In 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
this state the system disables the brake designed to provide reasonable
jerk. protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
Limited Operation and Service operated in a commercial
Warning environment. This equipment
The messages indicating on display the generates, uses, and can radiate radio
NOTE: limited functionality or service at an frequency energy and, if not installed
• The default values shall appear at Authorized Maserati Dealer required and used in accordance with the
every new ignition cycle: Sensitivity = are the same as for the ACC system. instruction manual, may cause harmful
“Medium” and Active Braking = on. For further details, refer to “Adaptive interference to radio communications.
Cruise Control – ACC” in this section. Operation of this equipment in a
• FCW may not react to irrelevant
residential area is likely to cause
objects such as objects not in the Radar Device - Compliance
5 harmful interference in which case the
path of the car, stationary objects Statement user will be required to correct the
that are far away, oncoming traffic,
This device complies with Part 15 of interference at his own expense.
on cross traffic vehicles, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure
of speed. Operation is subject to the following Information
two conditions: This equipment complies with FCC
• The active braking (autonomous
braking/braking aid) will not be • this device may not cause harmful radiation exposure limits set forth for
provided in case of potential collision interference, and an uncontrolled environment. This
with static object such as guard rails, • this device must accept any equipment should be installed and
walls, etc..). interference received, including operated with minimum distance of
interference that may cause 7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator
• FCW will be disabled like ACC (refer
undesired operation. and your body.
to chapter “Adaptive Cruise Control -
Any unauthorized modifications or This transmitter must not be
ACC” in this section.
changes to these devices could void co-located or operating in conjunction
Changing the active braking status to the authority of the user to operate with any other antenna or transmitter.
“Off” prevents the system from this equipment.

252
Driving

Lane Keeping Assist - LKA NOTE: System response can be set to "Early",
In case of wet road or raining "Medium" (default mode) or "Late".
(optional, with ACC only) System reaction force can be set to
conditions the function could be
This system was designed especially disabled by the system in order to "Low", "Medium" (default mode) or
for highway or freeway driving, to minimize the risks. "High".
reduce the risk that the vehicle, under
particular circumstances, accidentally Speed Range of Use
departs from the lane in use. When
this happens, graphic instructions on Speed mph (km/h)
instrument cluster display together Minimum 37 (60)
with steering torque application and
steering wheel vibration (depending Engaged/activated 37 (60)
on the distance to the line) warn the Maximum 112 (180)
driver that the vehicle is going out of
the lane initiates a steering maneuver Customized Settings
to try to prevent the lane exit. Meanings of Settings
LKA is configurable by the driver in
To detect lane lines, the system uses 5
the forward-facing camera behind the order to maximize its efficiency based • "Visual" only: the system will not
rear-view mirror, which is the same on the driver driving style and the request any steering torque/
one used also by the lighting system expectation of the system, reducing at vibration to correct the car
to manage the automatic high beams. the same time the possible trajectory. The system will only show
The logic core is in the front radar. invasiveness. on the TFT display when the vehicle
LKA system remembers the condition Entering "Controls" page on MTC+ is passing the lane.
it was in before turning off the display the driver can see the current • "Visual & Haptic": the system will
vehicle. setting beside the "Lane Keeping apply steering torque when lane
Refer to “MTC+ "Controls" Screen” in Assist" soft-key. departure is detected while showing
section “Dashboard Instruments and Touching “Lane Keeping Assist” at the same time the proper cluster
Controls” for further information. soft-key can disable or enable the indication, adding to this steering
system. vibration when the departure is very
Touching the soft-key on the side the imminent.
driver can change the setting. When "Visual & Haptic" is selected
Driver warnings can be only "Visual" and LKA is enabled then the following
or "Visual & Haptic" (default mode). menu will be used by the system.

253
Driving
• "LKA Sensitivity": it tunes the wheel or with hands off for only a • With lane boundaries it is mainly
distance to the lane boundary where limited amount of time. When the referred to painted lines,
the system will start to apply steering system is enabled it will trigger cluster nevertheless the system in good
torque. warning in case at least one hand is conditions might properly recognize
• "LKA Strength": it tunes the steering not detected on the steering wheel. as valid lane boundaries also other
torque value to have a stronger or The torque application as well as the types (for example road edges, curbs,
weaker trajectory correction/ vibration are suppressed/inhibited in etc..).
deviation. case of: high driver torque in the
Being this function used to prevent
steering wheel, high lateral
unintentional lane change/lane drift, it
acceleration, hands not on the steering
will be temporary suppressed/inhibited
wheel detected for more than a
WARNING! by a turn indicator activation,
certain time.
In rare cases, Lane Keeping Assist therefore, graphic warning, steering
High dynamic driving behaviors,
(LKA) may make an inappropriate torque application and vibration will
driving on the lane boundary, or
steering torque application. LKA may be terminated. In this condition in case
driving off course will prevent the
be interrupted at any time counter of a vehicle detected by the Blind Spot
function from working. FCW braking
steering. Lack of attention may lead to Assist (BSA) system in the covered area
5 and stability system interventions (ESC,
serious injury or death. on the proper side, there can be the
ABS) will also prevent the system from
transition from LKA to Active Blind
operating. Changing lanes results in
System Availability Spot Assist (ABSA) (if this latter is on
system inhibition for a certain time. In
and properly configured).
The ADAS systems (LKA, CC, ACC, FCW addition, the driver must respect some
and HAS) help the driver while driving. road characteristics such as Function Description and
These systems can be set and minimum-maximum width, lanes Operating Mode
monitored simultaneously on the clearly defined by two lane boundaries
and, only in limited cases and for a The intent of the function is to prevent
display, after opening “Driver Assist”
limited time, at least one lane the lane departure by warning the
menu (see paragraph “TFT Display:
boundary. driver through indication on the
Menus and Settings” under
cluster and, if set, applying steering
“Instrument Cluster” in section
NOTE: torque and vibration. Whenever the
“Dashboard Instruments and
• In case of wet road or raining system is enabled there will be graphic
Controls”).
conditions the function could be on the dedicated screen in the driver
LKA is designed for an attentive driver;
disabled by the system in order to assist page and for the others it will be
therefore the system is available only
minimize the risks. available in the left top corner of the
when his/her hands are on the steering

254
Driving
cluster screen. The graphic which is detected and the system is capable
intent is to represent at the glance the to intervene on it.
system knowledge of the lane in front An example of these screens can be
of the car, the system suppression found in the following figures:
status and warning. A: with only LKA system activated,
For this reason, a simple colour code steering torque in progress to
has been adopted for each line (of the correct the trajectory towards
two presented): the lane center;
• Both grey lines means system is B: with LKA and ACC systems
enabled, not able to operate activated, car is crossing the lane
(suppression condition present or boundary, steering torque and
lane detection system not able to vibration if configured are in
properly estimate the lane); progress when this graphic is
• Left/right grey line: the lane shown.
detection system is not able to
detect that specific lane boundary;
• Yellow line: there is a steering 5
torque intervention in progress that
tries to prevent a departure on that
side, in this situation the warning
should increase the driver attention When in Driver Assist Page
requiring him/her to properly handle
the situation;
• Yellow flashing line: the graphic is
shown whenever the system detects
a very imminent lane departure;
torque and steering vibration can be
added to this warning if configured
by the customer.
The white lines (one or both) indicates
that the corresponding lane boundary

255
Driving
rain, snow, wet roads, fog, direct sun prevent/interrupt the system
on the camera, etc.). intervention.
NOTE:
• The presence of the hands on the
WARNING!
steering wheel is detected by a logic
If the driver fails to adapt his/her
combination of a capacitive sensor
driving style, Lane Keeping Assist
installed in the steering wheel and
(LKA) can neither reduce the risk of an
the measured applied torque at the
accident nor override the laws of
steering column. This leads to a more
physics. It cannot take into account
robust hands detection when hands
road, weather or traffic conditions.
are actually on the steering wheel (at
Active LKA is only an aid. Driver is
least one).
always responsible for the distance to
• The sensors are not able to detect the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
the presence of the hands on the for braking in good time and for
steering wheel areas covered in staying in lane.
5 wood, plastic bezels or carbon inserts
(where present).
System in Fault
Sharp turns, slopes and change in When the LKA cannot properly
slopes, poor lane boundaries, as well operate due to a fault of its
as construction areas and all the components or because the windshield
Out of Driver Assist scenario described in this paragraph
The icons that represent the status of in front of the forward facing camera
may challenge the system, therefore is dirty, the amber light and/or the
the ADAS systems remain displayed be always ready to prevent any
even when you exit the "Driver Assist" corresponding message will be
unexpected behaviour of the car. displayed.
screen. Damaged front bumper, windshield
System Limitations replaced without proper technical
intervention may also lead to system
Because of physical limits, in order to malfunction or system unavailability.
properly operate, the system needs Other conditions such as fault, but not
good visibility (it might not work or explicitly indicated here may also
not properly operate in case of heavy

256
Driving
This equipment has been tested and Blind Spot Assist (without
found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part ACC)
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
BSA System Operation
protection against harmful The Blind Spot Assist (BSA) system uses
interference when the equipment is two radar-based sensors, located
operated in a commercial inside the rear bumper fascia, to
environment. This equipment detect highway licensable vehicles
generates, uses, and can radiate radio (cars, buses, motorbikes, etc.) that
If message suggestion does not allow frequency energy and, if not installed enter the blind spot zones from the
fixing the fault, avoid using the system and used in accordance with the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
and have the vehicle inspected at an instruction manual, may cause harmful The example shown in the figure
Authorized Maserati Dealer. interference to radio communications. highlights the blind spots on either
Operation of this equipment in a side of the vehicle when oncoming
Radar Device - Compliance residential area is likely to cause traffic is approaching from behind.
Statement harmful interference in which case the 5
This device complies with Part 15 of user will be required to correct the
the FCC Rules (NF3-LRR4). interference at his own expense.
Operation is subject to the following Radiofrequency Radiation Exposure
two conditions: Information
• this device may not cause harmful This equipment complies with FCC
interference, and radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment. This
• this device must accept any
equipment should be installed and
interference received, including
operated with minimum distance of
interference that may cause
7.8 in (20 cm) between the radiator When the vehicle is started, the BSA
undesired operation.
and your body. warning light will momentarily
Any unauthorized modifications or
This transmitter must not be illuminate in both outside rear view
changes to these devices could void
co-located or operating in conjunction mirrors to let the driver know that the
the authority of the user to operate
with any other antenna or transmitter. system is operational and on. The BSA
this equipment.
system sensors operate when the

257
Driving
vehicle is in any forward gear and The BSA system monitors the detection • Always pay attention to the traffic
enters standby mode when the zones on both sides of the vehicle situation and maintain a safe
transmission is in (P) Park. when the vehicle speed reaches distance at the side of the vehicle.
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of NOTE:
vehicles in these areas. If your vehicle has experienced any
damage in the area where the sensor
is located, even if the fascia is not
WARNING! damaged, the sensor may have
• The BSA system does NOT alert the become misaligned. Take your vehicle
driver about rapidly approaching at an Authorized Maserati Dealer to
vehicles that are outside the verify sensor alignment. Having a
detection zones. sensor that is misaligned will result in
The BSA detection zone shown in • The BSA might alert the driver too the BSA not operating to specification.
figure covers approximately one lane late especially in case of rapidly The area on the rear bumper fascia
on both sides of the vehicle approaching vehicles. where the radar sensors are located
5 (approximately 11 ft or 3.3 m). The must remain free of snow, ice, and
blind spot area extends from dirt/road contamination so that the
immediately behind the exterior BSA system can function properly. Do
rear-view mirrors up to about 23 ft (7 WARNING!
not cover or block the area of the rear
m) behind the rear bumper. Risk of accident despite Blind Spot bumper fascia where the radar sensors
Assist (BSA). are located with foreign objects
BSA does not detect/react to the (bumper stickers, spoilers, bicycle racks,
following: etc.).
• Overtaking vehicles close on the The BSA system notifies the driver of
side, placing them in the blind spot vehicles or objects in the detection
area. As a result, BSA may neither zones by illuminating the BSA warning
give warnings nor intervene in such light located in the outside mirrors in
situations. addition to sounding an audible
(chime) alert and reducing the radio
volume (if the radio is on). Refer to

258
Driving
“BSA and RCP Setting” in this chapter Entering from the Rear
for further information. The alert will turn on when the
The BSA system monitors the vehicles that come up from behind
detection zone from three different your vehicle on either side and enter
entry points (side, rear, overtaking the rear detection zone with a relative
traffic) while driving to see if an alert speed of more than 27 mph (43 km/h).
is necessary. The BSA system will issue
an alert whenever a vehicle enters any
one detection zone as outlined below.
Speed Range of Use

Speed mph (km/h)


Minimum 6 (10)
Engaged/activated 6 (10)
Maximum – (–)
5
Entering from the Side Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that move into your adjacent The figures show the vehicle
lanes from either side of the vehicle. approaching (A) and passing (O)
another vehicle in the overtaking lane.
If you pass another vehicle slowly, the Other Cases
vehicle remains in the blind spot for The BSA system is not designed to
approximately 2 seconds, the BSA issue an alert on stationary objects
warning light in the outside mirror such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage
will illuminate after 1.5 seconds. heaps, berms, etc. However,
If the difference in speed between the occasionally the system may alert on
two vehicles is greater, the warning such objects. This is normal operation
light will not illuminate. and your vehicle does not require
service.

259
Driving
• The BSA system is not designed to NOTE:
detect pedestrians, cyclists, or In a parking lot situation, oncoming
animals. vehicles can be obscured by vehicles
• Even if your vehicle is equipped with parked on either side. If the sensors
the BSA system, always check your are blocked by other structures or
vehicle’s outside and rear-view vehicles, the system will not be able to
mirrors for any vehicles approaching alert the driver.
from behind or overtaking.
Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
• Use your turn signal before changing the parking space until the rear end of
lanes. the vehicle is moderately exposed.
The BSA system will not alert you of
The RCP system will then have a clear
objects that are traveling in the RCP - Rear Cross Path view of the cross traffic. If an
opposite direction of the vehicle in
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is oncoming vehicle is detected, the RCP
adjacent lanes.
intended to aid the drivers when gear system will alert the driver using both
in reverse of parking spaces where the visual and audible alarms. If the
radio is on, it will also reduce the radio
5 their vision of oncoming vehicles may
volume.
be blocked.
The RCP system monitors the rear
detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle. Using sensors located on either
side of the rear bumper, it detects any
vehicles or objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a
minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h) to a
maximum of approximately 10 mph
WARNING! (16 km/h), such as in parking lot
• The BSA system is only an aid to situations.
help detect vehicles in the blind spot
zones. WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. More

260
Driving
specifically, it is intended to be used BSA in Visual Mode same side at the same time, both the
to help a driver detect an oncoming When operating in “Visual” mode, the visual and audio alerts will be issued.
vehicle in a parking lot situation. BSA system will provide a visual alert In addition to the audible alert, the
Drivers must be careful when backing in the appropriate side view mirror radio volume will be reduced (if the
up, even when using RCP. Always when it detects a vehicle or an object radio is on).
check carefully behind your vehicle, in the detection areas monitored by its
look behind you, and be sure to check sensors: depending on the status of
for pedestrians, animals, other the relative turn indicator, the
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots warning light can be fixed or flashing.
before backing up. Failure to do so However, when the system is
can result in serious injury or death. operating in RCP mode, it will respond
with both visual and audible alerts
BSA and RCP Setting when an oncoming vehicle or an
Setting modes can be selected from object approaching the rear end side
the MTC+ System. of the vehicle is detected.
Touch “Controls” soft-key and then Whenever an audible alert is NOTE:
“Blind Spot Assist” soft-key to enter requested, the radio is muted (if the 5
radio is on). If the hazard flashers are on, the BSA
the setting page. system will issue the appropriate visual
BSA in Visual and Acoustic Mode alert only.
When operating in “Visual & Acoustic”